C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Full Speed USB Flash MCU Family Analog Peripherals High Speed 8051 μC Core - 10-Bit ADC (C8051F380/1/2/3/C only) - Pipelined instruction architecture; executes 70% of • Up to 500 ksps instructions in 1 or 2 system clocks • Built-in analog multiplexer with single-ended and - Up to 48 MIPS operation differential mode - Expanded interrupt handler • VREF from external pin, internal reference, or V DD • Built-in temperature sensor Memory • External conversion start input option - 4352 or 2304 Bytes RAM - Two comparators - 64, 32, or 16 kB Flash; In-system programmable in - Internal voltage reference (C8051F380/1/2/3/C only) 512-byte sectors - Brown-out detector and POR Circuitry Digital Peripherals USB Function Controller - 40/25 Port I/O; All 5 V tolerant with high sink current - USB specification 2.0 compliant - Hardware enhanced SPI™, two I2C/SMBus™, and two - Full speed (12 Mbps) or low speed (1.5 Mbps) operation enhanced UART serial ports - Integrated clock recovery; no external crystal required for - Six general purpose 16-bit counter/timers full speed or low speed - 16-bit programmable counter array (PCA) with five cap- - Supports eight flexible endpoints ture/compare modules - 1 kB USB buffer memory - External Memory Interface (EMIF) - Integrated transceiver; no external resistors required Clock Sources On-Chip Debug - Internal Oscillator: ±0.25% accuracy with clock recovery - On-chip debug circuitry facilitates full speed, non-intru- enabled. Supports all USB and UART modes sive in-system debug (No emulator required) - External Oscillator: Crystal, RC, C, or clock (1 or 2 Pin - Provides breakpoints, single stepping, modes) inspect/modify memory and registers - Low Frequency (80 kHz) Internal Oscillator - Superior performance to emulation systems using - Can switch between clock sources on-the-fly ICE-chips, target pods, and sockets Packages Voltage Supply Input: 2.7 to 5.25 V - 48-pin TQFP (C8051F380/2/4/6) - Voltages from 2.7 to 5.25 V supported using On-Chip - 32-pin LQFP (C8051F381/3/5/7/C) Voltage Regulators - 5x5 mm 32-pin QFN (C8051F381/3/5/7/C) Temperature Range: –40 to +85 °C Rev. 1.4 10/13 Copyright © 2013 by Silicon Laboratories C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 2 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table of Contents 1. System Overview..................................................................................................... 16 2. C8051F34x Compatibility........................................................................................ 20 2.1. Hardware Incompatibilities................................................................................ 21 3. Pinout and Package Definitions............................................................................. 22 4. Typical Connection Diagrams................................................................................ 34 4.1. Power ............................................................................................................ 34 4.2. USB ............................................................................................................ 36 4.3. Voltage Reference (VREF)................................................................................ 36 5. Electrical Characteristics........................................................................................ 37 5.1. Absolute Maximum Specifications..................................................................... 37 5.2. Electrical Characteristics................................................................................... 38 6. 10-Bit ADC (ADC0, C8051F380/1/2/3/C only)......................................................... 46 6.1. Output Code Formatting.................................................................................... 47 6.3. Modes of Operation........................................................................................... 50 6.3.1. Starting a Conversion................................................................................ 50 6.3.2. Tracking Modes......................................................................................... 51 6.3.3. Settling Time Requirements...................................................................... 52 6.4. Programmable Window Detector....................................................................... 56 6.4.1. Window Detector Examp le........................................................................ 58 6.5. ADC0 Analog Multiplexer (C8051F380/1/2/3/C only)........................................59 7. Voltage Reference Options..................................................................................... 62 8. Comparator0 and Comparator1.............................................................................. 64 8.1. Comparator Multiplexers................................................................................... 71 9. Voltage Regulators (REG0 and REG1)................................................................... 74 9.1. Voltage Regulator (REG0)................................................................................. 74 9.1.1. Regulator Mode Selection......................................................................... 74 9.1.2. VBUS Detection........................................................................................ 74 9.2. Voltage Regulator (REG1)................................................................................. 74 10. Power Management Modes................................................................................... 76 10.1. Idle Mode......................................................................................................... 76 10.2. Stop Mode....................................................................................................... 77 10.3. Suspend Mode................................................................................................ 77 11. CIP-51 Microcontroller........................................................................................... 79 11.1. Instruction Set.................................................................................................. 80 11.1.1. Instruction and CPU Timing.................................................................... 80 11.2. CIP-51 Register Descriptions.......................................................................... 85 12. Prefetch Engine...................................................................................................... 88 13. Memory Organization............................................................................................ 89 13.1. Program Memory............................................................................................. 91 13.2. Data Memory................................................................................................... 91 13.3. General Purpose Registers............................................................................. 92 13.4. Bit Addressable Locations............................................................................... 92 13.5. Stack ............................................................................................................ 92 Rev. 1.4 3

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 14. External Data Memory Interface and On-Chip XRAM.........................................93 14.1. Accessing XRAM............................................................................................. 93 14.1.1. 16-Bit MOVX Example............................................................................ 93 14.1.2. 8-Bit MOVX Example.............................................................................. 93 14.2. Accessing USB FIFO Space........................................................................... 94 14.3. Configuring the External Memory Interface..................................................... 95 14.4. Port Configuration............................................................................................ 95 14.5. Multiplexed and Non-multiplexed Selection..................................................... 98 14.5.1. Multiplexed Configuration........................................................................ 98 14.5.2. Non-multiplexed Configuration................................................................ 98 14.6. Memory Mode Selection................................................................................ 100 14.6.1. Internal XRAM Only.............................................................................. 100 14.6.2. Split Mode without Bank Select............................................................. 100 14.6.3. Split Mode with Bank Select.................................................................. 101 14.6.4. External Only......................................................................................... 101 14.7. Timing .......................................................................................................... 102 14.7.1. Non-multiplexed Mode.......................................................................... 104 14.7.1.1. 16-bit MOVX: EMI0CF[4:2] = 101, 110, or 111.............................104 14.7.1.2. 8-bit MOVX without Bank Select: EMI0CF[4:2] = 101 or 111.......105 14.7.1.3. 8-bit MOVX with Bank Select: EMI0CF[4:2] = 110.......................106 14.7.2. Multiplexed Mode.................................................................................. 107 14.7.2.1. 16-bit MOVX: EMI0CF[4:2] = 001, 010, or 011.............................107 14.7.2.2. 8-bit MOVX without Bank Select: EMI0CF[4:2] = 001 or 011.......108 14.7.2.3. 8-bit MOVX with Bank Select: EMI0CF[4:2] = 010.......................109 15. Special Function Registers................................................................................. 111 15.1. 13.1. SFR Paging.......................................................................................... 111 16. Interrupts.............................................................................................................. 118 16.1. MCU Interrupt Sources and Vectors.............................................................. 119 16.1.1. Interrupt Priorities.................................................................................. 119 16.1.2. Interrupt Latency................................................................................... 119 16.2. Interrupt Register Descriptions...................................................................... 119 16.3. INT0 and INT1 External Interrupt Sources.................................................... 127 17. Reset Sources...................................................................................................... 129 17.1. Power-On Reset............................................................................................ 130 17.2. Power-Fail Reset / VDD Monitor................................................................... 131 17.3. External Reset............................................................................................... 132 17.4. Missing Clock Detector Reset....................................................................... 132 17.5. Comparator0 Reset....................................................................................... 132 17.6. PCA Watchdog Timer Reset......................................................................... 133 17.7. Flash Error Reset.......................................................................................... 133 17.8. Software Reset.............................................................................................. 133 17.9. USB Reset..................................................................................................... 133 18. Flash Memory....................................................................................................... 135 18.1. Programming The Flash Memory.................................................................. 135 18.1.1. Flash Lock and Key Functions.............................................................. 135 4 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 18.1.2. Flash Erase Procedure......................................................................... 135 18.1.3. Flash Write Procedure.......................................................................... 136 18.2. Non-Volatile Data Storage............................................................................. 137 18.3. Security Options............................................................................................ 137 19. Oscillators and Clock Selection......................................................................... 142 19.1. System Clock Selection................................................................................. 143 19.2. USB Clock Selection..................................................................................... 143 19.3. Programmable Internal High-Frequency (H-F) Oscillator..............................145 19.3.1. Internal Oscillator Suspend Mode......................................................... 145 19.4. Clock Multiplier.............................................................................................. 147 19.5. Programmable Internal Low-Frequency (L-F) Oscillator...............................148 19.5.1. Calibrating the Internal L-F Oscillator.................................................... 148 19.6. External Oscillator Drive Circuit..................................................................... 149 19.6.1. External Crystal Mode........................................................................... 149 19.6.2. External RC Example............................................................................ 151 19.6.3. External Capacitor Example.................................................................. 151 20. Port Input/Output................................................................................................. 153 20.1. Priority Crossbar Decoder............................................................................. 154 20.2. Port I/O Initialization...................................................................................... 158 20.3. General Purpose Port I/O.............................................................................. 161 21. Universal Serial Bus Controller (USB0)............................................................. 172 21.1. Endpoint Addressing..................................................................................... 172 21.2. USB Transceiver........................................................................................... 173 21.3. USB Register Access.................................................................................... 175 21.4. USB Clock Configuration............................................................................... 179 21.5. FIFO Management........................................................................................ 181 21.5.1. FIFO Split Mode.................................................................................... 181 21.5.2. FIFO Double Buffering.......................................................................... 182 21.5.1. FIFO Access......................................................................................... 182 21.6. Function Addressing...................................................................................... 183 21.7. Function Configuration and Control............................................................... 183 21.8. Interrupts....................................................................................................... 186 21.9. The Serial Interface Engine........................................................................... 193 21.10. Endpoint0.................................................................................................... 193 21.10.1. Endpoint0 SETUP Transactions......................................................... 193 21.10.2. Endpoint0 IN Transactions.................................................................. 193 21.10.3. Endpoint0 OUT Transactions.............................................................. 194 21.11. Configuring Endpoints1-3............................................................................ 196 21.12. Controlling Endpoints1-3 IN......................................................................... 197 21.12.1. Endpoints1-3 IN Interrupt or Bulk Mode..............................................197 21.12.2. Endpoints1-3 IN Isochronous Mode.................................................... 198 21.13. Controlling Endpoints1-3 OUT..................................................................... 201 21.13.1. Endpoints1-3 OUT Interrupt or Bulk Mode..........................................201 21.13.2. Endpoints1-3 OUT Isochronous Mode................................................201 22. SMBus0 and SMBus1 (I2C Compatible)............................................................. 205 Rev. 1.4 5

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 22.1. Supporting Documents.................................................................................. 206 22.2. SMBus Configuration..................................................................................... 206 22.3. SMBus Operation.......................................................................................... 206 22.3.1. Transmitter Vs. Receiver....................................................................... 207 22.3.2. Arbitration.............................................................................................. 207 22.3.3. Clock Low Extension............................................................................. 207 22.3.4. SCL Low Timeout.................................................................................. 207 22.3.5. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout......................................................... 208 22.4. Using the SMBus........................................................................................... 208 22.4.1. SMBus Configuration Register.............................................................. 208 22.4.2. SMBus Timing Control Register............................................................ 210 22.4.3. SMBnCN Control Register.................................................................... 214 22.4.3.1. Software ACK Generation............................................................ 214 22.4.3.2. Hardware ACK Generation........................................................... 214 22.4.4. Hardware Slave Address Recognition.................................................. 217 22.4.5. Data Register........................................................................................ 221 22.5. SMBus Transfer Modes................................................................................. 223 22.5.1. Write Sequence (Master)...................................................................... 223 22.5.2. Read Sequence (Master)...................................................................... 224 22.5.3. Write Sequence (Slave)........................................................................ 225 22.5.4. Read Sequence (Slave)........................................................................ 226 22.6. SMBus Status Decoding................................................................................ 226 23. UART0................................................................................................................... 232 23.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation.................................................................. 233 23.2. Operational Modes........................................................................................ 234 23.2.1. 8-Bit UART............................................................................................ 234 23.2.2. 9-Bit UART............................................................................................ 235 23.3. Multiprocessor Communications................................................................... 236 24. UART1................................................................................................................... 240 24.1. Baud Rate Generator.................................................................................... 241 24.2. Data Format................................................................................................... 242 24.3. Configuration and Operation......................................................................... 243 24.3.1. Data Transmission................................................................................ 243 24.3.2. Data Reception..................................................................................... 243 24.3.3. Multiprocessor Communications........................................................... 244 25. Enhanced Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0)..................................................... 250 25.1. Signal Descriptions........................................................................................ 251 25.1.1. Master Out, Slave In (MOSI)................................................................. 251 25.1.2. Master In, Slave Out (MISO)................................................................. 251 25.1.3. Serial Clock (SCK)................................................................................ 251 25.1.4. Slave Select (NSS)............................................................................... 251 25.2. SPI0 Master Mode Operation........................................................................ 251 25.3. SPI0 Slave Mode Operation.......................................................................... 253 25.4. SPI0 Interrupt Sources.................................................................................. 254 25.5. Serial Clock Phase and Polarity.................................................................... 254 6 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 25.6. SPI Special Function Registers..................................................................... 256 26. Timers................................................................................................................... 263 26.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1...................................................................................... 266 26.1.1. Mode 0: 13-bit Counter/Timer............................................................... 266 26.1.2. Mode 1: 16-bit Counter/Timer............................................................... 267 26.1.3. Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload.....................................267 26.1.4. Mode 3: Two 8-bit Counter/Timers (Timer 0 Only)................................268 26.2. Timer 2.......................................................................................................... 274 26.2.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload............................................................... 274 26.2.2. 8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload............................................................... 275 26.2.3. Timer 2 Capture Modes: USB Start-of-Frame or LFO Falling Edge.....275 26.3. Timer 3.......................................................................................................... 281 26.3.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload............................................................... 281 26.3.2. 8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload............................................................... 282 26.3.3. Timer 3 Capture Modes: USB Start-of-Frame or LFO Falling Edge.....282 26.4. Timer 4.......................................................................................................... 288 26.4.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload............................................................... 288 26.4.2. 8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload............................................................... 289 26.5. Timer 5.......................................................................................................... 293 26.5.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload............................................................... 293 26.5.2. 8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload............................................................... 294 27. Programmable Counter Array............................................................................. 298 27.1. PCA Counter/Timer....................................................................................... 299 27.2. PCA0 Interrupt Sources................................................................................. 300 27.3. Capture/Compare Modules........................................................................... 301 27.3.1. Edge-triggered Capture Mode............................................................... 302 27.3.2. Software Timer (Compare) Mode.......................................................... 303 27.3.3. High-Speed Output Mode..................................................................... 304 27.3.4. Frequency Output Mode....................................................................... 305 27.3.5. 8-bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode....................................................... 306 27.3.6. 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode..................................................... 307 27.4. Watchdog Timer Mode.................................................................................. 308 27.4.1. Watchdog Timer Operation................................................................... 308 27.4.2. Watchdog Timer Usage........................................................................ 309 27.5. Register Descriptions for PCA0..................................................................... 311 28. C2 Interface.......................................................................................................... 316 28.1. C2 Interface Registers................................................................................... 316 28.2. C2 Pin Sharing.............................................................................................. 319 Document Change List.............................................................................................. 320 Contact Information................................................................................................... 321 Rev. 1.4 7

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C List of Figures Figure 1.1. C8051F380/2/4/6 Block Diagram .......................................................... 18 Figure 1.2. C8051F381/3/5/7/C Block Diagram ....................................................... 19 Figure 3.1. TQFP-48 Pinout Diagram (Top View) ................................................... 25 Figure 3.2. TQFP-48 Package Diagram .................................................................. 26 Figure 3.3. TQFP-48 Recommended PCB Land Pattern ........................................27 Figure 3.4. LQFP-32 Pinout Diagram (Top View) .................................................... 28 Figure 3.5. LQFP-32 Package Diagram .................................................................. 29 Figure 3.6. LQFP-32 Recommended PCB Land Pattern ........................................30 Figure 3.7. QFN-32 Pinout Diagram (Top View) ..................................................... 31 Figure 3.8. QFN-32 Package Drawing .................................................................... 32 Figure 3.9. QFN-32 Recommended PCB Land Pattern ..........................................33 Figure 4.1. Connection Diagram with Voltage Regulator Used and No USB ..........34 Figure 4.2. Connection Diagram with Voltage Regulator Not Used and No USB ...34 Figure 4.3. Connection Diagram with Voltage Regulator Used and USB Connected (Bus-Powered) ................................................................................................... 35 Figure 4.4. Connection Diagram with Voltage Regulator Used and USB Connected (Self-Powered) ................................................................................................... 35 Figure 4.5. Connection Diagram for USB Pins ........................................................ 36 Figure 4.6. Connection Diagram fo r Internal Voltage Reference .............................36 Figure 6.1. ADC0 Functional Block Diagram ........................................................... 46 Figure 6.2. Typical Temperature Sensor Transfer Function ....................................48 Figure 6.3. Temperature Sensor Error with 1-Point Calibration ..............................49 Figure 6.4. 10-Bit ADC Track and Conversion Example Timing .............................51 Figure 6.5. ADC0 Equivalent Input Circuits ............................................................. 52 Figure 6.6. ADC Window Compare Example: Right-Justified Data .........................58 Figure 6.7. ADC Window Compare Example: Left-Justified Data ...........................58 Figure 7.1. Voltage Reference Functional Block Diagram .......................................62 Figure 8.1. Comparator0 Functional Block Diagram ............................................... 64 Figure 8.2. Comparator1 Functional Block Diagram ............................................... 65 Figure 8.3. Comparator Hysteresis Plot .................................................................. 66 Figure 8.4. Comparator Input Multiplexer Block Diagram ........................................71 Figure 11.1. CIP-51 Block Diagram ......................................................................... 79 Figure 13.1. On-Chip Memory Map for 64 kB Devices (C8051F380/1/4/5) .............89 Figure 13.2. On-Chip Memory Map for 32 kB Devices (C8051F382/3/6/7) .............90 Figure 13.3. On-Chip Memory Map for 16 kB Devices (C8051F38C) .....................91 Figure 14.1. USB FIFO Space and XRAM Memory Map with USBFAE set to ‘1’ ...94 Figure 14.2. Multiplexed Configuration Example ..................................................... 98 Figure 14.3. Non-multiplexed Configuration Example ............................................. 99 Figure 14.4. EMIF Operating Modes ..................................................................... 100 Figure 14.5. Non-Multiplexed 16-bit MOVX Timing ...............................................104 Figure 14.6. Non-multiplexed 8-bit MOVX without Bank Select Timing ................105 Figure 14.7. Non-multiplexed 8-bit MOVX with Bank Select Timing .....................106 Figure 14.8. Multiplexed 16-bit MOVX Timing ....................................................... 107 Rev. 1.4 8

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 14.9. Multiplexed 8-bit MOVX without Bank Select Timing ........................108 Figure 14.10. Multiplexed 8-bit MOVX with Bank Select Timing ...........................109 Figure 17.1. Reset Sources ................................................................................... 129 Figure 17.2. Power-On and VDD Monitor Reset Timing .......................................130 Figure 18.1. Flash Program Memory Map and Security Byte ................................137 Figure 19.1. Oscillator Options .............................................................................. 142 Figure 19.2. External Crystal Example .................................................................. 150 Figure 20.1. Port I/O Functional Block Diagram (Port 0 through Port 3) ...............153 Figure 20.2. Port I/O Cell Block Diagram .............................................................. 154 Figure 20.3. Peripheral Availability on Port I/O Pins ..............................................155 Figure 20.4. Crossbar Priority Decoder in Example Configuration (No Pins Skipped) ............................................................................................ 156 Figure 20.5. Crossbar Priority Decoder in Example Configuration (3 Pins Skipped) ............................................................................................................. 157 Figure 21.1. USB0 Block Diagram ......................................................................... 172 Figure 21.2. USB0 Register Access Scheme ........................................................ 175 Figure 21.3. USB FIFO Allocation ......................................................................... 181 Figure 22.1. SMBus Block Diagram ...................................................................... 205 Figure 22.2. Typical SMBus Configuration ............................................................ 206 Figure 22.3. SMBus Transaction ........................................................................... 207 Figure 22.4. Typical SMBus SCL Generation ........................................................ 209 Figure 22.5. Typical Master Write Sequence ........................................................ 223 Figure 22.6. Typical Master Read Sequence ........................................................ 224 Figure 22.7. Typical Slave Write Sequence .......................................................... 225 Figure 22.8. Typical Slave Read Sequence .......................................................... 226 Figure 23.1. UART0 Block Diagram ...................................................................... 232 Figure 23.2. UART0 Baud Rate Logic ................................................................... 233 Figure 23.3. UART Interconnect Diagram ............................................................. 234 Figure 23.4. 8-Bit UART Timing Diagram .............................................................. 234 Figure 23.5. 9-Bit UART Timing Diagram .............................................................. 235 Figure 23.6. UART Multi-Processor Mode Interconnect Diagram .........................236 Figure 24.1. UART1 Block Diagram ...................................................................... 240 Figure 24.2. UART1 Timing Without Parity or Extra Bit .........................................242 Figure 24.3. UART1 Timing With Parity ................................................................ 242 Figure 24.4. UART1 Timing With Extra Bit ............................................................ 242 Figure 24.5. Typical UART Interconnect Diagram .................................................243 Figure 24.6. UART Multi-Processor Mode Interconnect Diagram .........................244 Figure 25.1. SPI Block Diagram ............................................................................ 250 Figure 25.2. Multiple-Master Mode Connection Diagram ......................................252 Figure 25.3. 3-Wire Single Master and 3-Wire Single Slave Mode Connection Diagram ............................................................................................................. 252 Figure 25.4. 4-Wire Single Master Mode and 4-Wire Slave Mode Connection Diagram ............................................................................................................. 253 Figure 25.5. Master Mode Data/Clock Timing ....................................................... 255 Figure 25.6. Slave Mode Data/Clock Timing (CKPHA = 0) ...................................255 9 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 25.7. Slave Mode Data/Clock Timing (CKPHA = 1) ...................................256 Figure 25.8. SPI Master Timing (CKPHA = 0) ....................................................... 260 Figure 25.9. SPI Master Timing (CKPHA = 1) ....................................................... 260 Figure 25.10. SPI Slave Timing (CKPHA = 0) ....................................................... 261 Figure 25.11. SPI Slave Timing (CKPHA = 1) ....................................................... 261 Figure 26.1. T0 Mode 0 Block Diagram ................................................................. 267 Figure 26.2. T0 Mode 2 Block Diagram ................................................................. 268 Figure 26.3. T0 Mode 3 Block Diagram ................................................................. 269 Figure 26.4. Timer 2 16-Bit Mode Block Diagram .................................................274 Figure 26.5. Timer 2 8-Bit Mode Block Diagram ................................................... 275 Figure 26.6. Timer 2 Capture Mode (T2SPLIT = 0) ...............................................276 Figure 26.7. Timer 2 Capture Mode (T2SPLIT = 0) ...............................................277 Figure 26.8. Timer 3 16-Bit Mode Block Diagram .................................................281 Figure 26.9. Timer 3 8-Bit Mode Block Diagram ................................................... 282 Figure 26.10. Timer 3 Capture Mode (T3SPLIT = 0) .............................................283 Figure 26.11. Timer 3 Capture Mode (T3SPLIT = 0) .............................................284 Figure 26.12. Timer 4 16-Bit Mode Block Diagram ...............................................288 Figure 26.13. Timer 4 8-Bit Mode Block Diagram .................................................289 Figure 26.14. Timer 5 16-Bit Mode Block Diagram ...............................................293 Figure 26.15. Timer 5 8-Bit Mode Block Diagram .................................................294 Figure 27.1. PCA Block Diagram ........................................................................... 298 Figure 27.2. PCA Counter/Timer Block Diagram ................................................... 299 Figure 27.3. PCA Interrupt Block Diagram ............................................................ 300 Figure 27.4. PCA Capture Mode Diagram ............................................................. 302 Figure 27.5. PCA Software Timer Mode Diagram .................................................303 Figure 27.6. PCA High-Speed Output Mode Diagram ...........................................304 Figure 27.7. PCA Frequency Output Mode ........................................................... 305 Figure 27.8. PCA 8-Bit PWM Mode Diagram ........................................................ 306 Figure 27.9. PCA 16-Bit PWM Mode ..................................................................... 307 Figure 27.10. PCA Module 4 with Watchdog Timer Enabled ................................308 Figure 28.1. Typical C2 Pin Sharing ...................................................................... 319 Rev. 1.4 10

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C List of Tables Table 1.1. Product Selection Guide ......................................................................... 17 Table 2.1. C8051F38x Replacement Part Numbers ................................................ 20 Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for the C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C .................................22 Table 3.2. TQFP-48 Package Dimensions .............................................................. 26 Table 3.3. TQFP-48 PCB Land Pattern Dimensions ............................................... 27 Table 3.4. LQFP-32 Package Dimensions .............................................................. 29 Table 3.5. LQFP-32 PCB Land Pattern Dimensions ............................................... 30 Table 3.6. QFN-32 Package Dimensions ................................................................ 32 Table 3.7. QFN-32 PCB Land Pattern Dimensions ................................................. 33 Table 5.1. Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................................................... 37 Table 5.2. Global Electrical Characteristics ............................................................. 38 Table 5.3. Port I/O DC Electrical Characteristics ..................................................... 39 Table 5.4. Reset Electrical Characteristics .............................................................. 39 Table 5.5. Internal Voltage Regulator Electrical Characteristics .............................40 Table 5.6. Flash Electrical Characteristics .............................................................. 40 Table 5.7. Internal High-Frequency Oscillator Electrical Characteristics .................41 Table 5.8. Internal Low-Frequency Oscillator Electrical Characteristics .................41 Table 5.9. External Oscillator Electrical Characteristics ..........................................41 Table 5.10. ADC0 Electrical Chara cteristics ............................................................ 42 Table 5.11. Temperature Sensor Electrical Characteristics ....................................43 Table 5.12. Voltage Reference Electrical Characteristics .......................................43 Table 5.13. Comparator Electrical Characteristics .................................................. 44 Table 5.14. USB Transceiver Electrical Characteristics ..........................................45 Table 11.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary .......................................................... 81 Table 14.1. AC Parameters for External Memory Interface ...................................110 Table 15.1. Special Function Register (SFR) Memory Map ..................................112 Table 15.2. Special Function Registers ................................................................. 113 Table 16.1. Interrupt Summary .............................................................................. 120 Table 21.1. Endpoint Addressing Scheme ............................................................ 173 Table 21.2. USB0 Controller Registers ................................................................. 178 Table 21.3. FIFO Configurations ........................................................................... 182 Table 22.1. SMBus Clock Source Selection .......................................................... 209 Table 22.2. Minimum SDA Setup and Hold Times ................................................210 Table 22.3. Sources for Hardware Changes to SMBnCN .....................................217 Table 22.4. Hardware Address Recognition Examples (EHACK = 1) ...................218 Table 22.5. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) ......227 Table 22.6. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) ......229 Table 23.1. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using Internal Oscillator .....238 Table 24.1. Baud Rate Generator Settings for Standard Baud Rates ...................241 Table 25.1. SPI Slave Timing Parameters ............................................................ 262 Table 27.1. PCA Timebase Input Options ............................................................. 299 Table 27.2. PCA0CPM Bit Settings for PCA Capture/Compare Modules .............301 Table 27.3. Watchdog Timer Timeout Intervals1 ................................................... 310 Rev. 1.4 11

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C List of Registers SFR Definition 6.1. ADC0CF: ADC0 Configuration ...................................................... 53 SFR Definition 6.2. ADC0H: ADC0 Data Word MSB .................................................... 54 SFR Definition 6.3. ADC0L: ADC0 Data Word LSB ...................................................... 54 SFR Definition 6.4. ADC0CN: ADC0 Control ................................................................ 55 SFR Definition 6.5. ADC0GTH: ADC0 Greater-Than Data High Byte ..........................56 SFR Definition 6.6. ADC0GTL: ADC0 Greater-Than Data Low Byte ............................56 SFR Definition 6.7. ADC0LTH: ADC0 Less-Than Data High Byte ................................57 SFR Definition 6.8. ADC0LTL: ADC0 Less-Than Data Low Byte .................................57 SFR Definition 6.9. AMX0P: AMUX0 Positive Channel Select .....................................60 SFR Definition 6.10. AMX0N: AMUX0 Negative Channel Select .................................61 SFR Definition 7.1. REF0CN: Reference Control ......................................................... 63 SFR Definition 8.1. CPT0CN: Comparator0 Control ..................................................... 67 SFR Definition 8.2. CPT0MD: Comparator0 Mode Selection .......................................68 SFR Definition 8.3. CPT1CN: Comparator1 Control ..................................................... 69 SFR Definition 8.4. CPT1MD: Comparator1 Mode Selection .......................................70 SFR Definition 8.5. CPT0MX: Comparator0 MUX Selection ........................................72 SFR Definition 8.6. CPT1MX: Comparator1 MUX Selection ........................................73 SFR Definition 9.1. REG01CN: Voltage Regulator Control ..........................................75 SFR Definition 10.1. PCON: Power Co ntrol .................................................................. 78 SFR Definition 11.1. DPL: Data Pointer Low Byte ........................................................ 85 SFR Definition 11.2. DPH: Data Pointer High Byte ....................................................... 85 SFR Definition 11.3. SP: Stack Pointer ......................................................................... 86 SFR Definition 11.4. ACC: Accumulator ....................................................................... 86 SFR Definition 11.5. B: B Register ................................................................................ 86 SFR Definition 11.6. PSW: Program Status Word ........................................................ 87 SFR Definition 12.1. PFE0CN: Prefetch Engine Control ..............................................88 SFR Definition 14.1. EMI0CN: External Memory Interface Control ..............................96 SFR Definition 14.2. EMI0CF: External Memory Interface Configuration .....................97 SFR Definition 14.3. EMI0TC: External Memory TIming Control ................................103 SFR Definition 15.1. SFRPAGE: SFR Page ............................................................... 111 SFR Definition 16.1. IE: Interrupt Enable .................................................................... 121 SFR Definition 16.2. IP: Interrupt Priority .................................................................... 122 SFR Definition 16.3. EIE1: Extended Interrupt Enable 1 ............................................123 SFR Definition 16.4. EIP1: Extended Interrupt Priority 1 ............................................124 SFR Definition 16.5. EIE2: Extended Interrupt Enable 2 ............................................125 SFR Definition 16.6. EIP2: Extended Interrupt Priority 2 ............................................126 SFR Definition 16.7. IT01CF: INT0/INT1 ConfigurationO ...........................................128 SFR Definition 17.1. VDM0CN: VDD Monitor Control ................................................132 SFR Definition 17.2. RSTSRC: Reset Source ............................................................ 134 SFR Definition 18.1. PSCTL: Program Store R/W Control .........................................139 SFR Definition 18.2. FLKEY: Flash Lock and Key ...................................................... 140 SFR Definition 18.3. FLSCL: Flash Scale ................................................................... 141 SFR Definition 19.1. CLKSEL: Clock Select ............................................................... 144 Rev. 1.4 12

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 19.2. OSCICL: Internal H-F Oscillator Calibration ..............................145 SFR Definition 19.3. OSCICN: Internal H-F Oscillator Control ...................................146 SFR Definition 19.4. CLKMUL: Clock Multiplier Control .............................................147 SFR Definition 19.5. OSCLCN: Internal L-F Oscillator Control ...................................148 SFR Definition 19.6. OSCXCN: External Oscillator Control ........................................152 SFR Definition 20.1. XBR0: Port I/O Crossbar Register 0 ..........................................159 SFR Definition 20.2. XBR1: Port I/O Crossbar Register 1 ..........................................160 SFR Definition 20.3. XBR2: Port I/O Crossbar Register 2 ..........................................161 SFR Definition 20.4. P0: Port 0 ................................................................................... 162 SFR Definition 20.5. P0MDIN: Port 0 Input Mode ....................................................... 162 SFR Definition 20.6. P0MDOUT: Port 0 Output Mode ................................................163 SFR Definition 20.7. P0SKIP: Port 0 Skip ................................................................... 163 SFR Definition 20.8. P1: Port 1 ................................................................................... 164 SFR Definition 20.9. P1MDIN: Port 1 Input Mode ....................................................... 164 SFR Definition 20.10. P1MDOUT: Port 1 Output Mode ..............................................165 SFR Definition 20.11. P1SKIP: Port 1 Skip ................................................................. 165 SFR Definition 20.12. P2: Port 2 ................................................................................. 166 SFR Definition 20.13. P2MDIN: Port 2 Input Mode ..................................................... 166 SFR Definition 20.14. P2MDOUT: Port 2 Output Mode ..............................................167 SFR Definition 20.15. P2SKIP: Port 2 Skip ................................................................. 167 SFR Definition 20.16. P3: Port 3 ................................................................................. 168 SFR Definition 20.17. P3MDIN: Port 3 Input Mode ..................................................... 168 SFR Definition 20.18. P3MDOUT: Port 3 Output Mode ..............................................169 SFR Definition 20.19. P3SKIP: Port 3 Skip ................................................................. 169 SFR Definition 20.20. P4: Port 4 ................................................................................. 170 SFR Definition 20.21. P4MDIN: Port 4 Input Mode ..................................................... 170 SFR Definition 20.22. P4MDOUT: Port 4 Output Mode ..............................................171 SFR Definition 21.1. USB0XCN: USB0 Transceiver Control ......................................174 SFR Definition 21.2. USB0ADR: USB0 Indirect Address ...........................................176 SFR Definition 21.3. USB0DAT: USB0 Data .............................................................. 177 USB Register Definition 21.4. INDEX: USB0 Endpoint Index .....................................179 USB Register Definition 21.5. CLKREC: Clock Recovery Control ..............................180 USB Register Definition 21.6. FIFOn: USB0 Endpoint FIFO Access ..........................182 USB Register Definition 21.7. FADDR: USB0 Function Address ...............................183 USB Register Definition 21.8. POWER: USB0 Power ................................................185 USB Register Definition 21.9. FRAMEL: USB0 Frame Number Low .........................186 USB Register Definition 21.10. FRAMEH: USB0 Frame Number High ......................186 USB Register Definition 21.11. IN1INT: USB0 IN Endpoint Interrupt .........................187 USB Register Definition 21.12. OUT1INT: USB0 OUT Endpoint Interrupt .................188 USB Register Definition 21.13. CMINT: USB0 Common Interrupt .............................189 USB Register Definition 21.14. IN1IE: USB0 IN Endpoint Interrupt Enable ...............190 USB Register Definition 21.15. OUT1IE: USB0 OUT Endpoint Interrupt Enable .......191 USB Register Definition 21.16. CMIE: USB0 Common Interrupt Enable ....................192 USB Register Definition 21.17. E0CSR: USB0 Endpoint0 Control .............................195 USB Register Definition 21.18. E0CNT: USB0 Endpoint0 Data Count .......................196 13 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.19. EENABLE: USB0 Endpoint Enable ...........................197 USB Register Definition 21.20. EINCSRL: USB0 IN Endpoint Control Low ...............199 USB Register Definition 21.21. EINCSRH: USB0 IN Endpoint Control High ..............200 USB Register Definition 21.22. EOUTCSRL: USB0 OUT Endpoint Control Low Byte 202 USB Register Definition 21.23. EOUTCSRH: USB0 OUT Endpoint Control High Byte .... 203 USB Register Definition 21.24. EOUTCNTL: USB0 OUT Endpoint Count Low .........203 USB Register Definition 21.25. EOUTCNTH: USB0 OUT Endpoint Count High ........204 SFR Definition 22.1. SMB0CF: SMBus Clock/Configuration ......................................211 SFR Definition 22.2. SMB1CF: SMBus Clock/Configuration ......................................212 SFR Definition 22.3. SMBTC: SMBus Timing Control ................................................213 SFR Definition 22.4. SMB0CN: SMBus Control .......................................................... 215 SFR Definition 22.5. SMB1CN: SMBus Control .......................................................... 216 SFR Definition 22.6. SMB0ADR: SMBus0 Slave Address ..........................................218 SFR Definition 22.7. SMB0ADM: SMBus0 Slave Address Mask ................................219 SFR Definition 22.8. SMB1ADR: SMBus1 Slave Address ..........................................219 SFR Definition 22.9. SMB1ADM: SMBus1 Slave Address Mask ................................220 SFR Definition 22.10. SMB0DAT: SMBus Data .......................................................... 221 SFR Definition 22.11. SMB1DAT: SMBus Data .......................................................... 222 SFR Definition 23.1. SCON0: Serial Port 0 Control .................................................... 237 SFR Definition 23.2. SBUF0: Serial (UART0) Port Data Buffer ..................................238 SFR Definition 24.1. SCON1: UART1 Control ............................................................ 245 SFR Definition 24.2. SMOD1: UART1 Mode .............................................................. 246 SFR Definition 24.3. SBUF1: UART1 Data Buffer ...................................................... 247 SFR Definition 24.4. SBCON1: UART1 Baud Rate Generator Control ......................248 SFR Definition 24.5. SBRLH1: UART1 Baud Rate Generator High Byte ...................248 SFR Definition 24.6. SBRLL1: UART1 Baud Rate Generator Low Byte .....................249 SFR Definition 25.1. SPI0CFG: SPI0 Configuration ................................................... 257 SFR Definition 25.2. SPI0CN: SPI0 Control ............................................................... 258 SFR Definition 25.3. SPI0CKR: SPI0 Clock Rate ....................................................... 259 SFR Definition 25.4. SPI0DAT: SPI0 Data ................................................................. 259 SFR Definition 26.1. CKCON: Clock Control .............................................................. 264 SFR Definition 26.2. CKCON1: Clock Control 1 ......................................................... 265 SFR Definition 26.3. TCON: Timer Control ................................................................. 270 SFR Definition 26.4. TMOD: Timer Mode ................................................................... 271 SFR Definition 26.5. TL0: Timer 0 Low Byte ............................................................... 272 SFR Definition 26.6. TL1: Timer 1 Low Byte ............................................................... 272 SFR Definition 26.7. TH0: Timer 0 High Byte ............................................................. 273 SFR Definition 26.8. TH1: Timer 1 High Byte ............................................................. 273 SFR Definition 26.9. TMR2CN: Timer 2 Control ......................................................... 278 SFR Definition 26.10. TMR2RLL: Timer 2 Reload Register Low Byte ........................279 SFR Definition 26.11. TMR2RLH: Timer 2 Reload Register High Byte ......................279 SFR Definition 26.12. TMR2L: Timer 2 Low Byte ....................................................... 279 SFR Definition 26.13. TMR2H Timer 2 High Byte ....................................................... 280 SFR Definition 26.14. TMR3CN: Timer 3 Control ....................................................... 285 Rev. 1.4 14

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.15. TMR3RLL: Timer 3 Reload Register Low Byte ........................286 SFR Definition 26.16. TMR3RLH: Timer 3 Reload Register High Byte ......................286 SFR Definition 26.17. TMR3L: Timer 3 Low Byte ....................................................... 286 SFR Definition 26.18. TMR3H Timer 3 High Byte ....................................................... 287 SFR Definition 26.19. TMR4CN: Timer 4 Control ....................................................... 290 SFR Definition 26.20. TMR4RLL: Timer 4 Reload Register Low Byte ........................291 SFR Definition 26.21. TMR4RLH: Timer 4 Reload Register High Byte ......................291 SFR Definition 26.22. TMR4L: Timer 4 Low Byte ....................................................... 291 SFR Definition 26.23. TMR4H Timer 4 High Byte ....................................................... 292 SFR Definition 26.24. TMR5CN: Timer 5 Control ....................................................... 295 SFR Definition 26.25. TMR5RLL: Timer 5 Reload Register Low Byte ........................296 SFR Definition 26.26. TMR5RLH: Timer 5 Reload Register High Byte ......................296 SFR Definition 26.27. TMR5L: Timer 5 Low Byte ....................................................... 296 SFR Definition 26.28. TMR5H Timer 5 High Byte ....................................................... 297 SFR Definition 27.1. PCA0CN: PCA Control .............................................................. 311 SFR Definition 27.2. PCA0MD: PCA Mode ................................................................ 312 SFR Definition 27.3. PCA0CPMn: PCA Capture/Compare Mode ..............................313 SFR Definition 27.4. PCA0L: PCA Counter/Timer Low Byte ......................................314 SFR Definition 27.5. PCA0H: PCA Counter/Timer High Byte .....................................314 SFR Definition 27.6. PCA0CPLn: PCA Capture Module Low Byte .............................315 SFR Definition 27.7. PCA0CPHn: PCA Capture Module High Byte ...........................315 C2 Register Definition 28.1. C2ADD: C2 Address ...................................................... 316 C2 Register Definition 28.2. DEVICEID: C2 Device ID ...............................................317 C2 Register Definition 28.3. REVID: C2 Revision ID .................................................. 317 C2 Register Definition 28.4. FPCTL: C2 Flash Programming Control ........................318 C2 Register Definition 28.5. FPDAT: C2 Flash Programming Data ............................318 15 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 1. System Overview C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C devices are fully integrated mixed-signal System-on-a-Chip MCUs. High- lighted features are listed below. Refer to Table 1.1 for specific product feature selection.  High-speed pipelined 8051-compatible microcontroller core (up to 48 MIPS)  In-system, full-speed, non-intrusive debug interface (on-chip)  Universal Serial Bus (USB) Function Controller with eight flexible endpoint pipes, integrated transceiver, and 1 kB FIFO RAM  Supply Voltage Regulator  True 10-bit 500 ksps differential / single-ended ADC with analog multiplexer  On-chip Voltage Reference and Temperature Sensor  On-chip Voltage Comparators (2)  Precision internal calibrated 48 MHz internal oscillator  Internal low-frequency oscillator for additional power savings  Up to 64 kB of on-chip Flash memory  Up to 4352 Bytes of on-chip RAM (256 + 4 kB)  External Memory Interface (EMIF) available on 48-pin versions.  2 I2C/SMBus, 2 UARTs, and Enhanced SPI serial interfaces implemented in hardware  Four general-purpose 16-bit timers  Programmable Counter/Timer Array (PCA) with five capture/compare modules and Watchdog Timer function  On-chip Power-On Reset, VDD Monitor, and Missing Clock Detector  Up to 40 Port I/O (5 V tolerant) With on-chip Power-On Reset, V monitor, Voltage Regulator, Watchdog Timer, and clock oscillator, DD C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C devices are truly stand-alone System-on-a-Chip solutions. The Flash memory can be reprogrammed in-circuit, providing non-volatile data storage, and also allowing field upgrades of the 8051 firmware. User software has complete control of all peripherals, and may individually shut down any or all peripherals for power savings. The on-chip Silicon Labs 2-Wire (C2) Development Interface allows non-intrusive (uses no on-chip resources), full speed, in-circuit debugging using the production MCU installed in the final application. This debug logic supports inspection and modification of memory and registers, setting breakpoints, single stepping, run and halt commands. All analog and digital peripherals are fully functional while debugging using C2. The two C2 interface pins can be shared with user functions, allowing in-system debugging with- out occupying package pins. Each device is specified for 2.7–5.25 V operation over the industrial temperature range (–40 to +85 °C). For voltages above 3.6 V, the on-chip Voltage Regulator must be used. A minimum of 3.0 V is required for USB communication. The Port I/O and RST pins are tolerant of input signals up to 5 V. C8051F380/1/2/3/ 4/5/6/7/C devices are available in 48-pin TQFP, 32-pin LQFP, or 32-pin QFN packages. See Table 1.1, “Product Selection Guide,” on page 17 for feature and package choices. Rev. 1.4 16

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 1.1. Product Selection Guide ) F MI Ordering Part Number MIPS (Peak) Flash Memory (Bytes) RAM Calibrated Internal Oscillator Low Frequency Oscillator USB with 1k Endpoint RAM Supply Voltage Regulator SMBus/I2C Enhanced SPI UARTs Timers (16-bit) Programmable Counter Array Digital Port I/O External Memory Interface (E 10-bit 500ksps ADC Temperature Sensor Voltage Reference Analog Comparators Package C8051F380-GQ 48 64k 4352     2  2 6  40     2 TQFP48 C8051F381-GQ 48 64k 4352     2  2 6  25 —    2 LQFP32 C8051F381-GM 48 64k 4352     2  2 6  25 —    2 QFN32 C8051F382-GQ 48 32k 2304     2  2 6  40     2 TQFP48 C8051F383-GQ 48 32k 2304     2  2 6  25 —    2 LQFP32 C8051F383-GM 48 32k 2304     2  2 6  25 —    2 QFN32 C8051F384-GQ 48 64k 4352     2  2 6  40  — — — 2 TQFP48 C8051F385-GQ 48 64k 4352     2  2 6  25 — — — — 2 LQFP32 C8051F385-GM 48 64k 4352     2  2 6  25 — — — — 2 QFN32 C8051F386-GQ 48 32k 2304     2  2 6  40  — — — 2 TQFP48 C8051F387-GQ 48 32k 2304     2  2 6  25 — — — — 2 LQFP32 C8051F387-GM 48 32k 2304     2  2 6  25 — — — — 2 QFN32 C8051F38C-GQ 48 16k 2304     2  2 6  25 —    2 LQFP32 C8051F38C-GM 48 16k 2304     2  2 6  25 —    2 QFN32 17 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 1.1. C8051F380/2/4/6 Block Diagram Rev. 1.4 18

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 1.2. C8051F381/3/5/7/C Block Diagram 19 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 2. C8051F34x Compatibility The C8051F38x family is designed to be a pin and code compatible replacement for the C8051F34x device family, with an enhanced feature set. The C8051F38x device should function as a drop-in replace- ment for the C8051F34x devices in most applications. Table 2.1 lists recommended replacement part num- bers for C8051F34x devices. See “2.1. Hardware Incompatibilities” to determine if any changes are necessary when upgrading an existing C8051F34x design to the C8051F38x. Table 2.1. C8051F38x Replacement Part Numbers C8051F34x Part Number C8051F38x Part Number C8051F340-GQ C8051F380-GQ C8051F341-GQ C8051F382-GQ C8051F342-GQ C8051F381-GQ C8051F342-GM C8051F381-GM C8051F343-GQ C8051F383-GQ C8051F343-GM C8051F383-GM C8051F344-GQ C8051F380-GQ C8051F345-GQ C8051F382-GQ C8051F346-GQ C8051F381-GQ C8051F346-GM C8051F381-GM C8051F347-GQ C8051F383-GQ C8051F347-GM C8051F383-GM C8051F348-GQ C8051F386-GQ C8051F349-GQ C8051F387-GQ C8051F349-GM C8051F387-GM C8051F34A-GQ C8051F381-GQ C8051F34A-GM C8051F381-GM C8051F34B-GQ C8051F383-GQ C8051F34B-GM C8051F383-GM C8051F34C-GQ C8051F384-GQ C8051F34D-GQ C8051F385-GQ Rev. 1.4 20

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 2.1. Hardware Incompatibilities While the C8051F38x family includes a number of new features not found on the C8051F34x family, there are some differences that should be considered for any design port.  Clock Multiplier: The C8051F38x does not include the 4x clock multiplier from the C8051F34x device families. This change only impacts systems which use the clock multiplier in conjunction with an external oscillator source.  External Oscillator C and RC Modes: The C and RC modes of the oscillator have a divide-by-2 stage on the C8051F38x to aid in noise immunity. This was not present on the C8051F34x device family, and any clock generated with C or RC mode will change accordingly.  Fab Technology: The C8051F38x is manufactured using a different technology process than the C8051F34x. As a result, many of the electrical performance parameters will have subtle differences. These differences should not affect most systems but it is nonetheless important to review the electrical parameters for any blocks that are used in the design, and ensure they are compatible with the existing hardware. 21 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 3. Pinout and Package Definitions Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for the C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Name Pin Numbers Type Description 48-pin 32-pin V 10 6 Power In 2.7–3.6 V Power Supply Voltage Input. DD Power 3.3 V Voltage Regulator Output. Out GND 7 3 Ground. RST/ 13 9 D I/O Device Reset. Open-drain output of internal POR or V DD monitor. An external source can initiate a system reset by driving this pin low for at least 15 μs. C2CK D I/O Clock signal for the C2 Debug Interface. C2D 14 — D I/O Bi-directional data signal for the C2 Debug Interface. P3.0 / — 10 D I/O Port 3.0. See Section 20 for a complete description of Port 3. C2D D I/O Bi-directional data signal for the C2 Debug Interface. REGIN 11 7 Power In 5 V Regulator Input. This pin is the input to the on-chip volt- age regulator. VBUS 12 8 D In VBUS Sense Input. This pin should be connected to the VBUS signal of a USB network. A 5 V signal on this pin indi- cates a USB network connection. D+ 8 4 D I/O USB D+. D– 9 5 D I/O USB D–. P0.0 6 2 D I/O or Port 0.0. See Section 20 for a complete description of Port 0. A In P0.1 5 1 D I/O or Port 0.1. A In P0.2 4 32 D I/O or Port 0.2. A In P0.3 3 31 D I/O or Port 0.3. A In P0.4 2 30 D I/O or Port 0.4. A In P0.5 1 29 D I/O or Port 0.5. A In P0.6 48 28 D I/O or Port 0.6. A In Rev. 1.4 22

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for the C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C (Continued) Name Pin Numbers Type Description 48-pin 32-pin P0.7 47 27 D I/O or Port 0.7. A In P1.0 46 26 D I/O or Port 1.0. See Section 20 for a complete description of Port 1. A In P1.1 45 25 D I/O or Port 1.1. A In P1.2 44 24 D I/O or Port 1.2. A In P1.3 43 23 D I/O or Port 1.3. A In P1.4 42 22 D I/O or Port 1.4. A In P1.5 41 21 D I/O or Port 1.5. A In P1.6 40 20 D I/O or Port 1.6. A In P1.7 39 19 D I/O or Port 1.7. A In P2.0 38 18 D I/O or Port 2.0. See Section 20 for a complete description of Port 2. A In P2.1 37 17 D I/O or Port 2.1. A In P2.2 36 16 D I/O or Port 2.2. A In P2.3 35 15 D I/O or Port 2.3. A In P2.4 34 14 D I/O or Port 2.4. A In P2.5 33 13 D I/O or Port 2.5. A In P2.6 32 12 D I/O or Port 2.6. A In P2.7 31 11 D I/O or Port 2.7. A In P3.0 30 — D I/O or Port 3.0. See Section 20 for a complete description of Port 3. A In 23 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 3.1. Pin Definitions for the C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C (Continued) Name Pin Numbers Type Description 48-pin 32-pin P3.1 29 — D I/O or Port 3.1. A In P3.2 28 — D I/O or Port 3.2. A In P3.3 27 — D I/O or Port 3.3. A In P3.4 26 — D I/O or Port 3.4. A In P3.5 25 — D I/O or Port 3.5. A In P3.6 24 — D I/O or Port 3.6. A In P3.7 23 — D I/O or Port 3.7. A In P4.0 22 — D I/O or Port 4.0. See Section 20 for a complete description of Port 4. A In P4.1 21 — D I/O or Port 4.1. A In P4.2 20 — D I/O or Port 4.2. A In P4.3 19 — D I/O or Port 4.3. A In P4.4 18 — D I/O or Port 4.4. A In P4.5 17 — D I/O or Port 4.5. A In P4.6 16 — D I/O or Port 4.6. A In P4.7 15 — D I/O or Port 4.7. A In Rev. 1.4 24

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 3.1. TQFP-48 Pinout Diagram (Top View) 25 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 3.2. TQFP-48 Package Diagram Table 3.2. TQFP-48 Package Dimensions Dimension Min Nom Max Dimension Min Nom Max A — — 1.20 E 9.00 BSC A1 0.05 — 0.15 E1 7.00 BSC A2 0.95 1.00 1.05 L 0.45 0.60 0.75 b 0.17 0.22 0.27 aaa 0.20 c 0.09 — 0.20 bbb 0.20 D 9.00 BSC ccc 0.08 D1 7.00 BSC ddd 0.08 e 0.50 BSC q 0° 3.5° 7° Notes: 1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted. 2. Dimensioning and Tolerancing per ANSI Y14.5M-1994. 3. This drawing conforms to JEDEC outline MS-026, variation ABC. 4. The recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body Components. Rev. 1.4 26

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 3.3. TQFP-48 Recommended PCB Land Pattern Table 3.3. TQFP-48 PCB Land Pattern Dimensions Dimension Min Max C1 8.30 8.40 C2 8.30 8.40 E 0.50 BSC X1 0.20 0.30 Y1 1.40 1.50 Notes: General: 1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted. 2. This Land Pattern Design is based on the IPC-7351 guidelines. Solder Mask Design: 3. All metal pads are to be non-solder mask defined (NSMD). Clearance between the solder mask and the metal pad is to be 60 μm minimum, all the way around the pad. Stencil Design: 4. A stainless steel, laser-cut and electro-polished stencil with trapezoidal walls should be used to assure good solder paste release. 5. The stencil thickness should be 0.125 mm (5 mils). 6. The ratio of stencil aperture to land pad size should be 1:1 for all pads. Card Assembly: 7. A No-Clean, Type-3 solder paste is recommended. 8. The recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body Components. 27 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 3.4. LQFP-32 Pinout Diagram (Top View) Rev. 1.4 28

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 3.5. LQFP-32 Package Diagram Table 3.4. LQFP-32 Package Dimensions Dimension Min Nom Max Dimension Min Nom Max A — — 1.60 E 9.00 BSC A1 0.05 — 0.15 E1 7.00 BSC A2 1.35 1.40 1.45 L 0.45 0.60 0.75 b 0.30 0.37 0.45 aaa 0.20 c 0.09 — 0.20 bbb 0.20 D 9.00 BSC ccc 0.10 D1 7.00 BSC ddd 0.20 e 0.80 BSC q 0° 3.5° 7° Notes: 1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted. 2. Dimensioning and Tolerancing per ANSI Y14.5M-1994. 3. This drawing conforms to JEDEC outline MS-026, variation BBA. 4. The recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body Components. 29 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 3.6. LQFP-32 Recommended PCB Land Pattern Table 3.5. LQFP-32 PCB Land Pattern Dimensions Dimension Min Max C1 8.40 8.50 C2 8.40 8.50 E 0.80 BSC X1 0.40 0.50 Y1 1.25 1.35 Notes: General: 1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted. 2. This Land Pattern Design is based on the IPC-7351 guidelines. Solder Mask Design: 3. All metal pads are to be non-solder mask defined (NSMD). Clearance between the solder mask and the metal pad is to be 60 μm minimum, all the way around the pad. Stencil Design: 4. A stainless steel, laser-cut and electro-polished stencil with trapezoidal walls should be used to assure good solder paste release. 5. The stencil thickness should be 0.125 mm (5 mils). 6. The ratio of stencil aperture to land pad size should be 1:1 for all pads. Card Assembly: 7. A No-Clean, Type-3 solder paste is recommended. 8. The recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body Components. Rev. 1.4 30

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 3.7. QFN-32 Pinout Diagram (Top View) 31 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 3.8. QFN-32 Package Drawing Table 3.6. QFN-32 Package Dimensions Dimension Min Typ Max Dimension Min Typ Max A 0.80 0.85 0.90 E2 3.20 3.30 3.40 A1 0.00 0.02 0.05 L 0.35 0.40 0.45 b 0.18 0.25 0.30 aaa — — 0.10 D 5.00 BSC bbb — — 0.10 D2 3.20 3.30 3.40 ddd — — 0.05 e 0.50 BSC eee — — 0.08 E 5.00 BSC Notes: 1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted. 2. Dimensioning and Tolerancing per ANSI Y14.5M-1994. 3. This drawing conforms to the JEDEC Solid State Outline MO-220, variation VHHD except for custom features D2, E2, and L which are toleranced per supplier designation. 4. The recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body Components. Rev. 1.4 32

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 3.9. QFN-32 Recommended PCB Land Pattern Table 3.7. QFN-32 PCB Land Pattern Dimensions Dimension Min Max Dimension Min Max C1 4.80 4.90 X2 3.20 3.40 C2 4.80 4.90 Y1 0.75 0.85 E 0.50 BSC Y2 3.20 3.40 X1 0.20 0.30 Notes: General: 1. All dimensions shown are in millimeters (mm) unless otherwise noted. 2. This Land Pattern Design is based on the IPC-7351 guidelines. Solder Mask Design: 3. All metal pads are to be non-solder mask defined (NSMD). Clearance between the solder mask and the metal pad is to be 60 m minimum, all the way around the pad. Stencil Design: 4. A stainless steel, laser-cut and electro-polished stencil with trapezoidal walls should be used to assure good solder paste release. 5. The stencil thickness should be 0.125 mm (5 mils). 6. The ratio of stencil aperture to land pad size should be 1:1 for all perimeter pins. 7. A 3x3 array of 1.0 mm openings on a 1.2mm pitch should be used for the center pad to assure the proper paste volume. Card Assembly: 8. A No-Clean, Type-3 solder paste is recommended. 9. The recommended card reflow profile is per the JEDEC/IPC J-STD-020 specification for Small Body Components. 33 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 4. Typical Connection Diagrams This section provides typical connection diagrams for C8051F38x devices. 4.1. Power Figure 4.1 shows a typical connection diagram for the power pins of the C8051F38x devices when the internal regulator is in use and USB is not used. Figure 4.1. Connection Diagram with Voltage Regulator Used and No USB Figure 4.2 shows a typical connection diagram for the power pins of the C8051F38x devices when the internal regulator and USB are not used. Figure 4.2. Connection Diagram with Voltage Regulator Not Used and No USB Figure 4.3 shows a typical connection diagram for the power pins of the C8051F38x devices when the internal regulator used and USB is connected (bus-powered). The VBUS signal is used to detect when Rev. 1.4 34

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB is connected to a host device and is shown with a 100 Ω current-limiting resistor. This current-limiting resistor is recommended for systems that may experience electrostatic discharge (ESD), latch-up, and have a greater opportunity to share signals with systems that do not have the same ground potential. This is not a required component for most applications. Recommended, not required C8051F38x Device USB 5 V (in) 100 (cid:525) VBUS Voltage REGIN Regulator 1 μF and 0.1 μF bypass 3.3 V (out) capacitors required for each power pin placed VDD as close to the pins as possible. GND Figure 4.3. Connection Diagram with Voltage Regulator Used and USB Connected (Bus-Powered) Figure 4.4 shows a typical connection diagram for the power pins of the C8051F38x devices when the internal regulator used and USB is connected (self-powered). The VBUS signal is used to detect when USB is connected to a host device and is shown with a 100 Ω current-limiting resistor. This current-limiting resistor is recommended for systems that may experience electrostatic discharge (ESD), latch-up, and have a greater opportunity to share signals with systems that do not have the same ground potential. This is not a required component for most applications. Recommended, not required USB 5 V (sense) C8051F38x Device 100 (cid:525) 3.6-5.25 V (in) VBUS Voltage REGIN Regulator 1 μF and 0.1 μF bypass 3.3 V (out) capacitors required for each power pin placed VDD as close to the pins as possible. GND Figure 4.4. Connection Diagram with Voltage Regulator Used and USB Connected (Self-Powered) 35 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 4.2. USB Figure 4.5 shows a typical connection diagram for the USB pins of the C8051F38x devices including a 100 Ω current-limiting resistor on the VBUS sense pin and ESD protection diodes on the USB pins. This current-limiting resistor is recommended for systems that may experience electrostatic discharge (ESD), latch-up, and have a greater opportunity to share signals with systems that do not have the same ground potential. This is not a required component for most applications. Recommended, not required C8051F38x Device 100 (cid:525) USB VBUS Connector VBUS D+ USB D+ D- D- Signal GND SP0503BAHT or equivalent USB ESD protection diodes GND Figure 4.5. Connection Diagram for USB Pins 4.3. Voltage Reference (VREF) Figure 4.6 shows a typical connection diagram for the voltage reference (VREF) pin of the C8051F38x devices when using the internal voltage reference. When using an external voltage reference, consult the appropriate device’s data sheet for connection recommendations. Figure 4.6. Connection Diagram for Internal Voltage Reference Rev. 1.4 36

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 5. Electrical Characteristics 5.1. Absolute Maximum Specifications Table 5.1. Absolute Maximum Ratings Parameter Conditions Min Typ Max Units Junction Temperature Under Bias –55 — 125 °C Storage Temperature –65 — 150 °C Voltage on RST, VBUS, or any V > 2.2 V –0.3 — 5.8 V DD Port I/O Pin with Respect to GND V < 2.2 V –0.3 — V + 3.6 V DD DD Voltage on V with Respect to Regulator1 in Normal Mode –0.3 — 4.2 V DD GND Regulator1 in Bypass Mode –0.3 — 1.98 V Maximum Total Current through — — 500 mA V or GND DD Maximum Output Current sunk by — — 100 mA RST or any Port Pin Note: Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the devices at those or any other conditions above those indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. Rev. 1.4 37

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 5.2. Electrical Characteristics Table 5.2. Global Electrical Characteristics –40 to +85 °C, 25 MHz system clock unless otherwise specified. Parameter Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Digital Supply Voltage1 V 1 3.3 3.6 V RST Digital Supply RAM Data — 1.5 — V Retention Voltage SYSCLK (System Clock)2 0 — 48 MHz Specified Operating –40 — +85 °C Temperature Range Digital Supply Current—CPU Active (Normal Mode, fetching instructions from Flash) I 3 SYSCLK = 48 MHz, V = 3.3 V — 12 14 mA DD DD SYSCLK = 24 MHz, V = 3.3 V — 7 8 mA DD SYSCLK = 1 MHz, V = 3.3 V — 0.45 0.85 mA DD SYSCLK = 80 kHz, V = 3.3 V — 280 — μA DD Digital Supply Current—CPU Inactive (Idle Mode, not fetching instructions from Flash) Idle I 3 SYSCLK = 48 MHz, V = 3.3 V — 6.5 8 mA DD DD SYSCLK = 24 MHz, V = 3.3 V — 3.5 5 mA DD SYSCLK = 1 MHz, V = 3.3 V — 0.35 — mA DD SYSCLK = 80 kHz, V = 3.3 V — 220 — μA DD Digital Supply Current Oscillator not running (STOP mode), — 1 — μA (Stop or Suspend Mode, shut- Internal Regulators OFF, V = 3.3 V DD down) Oscillator not running (STOP or SUS- — 100 — μA PEND mode), REG0 and REG1 both in low power mode, V = 3.3 V. DD Oscillator not running (STOP or SUS- — 150 — μA PEND mode), REG0 OFF, V = 3.3 V. DD Digital Supply Current for USB USB Clock = 48 MHz, V = 3.3 V — 8 — mA DD Module (USB Active Mode4) Notes: 1. USB Requires 3.0 V Minimum Supply Voltage. 2. SYSCLK must be at least 32 kHz to enable debugging. 3. Includes normal mode bias current for REG0 and REG1. Does not include current from internal oscillators, USB, or other analog peripherals. 4. An additional 220uA is sourced by the D+ or D- pull-up to the USB bus when the USB pull-up is active. 38 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 5.3. Port I/O DC Electrical Characteristics V = 2.7 to 3.6 V, –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified. DD Parameter Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Output High Voltage I = –3 mA, Port I/O push-pull V – 0.7 — — V OH DD I = –10 μA, Port I/O push-pull V – 0.1 — — OH DD I = –10 mA, Port I/O push-pull — V – 0.8 — OH DD Output Low Voltage I = 8.5 mA — — 0.6 V OL I = 10 μA — — 0.1 OL I = 25 mA — 1.0 — OL Input High Voltage 2.0 — — V Input Low Voltage — — 0.8 V Input Leakage Weak Pullup Off — — ±1 μA Current Weak Pullup On, V = 0 V — 15 50 IN Table 5.4. Reset Electrical Characteristics –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified. Parameter Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit RST Output Low Voltage IOL = 8.5 mA, — — 0.6 V V = 2.7 V to 3.6 V DD RST Input High Voltage 0.7 x V — — V DD RST Input Low Voltage — — 0.3 x V V DD RST Input Pullup Current RST = 0.0 V — 15 40 μA V Monitor Threshold (V ) 2.60 2.65 2.70 V DD RST Missing Clock Detector Time- Time from last system clock 80 580 800 μs out rising edge to reset initiation Reset Time Delay Delay between release of any — — 250 μs reset source and code execution at location 0x0000 Minimum RST Low Time to 15 — — μs Generate a System Reset V Monitor Turn-on Time — — 100 μs DD V Monitor Supply Current — 15 50 μA DD Rev. 1.4 39

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 5.5. Internal Voltage Regulator Electrical Characteristics –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified. Parameter Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Voltage Regulator (REG0) Input Voltage Range1 2.7 — 5.25 V Output Voltage (V )2 Output Current = 1 to 100 mA 3.0 3.3 3.6 V DD Output Current2 — — 100 mA Dropout Voltage (V )3 — 1 — mV/mA DO Voltage Regulator (REG1) Input Voltage Range 1.8 — 3.6 V Notes: 1. Input range specified for regulation. When an external regulator is used, should be tied to V . DD 2. Output current is total regulator output, including any current required by the C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C. 3. The minimum input voltage is 2.70 V or V + V (max load), whichever is greater. DD DO Table 5.6. Flash Electrical Characteristics Parameter Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Flash Size C8051F380/1/4/5* 65536* — — Bytes C8051F382/3/6/7 32768 Bytes Endurance 10k 100k — Erase/Write Erase Cycle Time 25 MHz System Clock 10 15 22.5 ms Write Cycle Time 25 MHz System Clock 10 15 20 μs Notes: 1. 1024 bytes at location 0xFC00 to 0xFFFF are not available for program storage. 2. Data Retention Information is published in the Quarterly Quality and Reliability Report. 40 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 5.7. Internal High-Frequency Oscillator Electrical Characteristics V = 2.7 to 3.6 V; T = –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified; Using factory-calibrated settings. DD A Parameter Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Oscillator Frequency IFCN = 11b 47.3 48 48.7 MHz Oscillator Supply Current 25 °C, V = 3.0 V, — 900 — μA DD (from V ) OSCICN.7 = 1, DD OCSICN.5 = 0 Power Supply Sensitivity Constant Temperature — 110 — ppm/V Temperature Sensitivity Constant Supply — 25 — ppm/°C Table 5.8. Internal Low-Frequency Oscillator Electrical Characteristics V = 2.7 to 3.6 V; T = –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified; Using factory-calibrated settings. DD A Parameter Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Oscillator Frequency OSCLD = 11b 75 80 85 kHz Oscillator Supply Current 25 °C, V = 3.0 V, — 4 — μA DD (from V ) OSCLCN.7 = 1 DD Power Supply Sensitivity Constant Temperature — 0.05 — %/V Temperature Sensitivity Constant Supply — 65 — ppm/°C Table 5.9. External Oscillator Electrical Characteristics V = 2.7 to 3.6 V; T = –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified. DD A Parameter Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit External Crystal Frequency 0.02 — 30 MHz External CMOS Oscillator 0 — 48 MHz Frequency Rev. 1.4 41

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 5.10. ADC0 Electrical Characteristics V = 3.0 V, VREF = 2.40 V (REFSL=0), PGA Gain = 1, –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified. DD Parameter Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit DC Accuracy Resolution 10 bits Integral Nonlinearity — ±0.5 ±1 LSB Differential Nonlinearity Guaranteed Monotonic — ±0.5 ±1 LSB Offset Error –2 0 2 LSB Full Scale Error –5 –2 0 LSB Offset Temperature Coefficient — 0.005 — LSB/°C Dynamic performance (10 kHz sine-wave single-ended input, 1 dB below Full Scale, 500 ksps) Signal-to-Noise Plus Distortion 55 58 — dB Total Harmonic Distortion Up to the 5th harmonic — –73 — dB Spurious-Free Dynamic Range — 78 — dB Conversion Rate SAR Conversion Clock — — 8.33 MHz Conversion Time in SAR Clocks 10-bit Mode 13 — — clocks 8-bit Mode 11 — — clocks Track/Hold Acquisition Time 300 — — ns Throughput Rate — — 500 ksps Analog Inputs ADC Input Voltage Range Single Ended (AIN+ – GND) 0 — VREF V Differential (AIN+ – AIN–) –VREF — VREF V Absolute Pin Voltage with respect Single Ended or Differential 0 — V V DD to GND Sampling Capacitance — 30 — pF Input Multiplexer Impedance — 5 — k Power Specifications Power Supply Current Operating Mode, 500 ksps — 750 1000 μA (V supplied to ADC0) DD Power Supply Rejection — 1 — mV/V Note: Represents one standard deviation from the mean. 42 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 5.11. Temperature Sensor Electrical Characteristics V = 3.0 V, –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified. DD Parameter Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Linearity — ± 0.5 — °C Slope — 2.87 — mV/°C Slope Error* — ±120 — μV/°C Offset Temp = 0 °C — 764 — mV Offset Error* Temp = 0 °C — ±15 — mV Note: Represents one standard deviation from the mean. Table 5.12. Voltage Reference Electrical Characteristics V = 3.0 V; –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified. DD Parameter Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Internal Reference (REFBE = 1) Output Voltage 25 °C ambient 2.38 2.42 2.46 V VREF Short-Circuit Current — — 8 mA VREF Temperature — 35 — ppm/°C Coefficient Load Regulation Load = 0 to 200 μA to GND — 1.5 — ppm/μA VREF Turn-on Time 1 4.7 μF tantalum, 0.1 μF ceramic bypass — 3 — ms VREF Turn-on Time 2 0.1 μF ceramic bypass — 100 — μs Power Supply Rejection — 140 — ppm/V External Reference (REFBE = 0) Input Voltage Range 1 — V V DD Input Current Sample Rate = 500 ksps; VREF = 3.0 V — 9 — μA Power Specifications Supply Current — 75 — μA Rev. 1.4 43

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 5.13. Comparator Electrical Characteristics V = 3.0 V, –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise noted. DD Parameter Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Response Time: CP0+ – CP0– = 100 mV — 100 — ns Mode 0, Vcm* = 1.5 V CP0+ – CP0– = –100 mV — 250 — ns Response Time: CP0+ – CP0– = 100 mV — 175 — ns Mode 1, Vcm* = 1.5 V CP0+ – CP0– = –100 mV — 500 — ns Response Time: CP0+ – CP0– = 100 mV — 320 — ns Mode 2, Vcm* = 1.5 V CP0+ – CP0– = –100 mV — 1100 — ns Response Time: CP0+ – CP0– = 100 mV — 1050 — ns Mode 3, Vcm* = 1.5 V CP0+ – CP0– = –100 mV — 5200 — ns Common-Mode Rejection Ratio — 1.5 4 mV/V Positive Hysteresis 1 CP0HYP1–0 = 00 — 0 1 mV Positive Hysteresis 2 CP0HYP1–0 = 01 2 5 10 mV Positive Hysteresis 3 CP0HYP1–0 = 10 7 10 20 mV Positive Hysteresis 4 CP0HYP1–0 = 11 15 20 30 mV Negative Hysteresis 1 CP0HYN1–0 = 00 — 0 1 mV Negative Hysteresis 2 CP0HYN1–0 = 01 2 5 10 mV Negative Hysteresis 3 CP0HYN1–0 = 10 7 10 20 mV Negative Hysteresis 4 CP0HYN1–0 = 11 15 20 30 mV Inverting or Non-Inverting Input –0.25 — V + 0.25 V DD Voltage Range Input Capacitance — 4 — pF Input Bias Current — 0.001 — nA Input Offset Voltage –10 — +10 mV Power Supply Power Supply Rejection — 0.1 — mV/V Power-up Time — 10 — μs Supply Current at DC Mode 0 — 20 — μA Mode 1 — 10 — μA Mode 2 — 4 — μA Mode 3 — 1 — μA Note: Vcm is the common-mode voltage on CP0+ and CP0–. 44 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 5.14. USB Transceiver Electrical Characteristics V = 3.0 V to 3.6 V, –40 to +85 °C unless otherwise specified. DD Parameter Test Condition Min Typ Max Unit Transmitter Output High Voltage (V ) 2.8 — — V OH Output Low Voltage (V ) — — 0.8 V OL VBUS Detection Input Low V — — 1.0 Voltage VBUS Detection Input High V 3.0 — — Voltage Output Crossover Point 1.3 — 2.0 V (V ) CRS Output Impedance (Z ) Driving High — 38 — W DRV Driving Low — 38 — Pull-up Resistance (R ) Full Speed (D+ Pull-up) 1.425 1.5 1.575 k PU Low Speed (D– Pull-up) Output Rise Time (T ) Low Speed 75 — 300 ns R Full Speed 4 — 20 Output Fall Time (T ) Low Speed 75 — 300 ns F Full Speed 4 — 20 Receiver Differential Input | (D+) – (D–) | 0.2 — — V Sensitivity (V ) DI Differential Input Common 0.8 — 2.5 V Mode Range (V ) CM Input Leakage Current (I ) Pullups Disabled — <1.0 — μA L Note: Refer to the USB Specification for timing diagrams and symbol definitions. Rev. 1.4 45

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 6. 10-Bit ADC (ADC0, C8051F380/1/2/3/C only) ADC0 on the C8051F380/1/2/3/C is a 500 ksps, 10-bit successive-approximation-register (SAR) ADC with integrated track-and-hold, and a programmable window detector. The ADC is fully configurable under soft- ware control via Special Function Registers. The ADC may be configured to measure various different sig- nals using the analog multiplexer described in Section “6.5. ADC0 Analog Multiplexer (C8051F380/1/2/3/C only)” on page 59. The voltage reference for the ADC is selected as described in Section “7. Voltage Refer- ence Options” on page 62. The ADC0 subsystem is enabled only when the AD0EN bit in the ADC0 Control register (ADC0CN) is set to logic 1. The ADC0 subsystem is in low power shutdown when this bit is logic 0. Figure 6.1. ADC0 Functional Block Diagram Rev. 1.4 46

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 6.1. Output Code Formatting The conversion code format differs between Single-ended and Differential modes. The registers ADC0H and ADC0L contain the high and low bytes of the output conversion code from the ADC at the completion of each conversion. Data can be right-justified or left-justified, depending on the setting of the AD0LJST bit (ADC0CN.0). When in Single-ended Mode, conversion codes are represented as 10-bit unsigned integers. Inputs are measured from 0 to VREF x 1023/1024. Example codes are shown below for both right-justified and left-justified data. Unused bits in the ADC0H and ADC0L registers are set to 0. Input Voltage Right-Justified ADC0H:ADC0L Left-Justified ADC0H:ADC0L (Single-Ended) (AD0LJST = 0) (AD0LJST = 1) VREF x 1023/1024 0x03FF 0xFFC0 VREF x 512/1024 0x0200 0x8000 VREF x 256/1024 0x0100 0x4000 0 0x0000 0x0000 When in Differential Mode, conversion codes are represented as 10-bit signed 2s complement numbers. Inputs are measured from –VREF to VREF x 511/512. Example codes are shown below for both right-jus- tified and left-justified data. For right-justified data, the unused MSBs of ADC0H are a sign-extension of the data word. For left-justified data, the unused LSBs in the ADC0L register are set to 0. Input Voltage Right-Justified ADC0H:ADC0L Left-Justified ADC0H:ADC0L (Differential) (AD0LJST = 0) (AD0LJST = 1) VREF x 511/512 0x01FF 0x7FC0 VREF x 256/512 0x0100 0x4000 0 0x0000 0x0000 –VREF x 256/512 0xFF00 0xC000 –VREF 0xFE00 0x8000 47 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 6.2. Temperature Sensor The typical temperature sensor transfer function is shown in Figure 6.2. The output voltage (V ) is the TEMP positive ADC input when the temperature sensor is selected by bits AMX0P5-0 in register AMX0P. Figure 6.2. Typical Temperature Sensor Transfer Function The uncalibrated temperature sensor output is extremely linear and suitable for relative temperature mea- surements (see Table 5.10, “ADC0 Electrical Characteristics,” on page 42 for linearity specifications). For absolute temperature measurements, gain and/or offset calibration is recommended. Typically a 1-point calibration includes the following steps: Step 1. Control/measure the ambient temperature (this temperature must be known). Step 2. Power the device, and delay for a few seconds to allow for self-heating. Step 3. Perform an ADC conversion with the temperature sensor selected as the positive input and GND selected as the negative input. Step 4. Calculate the offset and/or gain characteristics, and store these values in non-volatile memory for use with subsequent temperature sensor measurements. Figure 6.3 shows the typical temperature sensor error assuming a 1-point calibration at 25 °C. Note that parameters which affect ADC measurement, in particular the voltage reference value, will also affect temperature measurement. Rev. 1.4 48

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 6.3. Temperature Sensor Error with 1-Point Calibration 49 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 6.3. Modes of Operation ADC0 has a maximum conversion speed of 500 ksps. The ADC0 conversion clock is a divided version of the system clock, determined by the AD0SC bits in the ADC0CF register. 6.3.1. Starting a Conversion A conversion can be initiated in one of several ways, depending on the programmed states of the ADC0 Start of Conversion Mode bits (AD0CM2–0) in register ADC0CN. Conversions may be initiated by one of the following: 1. Writing a 1 to the AD0BUSY bit of register ADC0CN 2. A Timer 0 overflow (i.e., timed continuous conversions) 3. A Timer 2 overflow 4. A Timer 1 overflow 5. A rising edge on the CNVSTR input signal 6. A Timer 3 overflow 7. A Timer 4 overflow 8. A Timer 5 overflow Writing a 1 to AD0BUSY provides software control of ADC0 whereby conversions are performed "on- demand". During conversion, the AD0BUSY bit is set to logic 1 and reset to logic 0 when the conversion is complete. The falling edge of AD0BUSY triggers an interrupt (when enabled) and sets the ADC0 interrupt flag (AD0INT). Note: When polling for ADC conversion completions, the ADC0 interrupt flag (AD0INT) should be used. Converted data is available in the ADC0 data registers, ADC0H:ADC0L, when bit AD0INT is logic 1. Note that when Timer 2, 3, 4, or 5 overflows are used as the conversion source, Low Byte over- flows are used if the timer is in 8-bit mode; High byte overflows are used if the timer is in 16-bit mode. See Section “26. Timers” on page 263 for timer configuration. Important Note About Using CNVSTR: The CNVSTR input pin also functions as a Port I/O pin. When the CNVSTR input is used as the ADC0 conversion source, the associated pin should be skipped by the Digi- tal Crossbar. See Section “20. Port Input/Output” on page 153 for details on Port I/O configuration. Rev. 1.4 50

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 6.3.2. Tracking Modes The AD0TM bit in register ADC0CN controls the ADC0 track-and-hold mode. In its default state, the ADC0 input is continuously tracked, except when a conversion is in progress. When the AD0TM bit is logic 1, ADC0 operates in low-power track-and-hold mode. In this mode, each conversion is preceded by a track- ing period of 3 SAR clocks (after the start-of-conversion signal). When the CNVSTR signal is used to initi- ate conversions in low-power tracking mode, ADC0 tracks only when CNVSTR is low; conversion begins on the rising edge of CNVSTR. See Figure 6.4 for track and convert timing details. Tracking can also be disabled (shutdown) when the device is in low power standby or sleep modes. Low-power track-and-hold mode is also useful when AMUX settings are frequently changed, due to the settling time requirements described in Section “6.3.3. Settling Time Requirements” on page 52. Figure 6.4. 10-Bit ADC Track and Conversion Example Timing 51 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 6.3.3. Settling Time Requirements A minimum tracking time is required before each conversion to ensure that an accurate conversion is per- formed. This tracking time is determined by the AMUX0 resistance, the ADC0 sampling capacitance, any external source resistance, and the accuracy required for the conversion. Note that in low-power tracking mode, three SAR clocks are used for tracking at the start of every conversion. For most applications, these three SAR clocks will meet the minimum tracking time requirements. Figure 6.5 shows the equivalent ADC0 input circuit. The required ADC0 settling time for a given settling accuracy (SA) may be approximated by Equation 6.1. See Table 5.10 for ADC0 minimum settling time requirements as well as the mux impedance and sampling capacitor values. n 2  t = ln-------- R C SA TOTAL SAMPLE Equation 6.1. ADC0 Settling Time Requirements Where: SA is the settling accuracy, given as a fraction of an LSB (for example, 0.25 to settle within 1/4 LSB) t is the required settling time in seconds R is the sum of the AMUX0 resistance and any external source resistance. TOTAL n is the ADC resolution in bits (10). Figure 6.5. ADC0 Equivalent Input Circuits Rev. 1.4 52

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 6.1. ADC0CF: ADC0 Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name AD0SC[4:0] AD0LJST Reserved Type R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xBC; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:3 AD0SC[4:0] ADC0 SAR Conversion Clock Period Bits. SAR Conversion clock is derived from system clock by the following equation, where AD0SC refers to the 5-bit value held in bits AD0SC4–0. SAR Conversion clock requirements are given in the ADC specification table. SYSCLK AD0SC = ------------------------–1 CLK SAR Note: If the Memory Power Controller is enabled (MPCE = '1'), AD0SC must be set to at least "00001" for proper AD C operation. 2 AD0LJST ADC0 Left Justify Select. 0: Data in ADC0H:ADC0L registers are right-justified. 1: Data in ADC0H:ADC0L registers are left-justified. Note: The AD0LJST bit is only valid for 10-bit mode (AD08BE = 0). 1:0 Reserved Must Write 00b. 53 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 6.2. ADC0H: ADC0 Data Word MSB Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ADC0H[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xBE; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 ADC0H[7:0] ADC0 Data Word High-Order Bits. For AD0LJST = 0: Bits 7–2 will read 000000b. Bits 1–0 are the upper 2 bits of the 10- bit ADC0 Data Word. For AD0LJST = 1: Bits 7–0 are the most-significant bits of the 10-bit ADC0 Data Word. SFR Definition 6.3. ADC0L: ADC0 Data Word LSB Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ADC0L[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xBD; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 ADC0L[7:0] ADC0 Data Word Low-Order Bits. For AD0LJST = 0: Bits 7–0 are the lower 8 bits of the 10-bit Data Word. For AD0LJST = 1: Bits 7–6 are the lower 2 bits of the 10-bit Data Word. Bits 5–0 will read 000000b. Rev. 1.4 54

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 6.4. ADC0CN: ADC0 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name AD0EN AD0TM AD0INT AD0BUSY AD0WINT AD0CM[2:0] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xE8; SFR Page = All Pages; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Function 7 AD0EN ADC0 Enable Bit. 0: ADC0 Disabled. ADC0 is in low-power shutdown. 1: ADC0 Enabled. ADC0 is active and ready for data conversions. 6 AD0TM ADC0 Track Mode Bit. 0: Normal Track Mode: When ADC0 is enabled, tracking is continuous unless a con- version is in progress. Conversion begins immediately on start-of-conversion event, as defined by AD0CM[2:0]. 1: Delayed Track Mode: When ADC0 is enabled, input is tracked when a conversion is not in progress. A start- of-conversion signal initiates three SAR clocks of additional tracking, and then begins the conversion. Note that there is not a tracking delay when CNVSTR is used (AD0CM[2:0] = 100). 5 AD0INT ADC0 Conversion Complete Interrupt Flag. 0: ADC0 has not completed a data conversion since AD0INT was last cleared. 1: ADC0 has completed a data conversion. 4 AD0BUSY ADC0 Busy Bit. Read: Write: 0: ADC0 conversion is not in 0: No Effect. progress. 1: Initiates ADC0 Conversion if 1: ADC0 conversion is in prog- AD0CM[2:0] = 000b ress. 3 AD0WINT ADC0 Window Compare Interrupt Flag. 0: ADC0 Window Comparison Data match has not occurred since this flag was last cleared. 1: ADC0 Window Comparison Data match has occurred. 2:0 AD0CM[2:0] ADC0 Start of Conversion Mode Select. 000: ADC0 start-of-conversion source is write of 1 to AD0BUSY. 001: ADC0 start-of-conversion source is overflow of Timer 0. 010: ADC0 start-of-conversion source is overflow of Timer 2. 011: ADC0 start-of-conversion source is overflow of Timer 1. 100: ADC0 start-of-conversion source is rising edge of external CNVSTR. 101: ADC0 start-of-conversion source is overflow of Timer 3. 110: ADC0 start-of-conversion source is overflow of Timer 4. 111: ADC0 start-of-conversion source is overflow of Timer 5. 55 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 6.4. Programmable Window Detector The ADC Programmable Window Detector continuously compares the ADC0 output registers to user-pro- grammed limits, and notifies the system when a desired condition is detected. This is especially effective in an interrupt-driven system, saving code space and CPU bandwidth while delivering faster system response times. The window detector interrupt flag (AD0WINT in register ADC0CN) can also be used in polled mode. The ADC0 Greater-Than (ADC0GTH, ADC0GTL) and Less-Than (ADC0LTH, ADC0LTL) registers hold the comparison values. The window detector flag can be programmed to indicate when mea- sured data is inside or outside of the user-programmed limits, depending on the contents of the ADC0 Less-Than and ADC0 Greater-Than registers. SFR Definition 6.5. ADC0GTH: ADC0 Greater-Than Data High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ADC0GTH[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address = 0xC4; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 ADC0GTH[7:0] ADC0 Greater-Than Data Word High-Order Bits. SFR Definition 6.6. ADC0GTL: ADC0 Greater-Than Data Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ADC0GTL[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address = 0xC3; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 ADC0GTL[7:0] ADC0 Greater-Than Data Word Low-Order Bits. Rev. 1.4 56

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 6.7. ADC0LTH: ADC0 Less-Than Data High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ADC0LTH[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xC6; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 ADC0LTH[7:0] ADC0 Less-Than Data Word High-Order Bits. SFR Definition 6.8. ADC0LTL: ADC0 Less-Than Data Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ADC0LTL[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xC5; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 ADC0LTL[7:0] ADC0 Less-Than Data Word Low-Order Bits. 57 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 6.4.1. Window Detector Example Figure 6.6 shows two example window comparisons for right-justified, single-ended data, with ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL = 0x0080 (128d) and ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL = 0x0040 (64d). The input voltage can range from 0 to VREF x (1023/1024) with respect to GND, and is represented by a 10-bit unsigned integer value. In the left example, an AD0WINT interrupt will be generated if the ADC0 conversion word (ADC0H:ADC0L) is within the range defined by ADC0GTH:ADC0GTL and ADC0LTH:ADC0LTL (if 0x0040 < ADC0H:ADC0L < 0x0080). In the right example, and AD0WINT interrupt will be generated if the ADC0 conversion word is outside of the range defined by the ADC0GT and ADC0LT registers (if ADC0H:ADC0L < 0x0040 or ADC0H:ADC0L > 0x0080). Figure 6.7 shows an example using left-justi- fied data with the same comparison values. Figure 6.6. ADC Window Compare Example: Right-Justified Data Figure 6.7. ADC Window Compare Example: Left-Justified Data Rev. 1.4 58

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 59 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 6.5. ADC0 Analog Multiplexer (C8051F380/1/2/3/C only) AMUX0 selects the positive and negative inputs to the ADC. The positive input (AIN+) can be connected to individual Port pins, the on-chip temperature sensor, or the positive power supply (V ). The negative DD input (AIN-) can be connected to individual Port pins, VREF, or GND. When GND is selected as the nega- tive input, ADC0 operates in Single-ended Mode; at all other times, ADC0 operates in Differential Mode. The ADC0 input channels are selected in the AMX0P and AMX0N registers as described in SFR Definition 6.9 and SFR Definition 6.10. Important Note About ADC0 Input Configuration: Port pins selected as ADC0 inputs should be config- ured as analog inputs, and should be skipped by the Digital Crossbar. To configure a Port pin for analog input, set to 0 the corresponding bit in register PnMDIN. To force the Crossbar to skip a Port pin, set to 1 the corresponding bit in register PnSKIP. See Section “20. Port Input/Output” on page 153 for more Port I/O configuration details. Rev. 1.4 59

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 6.9. AMX0P: AMUX0 Positive Channel Select Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name AMX0P[5:0] Type R R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xBB; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:6 Unused Read = 00b; Write = don’t care. 5:0 AMX0P[5:0] AMUX0 Positive Input Selection. AMX0P 32-pin 48-pin AMX0P 32-pin 48-pin Packages Packages Packages Packages 000000: P1.0 P2.0 010010: P0.1 P0.4 000001: P1.1 P2.1 010011: P0.4 P1.1 000010: P1.2 P2.2 010100: P0.5 P1.2 000011: P1.3 P2.3 010101: Reserved P1.0 000100: P1.4 P2.5 010110: Reserved P1.3 000101: P1.5 P2.6 010111: Reserved P1.6 000110: P1.6 P3.0 011000: Reserved P1.7 000111: P1.7 P3.1 011001: Reserved P2.4 001000: P2.0 P3.4 011010: Reserved P2.7 001001: P2.1 P3.5 011011: Reserved P3.2 001010: P2.2 P3.7 011100: Reserved P3.3 001011: P2.3 P4.0 011101: Reserved P3.6 001100: P2.4 P4.3 011110: Temp Sensor Temp Sensor 001101: P2.5 P4.4 011111: V V DD DD 001110: P2.6 P4.5 100000: Reserved P4.1 001111: P2.7 P4.6 100001: Reserved P4.2 010000: P3.0 Reserved 100010: Reserved P4.7 010001: P0.0 P0.3 100011 - Reserved Reserved 111111: 60 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 6.10. AMX0N: AMUX0 Negative Channel Select Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name AMX0N[5:0] Type R R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xBA; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:6 Unused Read = 00b; Write = don’t care. 5:0 AMX0N[5:0] AMUX0 Negative Input Selection. AMX0N 32-pin 48-pin AMX0N 32-pin 48-pin Packages Packages Packages Packages 000000: P1.0 P2.0 010010: P0.1 P0.4 000001: P1.1 P2.1 010011: P0.4 P1.1 000010: P1.2 P2.2 010100: P0.5 P1.2 000011: P1.3 P2.3 010101: Reserved P1.0 000100: P1.4 P2.5 010110: Reserved P1.3 000101: P1.5 P2.6 010111: Reserved P1.6 000110: P1.6 P3.0 011000: Reserved P1.7 000111: P1.7 P3.1 011001: Reserved P2.4 001000: P2.0 P3.4 011010: Reserved P2.7 001001: P2.1 P3.5 011011: Reserved P3.2 001010: P2.2 P3.7 011100: Reserved P3.3 001011: P2.3 P4.0 011101: Reserved P3.6 001100: P2.4 P4.3 011110: VREF VREF 001101: P2.5 P4.4 011111: GND GND (Single-Ended (Single-Ended Measurement) Measurement) 001110: P2.6 P4.5 100000: Reserved P4.1 001111: P2.7 P4.6 100001: Reserved P4.2 010000: P3.0 Reserved 100010: Reserved P4.7 010001: P0.0 P0.3 100011 - Reserved Reserved 111111: Rev. 1.4 61

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 7. Voltage Reference Options The Voltage reference multiplexer for the ADC is configurable to use an externally connected voltage refer- ence, the on-chip reference voltage generator routed to the VREF pin, the unregulated power supply volt- age (V ), or the regulated 1.8 V internal supply (see Figure 7.1). The REFSL bit in the Reference Control DD register (REF0CN, SFR Definition 7.1) selects the reference source for the ADC. For an external source or the on-chip reference, REFSL should be set to 0 to select the VREF pin. To use V as the reference DD source, REFSL should be set to 1. To override this selection and use the internal regulator as the reference source, the REGOVR bit can be set to 1. The BIASE bit enables the internal voltage bias generator, which is used by many of the analog peripherals on the device. This bias is automatically enabled when any peripheral which requires it is enabled, and it does not need to be enabled manually. The bias generator may be enabled manually by writing a 1 to the BIASE bit in register REF0CN. The electrical specifications for the voltage reference circuit are given in Table 5.12. The C8051F380/1/2/3/C devices also include an on-chip voltage reference circuit which consists of a 1.2 V, temperature stable bandgap voltage reference generator and a selectable-gain output buffer ampli- fier. The buffer is configured for 1x or 2x gain using the REFBGS bit in register REF0CN. On the 1x gain setting the output voltage is nominally 1.2 V, and on the 2x gain setting the output voltage is nominally 2.4 V. The on-chip voltage reference can be driven on the VREF pin by setting the REFBE bit in register REF0CN to a 1. The maximum load seen by the VREF pin must be less than 200 μA to GND. Bypass capacitors of 0.1 μF and 4.7 μF are recommended from the VREF pin to GND, and a minimum of 0.1uF is required. If the on-chip reference is not used, the REFBE bit should be cleared to 0. Electrical specifica- tions for the on-chip voltage reference are given in Table 5.12. Important Note about the VREF Pin: When using either an external voltage reference or the on-chip ref- erence circuitry, the VREF pin should be configured as an analog pin and skipped by the Digital Crossbar. Refer to Section “20. Port Input/Output” on page 153 for the location of the VREF pin, as well as details of how to configure the pin in analog mode and to be skipped by the crossbar. Figure 7.1. Voltage Reference Functional Block Diagram Rev. 1.4 62

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 7.1. REF0CN: Reference Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name REFBGS REGOVR REFSL TEMPE BIASE REFBE Type R/W R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xD1; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 REFBGS Reference Buffer Gain Select. This bit selects between 1x and 2x gain for the on-chip voltage reference buffer. 0: 2x Gain 1: 1x Gain 6:5 Unused Read = 00b; Write = don’t care. 4 REGOVR Regulator Reference Override. This bit “overrides” the REFSL bit, and allows the internal regulator to be used as a ref- erence source. 0: The voltage reference source is selected by the REFSL bit. 1: The internal regulator is used as the voltage reference. 3 REFSL Voltage Reference Select. This bit selects the ADCs voltage reference. 0: V pin used as voltage reference. REF 1: V used as voltage reference. DD 2 TEMPE Temperature Sensor Enable Bit. 0: Internal Temperature Sensor off. 1: Internal Temperature Sensor on. 1 BIASE Internal Analog Bias Generator Enable Bit. 0: Internal Bias Generator off. 1: Internal Bias Generator on. 0 REFBE On-chip Reference Buffer Enable Bit. 0: On-chip Reference Buffer off. 1: On-chip Reference Buffer on. Internal voltage reference driven on the V pin. REF 63 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 8. Comparator0 and Comparator1 C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C devices include two on-chip programmable voltage comparators: Comparator0 is shown in Figure 8.1, Comparator1 is shown in Figure 8.2. The two comparators operate identically with the following exceptions: (1) Their input selections differ as described in Section “8.1. Comparator Multi- plexers” on page 71; (2) Comparator0 can be used as a reset source. The Comparators offer programmable response time and hysteresis, an analog input multiplexer, and two outputs that are optionally available at the Port pins: a synchronous “latched” output (CP0 or CP1), or an asynchronous “raw” output (CP0A or CP1A). The asynchronous signals are available even when the sys- tem clock is not active. This allows the Comparators to operate and generate an output with the device in STOP mode. When assigned to a Port pin, the Comparator outputs may be configured as open drain or push-pull (see Section “20.2. Port I/O Initialization” on page 158). Comparator0 may also be used as a reset source (see Section “17.5. Comparator0 Reset” on page 132). The Comparator inputs are selected by the comparator input multiplexers, as detailed in Section “8.1. Comparator Multiplexers” on page 71. Figure 8.1. Comparator0 Functional Block Diagram Rev. 1.4 64

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 8.2. Comparator1 Functional Block Diagram The Comparator output can be polled in software, used as an interrupt source, and/or routed to a Port pin. When routed to a Port pin, the Comparator output is available asynchronous or synchronous to the system clock; the asynchronous output is available even in STOP mode (with no system clock active). When dis- abled, the Comparator output (if assigned to a Port I/O pin via the Crossbar) defaults to the logic low state, and the power supply to the comparator is turned off. See Section “20.1. Priority Crossbar Decoder” on page 154 for details on configuring Comparator outputs via the digital Crossbar. Comparator inputs can be externally driven from –0.25 V to (V ) + 0.25 V without damage or upset. The complete Comparator elec- DD trical specifications are given in Section “5. Electrical Characteristics” on page 37. The Comparator response time may be configured in software via the CPTnMD registers (see SFR Defini- tion 8.2 and SFR Definition 8.4). Selecting a longer response time reduces the Comparator supply current. 65 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 8.3. Comparator Hysteresis Plot The Comparator hysteresis is software-programmable via its Comparator Control register CPTnCN (for n = 0 or 1). The user can program both the amount of hysteresis voltage (referred to the input voltage) and the positive and negative-going symmetry of this hysteresis around the threshold voltage. The Comparator hysteresis is programmed using Bits 3–0 in the Comparator Control Register CPTnCN (shown in SFR Definition 8.1). The amount of negative hysteresis voltage is determined by the settings of the CPnHYN bits. Settings of 20, 10 or 5 mV of nominal negative hysteresis can be programmed, or nega- tive hysteresis can be disabled. In a similar way, the amount of positive hysteresis is determined by the setting the CPnHYP bits. Comparator interrupts can be generated on both rising-edge and falling-edge output transitions. (For Inter- rupt enable and priority control, see Section “16.1. MCU Interrupt Sources and Vectors” on page 119). The CPnFIF flag is set to logic 1 upon a Comparator falling-edge occurrence, and the CPnRIF flag is set to logic 1 upon the Comparator rising-edge occurrence. Once set, these bits remain set until cleared by soft- ware. The Comparator rising-edge interrupt mask is enabled by setting CPnRIE to a logic 1. The Compar- ator falling-edge interrupt mask is enabled by setting CPnFIE to a logic 1. The output state of the Comparator can be obtained at any time by reading the CPnOUT bit. The Compar- ator is enabled by setting the CPnEN bit to logic 1, and is disabled by clearing this bit to logic 0. Note that false rising edges and falling edges can be detected when the comparator is first powered on or if changes are made to the hysteresis or response time control bits. Therefore, it is recommended that the rising-edge and falling-edge flags be explicitly cleared to logic 0 a short time after the comparator is enabled or its mode bits have been changed. Rev. 1.4 66

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 8.1. CPT0CN: Comparator0 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CP0EN CP0OUT CP0RIF CP0FIF CP0HYP[1:0] CP0HYN[1:0] Type R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x9B; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 CP0EN Comparator0 Enable Bit. 0: Comparator0 Disabled. 1: Comparator0 Enabled. 6 CP0OUT Comparator0 Output State Flag. 0: Voltage on CP0+ < CP0–. 1: Voltage on CP0+ > CP0–. 5 CP0RIF Comparator0 Rising-Edge Flag. Must be cleared by software. 0: No Comparator0 Rising Edge has occurred since this flag was last cleared. 1: Comparator0 Rising Edge has occurred. 4 CP0FIF Comparator0 Falling-Edge Flag. Must be cleared by software. 0: No Comparator0 Falling-Edge has occurred since this flag was last cleared. 1: Comparator0 Falling-Edge has occurred. 3:2 CP0HYP[1:0] Comparator0 Positive Hysteresis Control Bits. 00: Positive Hysteresis Disabled. 01: Positive Hysteresis = 5 mV. 10: Positive Hysteresis = 10 mV. 11: Positive Hysteresis = 20 mV. 1:0 CP0HYN[1:0] Comparator0 Negative Hysteresis Control Bits. 00: Negative Hysteresis Disabled. 01: Negative Hysteresis = 5 mV. 10: Negative Hysteresis = 10 mV. 11: Negative Hysteresis = 20 mV. 67 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 8.2. CPT0MD: Comparator0 Mode Selection Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CP0RIE CP0FIE CP0MD[1:0] Type R R R/W R/W R R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 SFR Address = 0x9D; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:6 Unused Read = 00b, Write = don’t care. 5 CP0RIE Comparator0 Rising-Edge Interrupt Enable. 0: Comparator0 Rising-edge interrupt disabled. 1: Comparator0 Rising-edge interrupt enabled. 4 CP0FIE Comparator0 Falling-Edge Interrupt Enable. 0: Comparator0 Falling-edge interrupt disabled. 1: Comparator0 Falling-edge interrupt enabled. 3:2 Unused Read = 00b, Write = don’t care. 1:0 CP0MD[1:0] Comparator0 Mode Select. These bits affect the response time and power consumption for Comparator0. 00: Mode 0 (Fastest Response Time, Highest Power Consumption) 01: Mode 1 10: Mode 2 11: Mode 3 (Slowest Response Time, Lowest Power Consumption) Rev. 1.4 68

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 8.3. CPT1CN: Comparator1 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CP1EN CP1OUT CP1RIF CP1FIF CP1HYP[1:0] CP1HYN[1:0] Type R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x9A; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 CP1EN Comparator1 Enable Bit. 0: Comparator1 Disabled. 1: Comparator1 Enabled. 6 CP1OUT Comparator1 Output State Flag. 0: Voltage on CP1+ < CP1–. 1: Voltage on CP1+ > CP1–. 5 CP1RIF Comparator1 Rising-Edge Flag. Must be cleared by software. 0: No Comparator1 Rising Edge has occurred since this flag was last cleared. 1: Comparator1 Rising Edge has occurred. 4 CP1FIF Comparator1 Falling-Edge Flag. Must be cleared by software. 0: No Comparator1 Falling-Edge has occurred since this flag was last cleared. 1: Comparator1 Falling-Edge has occurred. 3:2 CP1HYP[1:0] Comparator1 Positive Hysteresis Control Bits. 00: Positive Hysteresis Disabled. 01: Positive Hysteresis = 5 mV. 10: Positive Hysteresis = 10 mV. 11: Positive Hysteresis = 20 mV. 1:0 CP1HYN[1:0] Comparator1 Negative Hysteresis Control Bits. 00: Negative Hysteresis Disabled. 01: Negative Hysteresis = 5 mV. 10: Negative Hysteresis = 10 mV. 11: Negative Hysteresis = 20 mV. 69 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 8.4. CPT1MD: Comparator1 Mode Selection Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CP1RIE CP1FIE CP1MD[1:0] Type R R R/W R/W R R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 SFR Address = 0x9C; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:6 Unused Read = 00b, Write = don’t care. 5 CP1RIE Comparator1 Rising-Edge Interrupt Enable. 0: Comparator1 Rising-edge interrupt disabled. 1: Comparator1 Rising-edge interrupt enabled. 4 CP1FIE Comparator1 Falling-Edge Interrupt Enable. 0: Comparator1 Falling-edge interrupt disabled. 1: Comparator1 Falling-edge interrupt enabled. 3:2 Unused Read = 00b, Write = don’t care. 1:0 CP1MD[1:0] Comparator1 Mode Select. These bits affect the response time and power consumption for Comparator1. 00: Mode 0 (Fastest Response Time, Highest Power Consumption) 01: Mode 1 10: Mode 2 11: Mode 3 (Slowest Response Time, Lowest Power Consumption) Rev. 1.4 70

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 71 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 8.1. Comparator Multiplexers C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C devices include an analog input multiplexer to connect Port I/O pins to the comparator inputs. The Comparator inputs are selected in the CPTnMX registers (SFR Definition 8.5 and SFR Definition 8.6). The CMXnP2–CMXnP0 bits select the Comparator positive input; the CMXnN2–CMX- nN0 bits select the Comparator negative input. Important Note About Comparator Inputs: The Port pins selected as comparator inputs should be con- figured as analog inputs in their associated Port configuration register, and configured to be skipped by the Crossbar (for details on Port configuration, see Section “20.3. General Purpose Port I/O” on page 161). Figure 8.4. Comparator Input Multiplexer Block Diagram Rev. 1.4 71

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 8.5. CPT0MX: Comparator0 MUX Selection Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CMX0N[2:0] CMX0P[2:0] Type R R/W R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x9F; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 Unused Read = 0b; Write = don’t care. 6:4 CMX0N[2:0] Comparator0 Negative Input MUX Selection. Selection 32-pin Package 48-pin Package 000: P1.1 P2.1 001: P1.5 P2.6 010: P2.1 P3.5 011: P2.5 P4.4 100: P0.1 P0.4 101-111: Reserved Reserved 3 Unused Read = 0b; Write = don’t care. 2:0 CMX0P[2:0] Comparator0 Positive Input MUX Selection. Selection 32-pin Package 48-pin Package 000: P1.0 P2.0 001: P1.4 P2.5 010: P2.0 P3.4 011: P2.4 P4.3 100: P0.0 P0.3 101-111: Reserved Reserved 72 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 8.6. CPT1MX: Comparator1 MUX Selection Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CMX1N[2:0] CMX1P[2:0] Type R R/W R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x9E; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 Unused Read = 0b; Write = don’t care. 6:4 CMX1N[2:0] Comparator1 Negative Input MUX Selection. Selection 32-pin Package 48-pin Package 000: P1.3 P2.3 001: P1.7 P3.1 010: P2.3 P4.0 011: Reserved P4.6 100: P0.5 P1.2 101-111: Reserved Reserved 3 Unused Read = 0b; Write = don’t care. 2:0 CMX1P[2:0] Comparator1 Positive Input MUX Selection. Selection 32-pin Package 48-pin Package 000: P1.2 P2.2 001: P1.6 P3.0 010: P2.2 P3.7 011: Reserved P4.5 100: P0.4 P1.1 101-111: Reserved Reserved Rev. 1.4 73

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 9. Voltage Regulators (REG0 and REG1) C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C devices include two internal voltage regulators: one regulates a voltage source on REGIN to 3.3 V (REG0), and the other regulates the internal core supply to 1.8 V from a V supply of DD 1.8 to 3.6 V (REG1). When enabled, the REG0 output appears on the V pin and can be used to power DD external devices. REG0 can be enabled/disabled by software using bit REG0DIS in register REG01CN (SFR Definition 9.1). REG1 has two power-saving modes built into the regulator to help reduce current consumption in low-power applications. These modes are accessed through the REG01CN register. Elec- trical characteristics for the on-chip regulators are specified in Table 5.5 on page 40. Note that the VBUS signal must be connected to the VBUS pin when using the device in a USB network. The VBUS signal should only be connected to the REGIN pin when operating the device as a bus-powered function. REG0 configuration options are shown in “4. Typical Connection Diagrams” Figure 4.1– Figure 4.4. 9.1. Voltage Regulator (REG0) See “4. Typical Connection Diagrams” for typical connection diagrams using the REG0 voltage regulator. 9.1.1. Regulator Mode Selection REG0 offers a low power mode intended for use when the device is in suspend mode. In this low power mode, the REG0 output remains as specified; however the REG0 dynamic performance (response time) is degraded. See Table 5.5 for normal and low power mode supply current specifications. The REG0 mode selection is controlled via the REG0MD bit in register REG01CN. 9.1.2. VBUS Detection When the USB Function Controller is used (see section Section “21. Universal Serial Bus Controller (USB0)” on page 172), the VBUS signal should be connected to the VBUS pin. The VBSTAT bit (register REG01CN) indicates the current logic level of the VBUS signal. If enabled, a VBUS interrupt will be gener- ated when the VBUS signal has either a falling or rising edge. The VBUS interrupt is edge-sensitive, and has no associated interrupt pending flag. See Table 5.5 for VBUS input parameters. Important Note: When USB is selected as a reset source, a system reset will be generated when a falling or rising edge occurs on the VBUS pin. See Section “17. Reset Sources” on page 129 for details on select- ing USB as a reset source. 9.2. Voltage Regulator (REG1) Under default conditions, the internal REG1 regulator will remain on when the device enters STOP mode. This allows any enabled reset source to generate a reset for the device and bring the device out of STOP mode. For additional power savings, the STOPCF bit can be used to shut down the regulator and the inter- nal power network of the device when the part enters STOP mode. When STOPCF is set to 1, the RST pin and a full power cycle of the device are the only methods of generating a reset. REG1 offers an additional low power mode intended for use when the device is in suspend mode. This low power mode should not be used during normal operation or if the REG0 Voltage Regulator is disabled. See Table 5.5 for normal and low power mode supply current specifications. The REG1 mode selection is con- trolled via the REG1MD bit in register REG01CN. Important Note: At least 12 clock instructions must occur after placing REG1 in low power mode before the Internal High Frequency Oscillator is Suspended (OSCICN.5 = 1b). Rev. 1.4 74

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 9.1. REG01CN: Voltage Regulator Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name REG0DIS VBSTAT Reserved REG0MD STOPCF Reserved REG1MD Reserved Type R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xC9; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 REG0DIS Voltage Regulator (REG0) Disable. This bit enables or disables the REG0 Voltage Regulator. 0: Voltage Regulator Enabled. 1: Voltage Regulator Disabled. 6 VBSTAT VBUS Signal Status. This bit indicates whether the device is connected to a USB network. 0: VBUS signal currently absent (device not attached to USB network). 1: VBUS signal currently present (device attached to USB network). 5 Reserved Must Write 0b. 4 REG0MD Voltage Regulator (REG0) Mode Select. This bit selects the Voltage Regulator mode for REG0. When REG0MD is set to 1, the REG0 voltage regulator operates in lower power (suspend) mode. 0: REG0 Voltage Regulator in normal mode. 1: REG0 Voltage Regulator in low power mode. 3 STOPCF Stop Mode Configuration (REG1). This bit configures the REG1 regulator’s behavior when the device enters STOP mode. 0: REG1 Regulator is still active in STOP mode. Any enabled reset source will reset the device. 1: REG1 Regulator is shut down in STOP mode. Only the RST pin or power cycle can reset the device. 2 Reserved Must Write 0b. 1 REG1MD Voltage Regulator (REG1) Mode. This bit selects the Voltage Regulator mode for REG1. When REG1MD is set to 1, the REG1 voltage regulator operates in lower power mode. 0: REG1 Voltage Regulator in normal mode. 1: REG1 Voltage Regulator in low power mode. This bit should not be set to '1' if the REG0 Voltage Regulator is disabled. 0 Reserved Must Write 0b. 75 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 10. Power Management Modes The C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C devices have three software programmable power management modes: Idle, Stop, and Suspend. Idle mode and stop mode are part of the standard 8051 architecture, while sus- pend mode is an enhanced power-saving mode implemented by the high-speed oscillator peripheral. Idle mode halts the CPU while leaving the peripherals and clocks active. In stop mode, the CPU is halted, all interrupts and timers (except the Missing Clock Detector) are inactive, and the internal oscillator is stopped (analog peripherals remain in their selected states; the external oscillator is not affected). Sus- pend mode is similar to stop mode in that the internal oscillator is halted, but the device can wake on activ- ity with the USB transceiver. The CPU is not halted in suspend mode, so it can run on another oscillator, if desired. Since clocks are running in Idle mode, power consumption is dependent upon the system clock frequency and the number of peripherals left in active mode before entering Idle. Stop mode and suspend mode consume the least power because the majority of the device is shut down with no clocks active. SFR Definition 10.1 describes the Power Control Register (PCON) used to control the C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/ 7/C's Stop and Idle power management modes. Suspend mode is controlled by the SUSPEND bit in the OSCICN register (SFR Definition 19.3). Although the C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C has Idle, Stop, and suspend modes available, more control over the device power can be achieved by enabling/disabling individual peripherals as needed. Each analog peripheral can be disabled when not in use and placed in low power mode. Digital peripherals, such as tim- ers or serial buses, draw little power when they are not in use. Turning off oscillators lowers power con- sumption considerably, at the expense of reduced functionality. 10.1. Idle Mode Setting the Idle Mode Select bit (PCON.0) causes the hardware to halt the CPU and enter Idle mode as soon as the instruction that sets the bit completes execution. All internal registers and memory maintain their original data. All analog and digital peripherals can remain active during idle mode. Idle mode is terminated when an enabled interrupt is asserted or a reset occurs. The assertion of an enabled interrupt will cause the Idle Mode Selection bit (PCON.0) to be cleared and the CPU to resume operation. The pending interrupt will be serviced and the next instruction to be executed after the return from interrupt (RETI) will be the instruction immediately following the one that set the Idle Mode Select bit. If Idle mode is terminated by an internal or external reset, the CIP-51 performs a normal reset sequence and begins program execution at address 0x0000. Note: If the instruction following the write of the IDLE bit is a single-byte instruction and an interrupt occurs during the execution phase of the instruction that sets the IDLE bit, the CPU may not wake from Idle mode when a future interrupt occurs. Therefore, instructions that set the IDLE bit should be followed by an instruction that has two or more opcode bytes, for example: // in ‘C’: PCON |= 0x01; // set IDLE bit PCON = PCON; // ... followed by a 3-cycle dummy instruction ; in assembly: ORL PCON, #01h ; set IDLE bit MOV PCON, PCON ; ... followed by a 3-cycle dummy instruction If enabled, the Watchdog Timer (WDT) will eventually cause an internal watchdog reset and thereby termi- nate the Idle mode. This feature protects the system from an unintended permanent shutdown in the event of an inadvertent write to the PCON register. If this behavior is not desired, the WDT may be disabled by software prior to entering the Idle mode if the WDT was initially configured to allow this operation. This pro- vides the opportunity for additional power savings, allowing the system to remain in the Idle mode indefi- Rev. 1.4 76

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C nitely, waiting for an external stimulus to wake up the system. Refer to Section “17.6. PCA Watchdog Timer Reset” on page 133 for more information on the use and configuration of the WDT. 10.2. Stop Mode Setting the stop mode Select bit (PCON.1) causes the controller core to enter stop mode as soon as the instruction that sets the bit completes execution. In stop mode the internal oscillator, CPU, and all digital peripherals are stopped; the state of the external oscillator circuit is not affected. Each analog peripheral (including the external oscillator circuit) may be shut down individually prior to entering stop mode. Stop mode can only be terminated by an internal or external reset. On reset, the device performs the normal reset sequence and begins program execution at address 0x0000. If enabled, the Missing Clock Detector will cause an internal reset and thereby terminate the stop mode. The Missing Clock Detector should be disabled if the CPU is to be put to in STOP mode for longer than the MCD timeout. By default, when in stop mode the internal regulator is still active. However, the regulator can be config- ured to shut down while in stop mode to save power. To shut down the regulator in stop mode, the STOPCF bit in register REG01CN should be set to 1 prior to setting the STOP bit (see SFR Definition 9.1). If the regulator is shut down using the STOPCF bit, only the RST pin or a full power cycle are capable of resetting the device. 10.3. Suspend Mode Setting the SUSPEND bit (OSCICN.5) causes the hardware to halt the high-frequency internal oscillator and go into suspend mode as soon as the instruction that sets the bit completes execution. All internal reg- isters and memory maintain their original data . The CPU is not halted in Suspend, so code can still be exe- cuted using an oscillator other than the internal high-frequency oscillator. Suspend mode can be terminated by resume signalling on the USB data pins, or a device reset event. When suspend mode is terminated, if the oscillator source is the internal high-frequency oscillator, the device will continue execution on the instruction following the one that set the SUSPEND bit. If the wake event was configured to generate an interrupt, the interrupt will be serviced upon waking the device. If sus- pend mode is terminated by an internal or external reset, the CIP-51 performs a normal reset sequence and begins program execution at address 0x0000. 77 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 10.1. PCON: Power Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name GF[5:0] STOP IDLE Type R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x87; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:2 GF[5:0] General Purpose Flags 5–0. These are general purpose flags for use under software control. 1 STOP Stop Mode Select. Setting this bit will place the CIP-51 in stop mode. This bit will always be read as 0. 1: CPU goes into stop mode (internal oscillator stopped). 0 IDLE IDLE: Idle Mode Select. Setting this bit will place the CIP-51 in Idle mode. This bit will always be read as 0. 1: CPU goes into Idle mode. (Shuts off clock to CPU, but clock to Timers, Interrupts, Serial Ports, and Analog Peripherals are still active.) Rev. 1.4 78

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 11. CIP-51 Microcontroller The MCU system controller core is the CIP-51 microcontroller. The CIP-51 is fully compatible with the MCS-51™ instruction set; standard 803x/805x assemblers and compilers can be used to develop soft- ware. The MCU family has a superset of all the peripherals included with a standard 8051. The CIP-51 also includes on-chip debug hardware (see description in Section 28), and interfaces directly with the ana- log and digital subsystems providing a complete data acquisition or control-system solution in a single inte- grated circuit. The CIP-51 Microcontroller core implements the standard 8051 organization and peripherals as well as additional custom peripherals and functions to extend its capability (see Figure 11.1 for a block diagram). The CIP-51 includes the following features:  Fully Compatible with MCS-51 Instruction Set  Reset Input  48 MIPS Peak Throughput with 48 MHz Clock  Power Management Modes  0 to 48 MHz Clock Frequency  On-chip Debug Logic  Extended Interrupt Handler  Program and Data Memory Security Performance The CIP-51 employs a pipelined architecture that greatly increases its instruction throughput over the stan- dard 8051 architecture. In a standard 8051, all instructions except for MUL and DIV take 12 or 24 system clock cycles to execute, and usually have a maximum system clock of 12 MHz. By contrast, the CIP-51 core executes 70% of its instructions in one or two system clock cycles, with no instructions taking more than eight system clock cycles. Figure 11.1. CIP-51 Block Diagram Rev. 1.4 79

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C With the CIP-51's maximum system clock at 48 MHz, it has a peak throughput of 48 MIPS. The CIP-51 has a total of 109 instructions. The table below shows the total number of instructions that require each execu- tion time. Clocks to Execute 1 2 2/4 3 3/5 4 5 4/6 6 8 Number of Instructions 26 50 5 10 6 5 2 2 2 1 Programming and Debugging Support In-system programming of the Flash program memory and communication with on-chip debug support logic is accomplished via the Silicon Labs 2-Wire Development Interface (C2). The on-chip debug support logic facilitates full speed in-circuit debugging, allowing the setting of hardware breakpoints, starting, stopping and single stepping through program execution (including interrupt service routines), examination of the program's call stack, and reading/writing the contents of registers and mem- ory. This method of on-chip debugging is completely non-intrusive, requiring no RAM, Stack, timers, or other on-chip resources. C2 details can be found in Section “28. C2 Interface” on page 316. The CIP-51 is supported by development tools from Silicon Labs and third party vendors. Silicon Labs pro- vides an integrated development environment (IDE) including editor, debugger and programmer. The IDE's debugger and programmer interface to the CIP-51 via the C2 interface to provide fast and efficient in-sys- tem device programming and debugging. Third party macro assemblers and C compilers are also avail- able. 11.1. Instruction Set The instruction set of the CIP-51 System Controller is fully compatible with the standard MCS-51™ instruc- tion set. Standard 8051 development tools can be used to develop software for the CIP-51. All CIP-51 instructions are the binary and functional equivalent of their MCS-51™ counterparts, including opcodes, addressing modes and effect on PSW flags. However, instruction timing is different than that of the stan- dard 8051. 11.1.1. Instruction and CPU Timing In many 8051 implementations, a distinction is made between machine cycles and clock cycles, with machine cycles varying from 2 to 12 clock cycles in length. However, the CIP-51 implementation is based solely on clock cycle timing. All instruction timings are specified in terms of clock cycles. Due to the pipelined architecture of the CIP-51, most instructions execute in the same number of clock cycles as there are program bytes in the instruction. Conditional branch instructions take one less clock cycle to complete when the branch is not taken as opposed to when the branch is taken. Table 11.1 is the CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary, which includes the mnemonic, number of bytes, and number of clock cycles for each instruction. 80 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 11.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary Mnemonic Description Bytes Clock Cycles Arithmetic Operations ADD A, Rn Add register to A 1 1 ADD A, direct Add direct byte to A 2 2 ADD A, @Ri Add indirect RAM to A 1 2 ADD A, #data Add immediate to A 2 2 ADDC A, Rn Add register to A with carry 1 1 ADDC A, direct Add direct byte to A with carry 2 2 ADDC A, @Ri Add indirect RAM to A with carry 1 2 ADDC A, #data Add immediate to A with carry 2 2 SUBB A, Rn Subtract register from A with borrow 1 1 SUBB A, direct Subtract direct byte from A with borrow 2 2 SUBB A, @Ri Subtract indirect RAM from A with borrow 1 2 SUBB A, #data Subtract immediate from A with borrow 2 2 INC A Increment A 1 1 INC Rn Increment register 1 1 INC direct Increment direct byte 2 2 INC @Ri Increment indirect RAM 1 2 DEC A Decrement A 1 1 DEC Rn Decrement register 1 1 DEC direct Decrement direct byte 2 2 DEC @Ri Decrement indirect RAM 1 2 INC DPTR Increment Data Pointer 1 1 MUL AB Multiply A and B 1 4 DIV AB Divide A by B 1 8 DA A Decimal adjust A 1 1 Logical Operations ANL A, Rn AND Register to A 1 1 ANL A, direct AND direct byte to A 2 2 ANL A, @Ri AND indirect RAM to A 1 2 ANL A, #data AND immediate to A 2 2 ANL direct, A AND A to direct byte 2 2 ANL direct, #data AND immediate to direct byte 3 3 ORL A, Rn OR Register to A 1 1 ORL A, direct OR direct byte to A 2 2 ORL A, @Ri OR indirect RAM to A 1 2 ORL A, #data OR immediate to A 2 2 ORL direct, A OR A to direct byte 2 2 ORL direct, #data OR immediate to direct byte 3 3 XRL A, Rn Exclusive-OR Register to A 1 1 XRL A, direct Exclusive-OR direct byte to A 2 2 XRL A, @Ri Exclusive-OR indirect RAM to A 1 2 XRL A, #data Exclusive-OR immediate to A 2 2 XRL direct, A Exclusive-OR A to direct byte 2 2 Rev. 1.4 81

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 11.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary (Continued) Mnemonic Description Bytes Clock Cycles XRL direct, #data Exclusive-OR immediate to direct byte 3 3 CLR A Clear A 1 1 CPL A Complement A 1 1 RL A Rotate A left 1 1 RLC A Rotate A left through Carry 1 1 RR A Rotate A right 1 1 RRC A Rotate A right through Carry 1 1 SWAP A Swap nibbles of A 1 1 Data Transfer MOV A, Rn Move Register to A 1 1 MOV A, direct Move direct byte to A 2 2 MOV A, @Ri Move indirect RAM to A 1 2 MOV A, #data Move immediate to A 2 2 MOV Rn, A Move A to Register 1 1 MOV Rn, direct Move direct byte to Register 2 2 MOV Rn, #data Move immediate to Register 2 2 MOV direct, A Move A to direct byte 2 2 MOV direct, Rn Move Register to direct byte 2 2 MOV direct, direct Move direct byte to direct byte 3 3 MOV direct, @Ri Move indirect RAM to direct byte 2 2 MOV direct, #data Move immediate to direct byte 3 3 MOV @Ri, A Move A to indirect RAM 1 2 MOV @Ri, direct Move direct byte to indirect RAM 2 2 MOV @Ri, #data Move immediate to indirect RAM 2 2 MOV DPTR, #data16 Load DPTR with 16-bit constant 3 3 MOVC A, @A+DPTR Move code byte relative DPTR to A 1 3 MOVC A, @A+PC Move code byte relative PC to A 1 3 MOVX A, @Ri Move external data (8-bit address) to A 1 3 MOVX @Ri, A Move A to external data (8-bit address) 1 3 MOVX A, @DPTR Move external data (16-bit address) to A 1 3 MOVX @DPTR, A Move A to external data (16-bit address) 1 3 PUSH direct Push direct byte onto stack 2 2 POP direct Pop direct byte from stack 2 2 XCH A, Rn Exchange Register with A 1 1 XCH A, direct Exchange direct byte with A 2 2 XCH A, @Ri Exchange indirect RAM with A 1 2 XCHD A, @Ri Exchange low nibble of indirect RAM with A 1 2 Boolean Manipulation CLR C Clear Carry 1 1 CLR bit Clear direct bit 2 2 SETB C Set Carry 1 1 SETB bit Set direct bit 2 2 CPL C Complement Carry 1 1 CPL bit Complement direct bit 2 2 82 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 11.1. CIP-51 Instruction Set Summary (Continued) Mnemonic Description Bytes Clock Cycles ANL C, bit AND direct bit to Carry 2 2 ANL C, /bit AND complement of direct bit to Carry 2 2 ORL C, bit OR direct bit to carry 2 2 ORL C, /bit OR complement of direct bit to Carry 2 2 MOV C, bit Move direct bit to Carry 2 2 MOV bit, C Move Carry to direct bit 2 2 Program Flow Timings are listed with the PFE on and FLRT = 0. Extra cycles are required for branches if FLRT = 1. JC rel Jump if Carry is set 2 2/4 JNC rel Jump if Carry is not set 2 2/4 JB bit, rel Jump if direct bit is set 3 3/5 JNB bit, rel Jump if direct bit is not set 3 3/5 JBC bit, rel Jump if direct bit is set and clear bit 3 3/5 ACALL addr11 Absolute subroutine call 2 4 LCALL addr16 Long subroutine call 3 5 RET Return from subroutine 1 6 RETI Return from interrupt 1 6 AJMP addr11 Absolute jump 2 4 LJMP addr16 Long jump 3 5 SJMP rel Short jump (relative address) 2 4 JMP @A+DPTR Jump indirect relative to DPTR 1 4 JZ rel Jump if A equals zero 2 2/4 JNZ rel Jump if A does not equal zero 2 2/4 CJNE A, direct, rel Compare direct byte to A and jump if not equal 3 4/6 CJNE A, #data, rel Compare immediate to A and jump if not equal 3 3/5 CJNE Rn, #data, rel Compare immediate to Register and jump if not 3 3/5 equal CJNE @Ri, #data, rel Compare immediate to indirect and jump if not 3 4/6 equal DJNZ Rn, rel Decrement Register and jump if not zero 2 2/4 DJNZ direct, rel Decrement direct byte and jump if not zero 3 3/5 NOP No operation 1 1 Rev. 1.4 83

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Notes on Registers, Operands and Addressing Modes: Rn - Register R0–R7 of the currently selected register bank. @Ri - Data RAM location addressed indirectly through R0 or R1. rel - 8-bit, signed (two’s complement) offset relative to the first byte of the following instruction. Used by SJMP and all conditional jumps. direct - 8-bit internal data location’s address. This could be a direct-access Data RAM location (0x00– 0x7F) or an SFR (0x80–0xFF). #data - 8-bit constant #data16 - 16-bit constant bit - Direct-accessed bit in Data RAM or SFR addr11 - 11-bit destination address used by ACALL and AJMP. The destination must be within the same 2 kB page of program memory as the first by te of the following instruction. addr16 - 16-bit destination address used by LCALL and LJMP. The destination may be anywhere within the 8 kB program memory space. There is one unused opcode (0xA5) that performs the same function as NOP. All mnemonics copyrighted © Intel Corporation 1980. 84 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 11.2. CIP-51 Register Descriptions Following are descriptions of SFRs related to the operation of the CIP-51 System Controller. Reserved bits should always be written to the value indicated in the SFR description. Future product versions may use these bits to implement new features in which case the reset value of the bit will be the indicated value, selecting the feature's default state. Detailed descriptions of the remaining SFRs are included in the sec- tions of the datasheet associated with their corresponding system function. SFR Definition 11.1. DPL: Data Pointer Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name DPL[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x82; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 DPL[7:0] Data Pointer Low. The DPL register is the low byte of the 16-bit DPTR. SFR Definition 11.2. DPH: Data Pointer High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name DPH[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x83; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 DPH[7:0] Data Pointer High. The DPH register is the high byte of the 16-bit DPTR. Rev. 1.4 85

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 11.3. SP: Stack Pointer Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SP[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 SFR Address = 0x81; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 SP[7:0] Stack Pointer. The Stack Pointer holds the location of the top of the stack. The stack pointer is incre- mented before every PUSH operation. The SP register defaults to 0x07 after reset. SFR Definition 11.4. ACC: Accumulator Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ACC[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xE0; SFR Page = All Pages; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Function 7:0 ACC[7:0] Accumulator. This register is the accumulator for arithmetic operations. SFR Definition 11.5. B: B Register Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name B[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xF0; SFR Page = All Pages; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Function 7:0 B[7:0] B Register. This register serves as a second accumulator for certain arithmetic operations. 86 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 11.6. PSW: Program Status Word Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CY AC F0 RS[1:0] OV F1 PARITY Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xD0; SFR Page = All Pages; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Function 7 CY Carry Flag. This bit is set when the last arithmetic operation resulted in a carry (addition) or a bor- row (subtraction). It is cleared to logic 0 by all other arithmetic operations. 6 AC Auxiliary Carry Flag. This bit is set when the last arithmetic operation resulted in a carry into (addition) or a borrow from (subtraction) the high order nibble. It is cleared to logic 0 by all other arith- metic operations. 5 F0 User Flag 0. This is a bit-addressable, general purpose flag for use under software control. 4:3 RS[1:0] Register Bank Select. These bits select which register bank is used during register accesses. 00: Bank 0, Addresses 0x00-0x07 01: Bank 1, Addresses 0x08-0x0F 10: Bank 2, Addresses 0x10-0x17 11: Bank 3, Addresses 0x18-0x1F 2 OV Overflow Flag. This bit is set to 1 under the following circumstances: An ADD, ADDC, or SUBB instruction causes a sign-change overflow. A MUL instruction results in an overflow (result is greater than 255). A DIV instruction causes a divide-by-zero condition. The OV bit is cleared to 0 by the ADD, ADDC, SUBB, MUL, and DIV instructions in all other cases. 1 F1 User Flag 1. This is a bit-addressable, general purpose flag for use under software control. 0 PARITY Parity Flag. This bit is set to logic 1 if the sum of the eight bits in the accumulator is odd and cleared if the sum is even. Rev. 1.4 87

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 12. Prefetch Engine The C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C family of devices incorporate a 2-byte prefetch engine. Because the access time of the Flash memory is 40 ns, and the minimum instruction time is roughly 20 ns, the prefetch engine is necessary for full-speed code execution. Instructions are read from Flash memory two bytes at a time by the prefetch engine and given to the CIP-51 processor core to execute. When running linear code (code without any jumps or branches), the prefetch engine allows instructions to be executed at full speed. When a code branch occurs, the processor may be stalled for up to two clock cycles while the next set of code bytes is retrieved from Flash memory. It is recommended that the prefetch be used for optimal code execution timing. Note: The prefetch engine can be disabled when the device is in suspend mode to save power. SFR Definition 12.1. PFE0CN: Prefetch Engine Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PFEN FLBWE Type R R R/W R R R R R/W Reset 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xAF; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:6 Unused Read = 00b, Write = don’t care. 5 PFEN Prefetch Enable. This bit enables the prefetch engine. 0: Prefetch engine is disabled. 1: Prefetch engine is enabled. 4:1 Unused Read = 0000b. Write = don’t care. 0 FLBWE Flash Block Write Enable. This bit allows block writes to Flash memory from software. 0: Each byte of a software Flash write is written individually. 1: Flash bytes are written in groups of two. Rev. 1.4 88

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 13. Memory Organization The memory organization of the CIP-51 System Controller is similar to that of a standard 8051. There are two separate memory spaces: program memory and data memory. Program and data memory share the same address space but are accessed via different instruction types. The CIP-51 memory organization is shown in Figure 13.1 and Figure 13.2. Figure 13.1. On-Chip Memory Map for 64 kB Devices (C8051F380/1/4/5) Rev. 1.4 89

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 13.2. On-Chip Memory Map for 32 kB Devices (C8051F382/3/6/7) 90 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 13.3. On-Chip Memory Map for 16 kB Devices (C8051F38C) 13.1. Program Memory The CIP-51 core has a 64k-byte program memory space. The C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C implements 64 kB, 32 kB, or 16 kB of this program memory space as in-system, re-programmable Flash memory. Note that on the C8051F380/1/4/5 (64 kB version), addresses above 0xFBFF are reserved. Program memory is normally assumed to be read-only. However, the CIP-51 can write to program memory by setting the Program Store Write Enable bit (PSCTL.0) and using the MOVX instruction. This feature pro- vides a mechanism for the CIP-51 to update program code and use the program memory space for non- volatile data storage. Refer to Section “18. Flash Memory” on page 135 for further details. 13.2. Data Memory The CIP-51 includes 256 of internal RAM mapped into the data memory space from 0x00 through 0xFF. The lower 128 bytes of data memory are used for general purpose registers and scratch pad memory. Either direct or indirect addressing may be used to access the lower 128 bytes of data memory. Locations 0x00 through 0x1F are addressable as four banks of general purpose registers, each bank consisting of eight byte-wide registers. The next 16 bytes, locations 0x20 through 0x2F, may either be addressed as bytes or as 128 bit locations accessible with the direct addressing mode. Rev. 1.4 91

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C The upper 128 bytes of data memory are accessible only by indirect addressing. This region occupies the same address space as the Special Function Registers (SFR) but is physically separate from the SFR space. The addressing mode used by an instruction when accessing locations above 0x7F determines whether the CPU accesses the upper 128 bytes of data memory space or the SFRs. Instructions that use direct addressing will access the SFR space. Instructions using indirect addressing above 0x7F access the upper 128 bytes of data memory. Figure 13.1 illustrates the data memory organization of the CIP-51. 13.3. General Purpose Registers The lower 32 bytes of data memory, locations 0x00 through 0x1F, may be addressed as four banks of gen- eral-purpose registers. Each bank consists of eight byte-wide registers designated R0 through R7. Only one of these banks may be enabled at a time. Two bits in the program status word, RS0 (PSW.3) and RS1 (PSW.4), select the active register bank (see description of the PSW in SFR Definition 11.6). This allows fast context switching when entering subroutines and interrupt service routines. Indirect addressing modes use registers R0 and R1 as index registers. 13.4. Bit Addressable Locations In addition to direct access to data memory organized as bytes, the sixteen data memory locations at 0x20 through 0x2F are also accessible as 128 individually addressable bits. Each bit has a bit address from 0x00 to 0x7F. Bit 0 of the byte at 0x20 has bit address 0x00 while bit7 of the byte at 0x20 has bit address 0x07. Bit 7 of the byte at 0x2F has bit address 0x7F. A bit access is distinguished from a full byte access by the type of instruction used (bit source or destination operands as opposed to a byte source or destina- tion). The MCS-51™ assembly language allows an alternate notation for bit addressing of the form XX.B where XX is the byte address and B is the bit position within the byte. For example, the instruction: MOV C, 22h.3 moves the Boolean value at 0x13 (bit 3 of the byte at location 0x22) into the Carry flag. 13.5. Stack A programmer's stack can be located anywhere in the 256-byte data memory. The stack area is desig- nated using the Stack Pointer (SP, 0x81) SFR. The SP will point to the last location used. The next value pushed on the stack is placed at SP+1 and then SP is incremented. A reset initializes the stack pointer to location 0x07. Therefore, the first value pushed on the stack is placed at location 0x08, which is also the first register (R0) of register bank 1. Thus, if more than one register bank is to be used, the SP should be initialized to a location in the data memory not being used for data storage. The stack depth can extend up to 256 bytes. 92 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 14. External Data Memory Interface and On-Chip XRAM 4 kB (C8051F380/1/4/5) or 2 kB (C8051F382/3/6/7/C) of RAM are included on-chip, and mapped into the external data memory space (XRAM). The 1 kB of USB FIFO space can also be mapped into XRAM address space for additional general-purpose data storage. Additionally, an External Memory Interface (EMIF) is available on the C8051F380/2/4/6 devices, which can be used to access off-chip data memories and memory-mapped devices connected to the GPIO ports. The external memory space may be accessed using the external move instruction (MOVX) and the data pointer (DPTR), or using the MOVX indirect addressing mode using R0 or R1. If the MOVX instruction is used with an 8-bit address operand (such as @R1), then the high byte of the 16-bit address is provided by the External Memory Interface Control Reg- ister (EMI0CN, shown in SFR Definition 14.1). Note: the MOVX instruction can also be used for writing to the FLASH memory. See Section “18. Flash Memory” on page 135 for details. The MOVX instruction accesses XRAM by default. 14.1. Accessing XRAM The XRAM memory space is accessed using the MOVX instruction. The MOVX instruction has two forms, both of which use an indirect addressing method. The first method uses the Data Pointer, DPTR, a 16-bit register which contains the effective address of the XRAM location to be read from or written to. The sec- ond method uses R0 or R1 in combination with the EMI0CN register to generate the effective XRAM address. Examples of both of these methods are given below. 14.1.1. 16-Bit MOVX Example The 16-bit form of the MOVX instruction accesses the memory location pointed to by the contents of the DPTR register. The following series of instructions reads the value of the byte at address 0x1234 into the accumulator A: MOV DPTR, #1234h ; load DPTR with 16-bit address to read (0x1234) MOVX A, @DPTR ; load contents of 0x1234 into accumulator A The above example uses the 16-bit immediate MOV instruction to set the contents of DPTR. Alternately, the DPTR can be accessed through the SFR registers DPH, which contains the upper 8-bits of DPTR, and DPL, which contains the lower 8-bits of DPTR. 14.1.2. 8-Bit MOVX Example The 8-bit form of the MOVX instruction uses the contents of the EMI0CN SFR to determine the upper 8-bits of the effective address to be accessed and the contents of R0 or R1 to determine the lower 8-bits of the effective address to be accessed. The following series of instructions read the contents of the byte at address 0x1234 into the accumulator A. MOV EMI0CN, #12h ; load high byte of address into EMI0CN MOV R0, #34h ; load low byte of address into R0 (or R1) MOVX a, @R0 ; load contents of 0x1234 into accumulator A Rev. 1.4 93

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 14.2. Accessing USB FIFO Space The C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C include 1k of RAM which functions as USB FIFO space. Figure 14.1 shows an expanded view of the FIFO space and user XRAM. FIFO space is normally accessed via USB FIFO registers; see Section “21.5. FIFO Management” on page 181 for more information on accessing these FIFOs. The MOVX instruction should not be used to load or modify USB data in the FIFO space. Unused areas of the USB FIFO space may be used as general purpose XRAM if necessary. The FIFO block operates on the USB clock domain; thus the USB clock must be active when accessing FIFO space. Note that the number of SYSCLK cycles required by the MOVX instruction is increased when accessing USB FIFO space. To access the FIFO RAM directly using MOVX instructions, the following conditions must be met: (1) the USBFAE bit in register EMI0CF must be set to 1, and (2) the USB clock must be greater than or equal to twice the SYSCLK (USBCLK > 2 x SYSCLK). When this bit is set, the USB FIFO space is mapped into XRAM space at addresses 0x0400 to 0x07FF. The normal XRAM (on-chip or external) at the same addresses cannot be accessed when the USBFAE bit is set to 1. Important Note: The USB clock must be active when accessing FIFO space. Figure 14.1. USB FIFO Space and XRAM Memory Map with USBFAE set to ‘1’ 94 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 14.3. Configuring the External Memory Interface Configuring the External Memory Interface consists of five steps: 1. Configure the Output Modes of the associated port pins as either push-pull or open-drain (push-pull is most common), and skip the associated pins in the crossbar. 2. Configure Port latches to “park” the EMIF pins in a dormant state (usually by setting them to logic 1). 3. Select Multiplexed mode or Non-multiplexed mode. 4. Select the memory mode (on-chip only, split mode without bank select, split mode with bank select, or off-chip only). 5. Set up timing to interface with off-chip memory or peripherals. Each of these five steps is explained in detail in the following sections. The Port selection, Multiplexed mode selection, and Mode bits are located in the EMI0CF register shown in SFR Definition 14.5. 14.4. Port Configuration The External Memory Interface appears on Ports 4, 3, 2, and 1 when it is used for off-chip memory access. When the EMIF is used, the Crossbar should be configured to skip over the control lines P1.7 (WR), P1.6 (RD), and if multiplexed mode is selected P1.3 (ALE) using the P1SKIP register. For more information about configuring the Crossbar, see Section “Figure 20.1. Port I/O Functional Block Diagram (Port 0 through Port 3)” on page 153. The External Memory Interface claims the associated Port pins for memory operations ONLY during the execution of an off-chip MOVX instruction. Once the MOVX instruction has completed, control of the Port pins reverts to the Port latches or to the Crossbar settings for those pins. See Section “20. Port Input/Out- put” on page 153 for more information about the Crossbar and Port operation and configuration. The Port latches should be explicitly configured to ‘park’ the External Memory Interface pins in a dormant state, most commonly by setting them to a logic 1. During the execution of the MOVX instruction, the External Memory Interface will explicitly disable the driv- ers on all Port pins that are acting as Inputs (Data[7:0] during a READ operation, for example). The Output mode of the Port pins (whether the pin is configured as Open-Drain or Push-Pull) is unaffected by the External Memory Interface operation, and remains controlled by the PnMDOUT registers. In most cases, the output modes of all EMIF pins should be configured for push-pull mode. Rev. 1.4 95

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 14.1. EMI0CN: External Memory Interface Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PGSEL[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xAA; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 PGSEL[7:0] XRAM Page Select Bits. The XRAM Page Select Bits provide the high byte of the 16-bit external data mem- ory address when using an 8-bit MOVX command, effectively selecting a 256-byte page of RAM. 0x00: 0x0000 to 0x00FF 0x01: 0x0100 to 0x01FF ... 0xFE: 0xFE00 to 0xFEFF 0xFF: 0xFF00 to 0xFFFF 96 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 14.2. EMI0CF: External Memory Interface Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name USBFAE EMD2 EMD[1:0] EALE[1:0] Type R R/W R R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 SFR Address = 0x85; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 Unused Read = 0b; Write = don’t care. 6 USBFAE USB FIFO Access Enable. 0: USB FIFO RAM not available through MOVX instructions. 1: USB FIFO RAM available using MOVX instructions. The 1k of USB RAM will be mapped in XRAM space at addresses 0x0400 to 0x07FF. The USB clock must be active and greater than or equal to twice the SYSCLK (USBCLK > 2 x SYSCLK) to access this area with MOVX instructions. 5 Unused Read = 0b; Write = don’t care. 4 EMD2 EMIF Multiplex Mode Select. 0: EMIF operates in multiplexed address/data mode. 1: EMIF operates in non-multiplexed mode (separate address and data pins). 3:2 EMD[1:0] EMIF Operating Mode Select. These bits control the operating mode of the External Memory Interface. 00: Internal Only: MOVX accesses on-chip XRAM only. All effective addresses alias to on-chip memory space. 01: Split Mode without Bank Select: Accesses below the on-chip XRAM boundary are directed on-chip. Accesses above the on-chip XRAM boundary are directed off-chip. 8-bit off-chip MOVX operations use the current contents of the Address High port latches to resolve upper address byte. Note that in order to access off-chip space, EMI0CN must be set to a page that is not contained in the on-chip address space. 10: Split Mode with Bank Select: Accesses below the on-chip XRAM boundary are directed on-chip. Accesses above the on-chip XRAM boundary are directed off-chip. 8-bit off-chip MOVX operations use the contents of EMI0CN to determine the high-byte of the address. 11: External Only: MOVX accesses off-chip XRAM only. On-chip XRAM is not visi- ble to the CPU. 1:0 EALE[1:0] ALE Pulse-Width Select Bits (only has effect when EMD2 = 0). 00: ALE high and ALE low pulse width = 1 SYSCLK cycle. 01: ALE high and ALE low pulse width = 2 SYSCLK cycles. 10: ALE high and ALE low pulse width = 3 SYSCLK cycles. 11: ALE high and ALE low pulse width = 4 SYSCLK cycles. Rev. 1.4 97

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 14.5. Multiplexed and Non-multiplexed Selection The External Memory Interface is capable of acting in a Multiplexed mode or a Non-multiplexed mode, depending on the state of the EMD2 (EMI0CF.4) bit. 14.5.1. Multiplexed Configuration In Multiplexed mode, the Data Bus and the lower 8-bits of the Address Bus share the same Port pins: AD[7:0]. In this mode, an external latch (74HC373 or equivalent logic gate) is used to hold the lower 8-bits of the RAM address. The external latch is controlled by the ALE (Address Latch Enable) signal, which is driven by the External Memory Interface logic. An example of a Multiplexed Configuration is shown in Figure 14.2. In Multiplexed mode, the external MOVX operation can be broken into two phases delineated by the state of the ALE signal. During the first phase, ALE is high and the lower 8-bits of the Address Bus are pre- sented to AD[7:0]. During this phase, the address latch is configured such that the ‘Q’ outputs reflect the states of the ‘D’ inputs. When ALE falls, signaling the beginning of the second phase, the address latch outputs remain fixed and are no longer dependent on the latch inputs. Later in the second phase, the Data Bus controls the state of the AD[7:0] port at the time RD or WR is asserted. See Section “14.7.2. Multiplexed Mode” on page 107 for more information. Figure 14.2. Multiplexed Configuration Example 14.5.2. Non-multiplexed Configuration In Non-multiplexed mode, the Data Bus and the Address Bus pins are not shared. An example of a Non-multiplexed Configuration is shown in Figure 14.3. See Section “14.7.1. Non-multiplexed Mode” on page 104 for more information about Non-multiplexed operation. 98 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 14.3. Non-multiplexed Configuration Example Rev. 1.4 99

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 14.6. Memory Mode Selection The external data memory space can be configured in one of four modes, shown in Figure 14.4, based on the EMIF Mode bits in the EMI0CF register (SFR Definition 14.5). These modes are summarized below. More information about the different modes can be found in Section “14.7. Timing” on page 102. Figure 14.4. EMIF Operating Modes 14.6.1. Internal XRAM Only When EMI0CF.[3:2] are set to 00, all MOVX instructions will target the internal XRAM space on the device. Memory accesses to addresses beyond the populated space will wrap on 2k or 4k boundaries (depending on the RAM available on the device). As an example, the addresses 0x1000 and 0x2000 both evaluate to address 0x0000 in on-chip XRAM space.  8-bit MOVX operations use the contents of EMI0CN to determine the high-byte of the effective address and R0 or R1 to determine the low-byte of the effective address.  16-bit MOVX operations use the contents of the 16-bit DPTR to determine the effective address. 14.6.2. Split Mode without Bank Select When EMI0CF.[3:2] are set to 01, the XRAM memory map is split into two areas, on-chip space and off-chip space.  Effective addresses below the internal XRAM size boundary will access on-chip XRAM space.  Effective addresses above the internal XRAM size boundary will access off-chip space.  8-bit MOVX operations use the contents of EMI0CN to determine whether the memory access is on-chip or off-chip. However, in the “No Bank Select” mode, an 8-bit MOVX operation will not drive the upper 8-bits A[15:8] of the Address Bus during an off-chip access. This allows the user to manipulate the upper address bits at will by setting the Port state directly via the port latches. This behavior is in contrast with “Split Mode with Bank Select” described below. The lower 8-bits of the Address Bus A[7:0] are driven, determined by R0 or R1.  16-bit MOVX operations use the contents of DPTR to determine whether the memory access is on-chip or off-chip, and unlike 8-bit MOVX operations, the full 16-bits of the Address Bus A[15:0] are driven during the off-chip transaction. 100 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 14.6.3. Split Mode with Bank Select When EMI0CF.[3:2] are set to 10, the XRAM memory map is split into two areas, on-chip space and off-chip space.  Effective addresses below the internal XRAM size boundary will access on-chip XRAM space.  Effective addresses above the internal XRAM size boundary will access off-chip space.  8-bit MOVX operations use the contents of EMI0CN to determine whether the memory access is on-chip or off-chip. The upper 8-bits of the Address Bus A[15:8] are determined by EMI0CN, and the lower 8-bits of the Address Bus A[7:0] are determined by R0 or R1. All 16-bits of the Address Bus A[15:0] are driven in “Bank Select” mode.  16-bit MOVX operations use the contents of DPTR to determine whether the memory access is on-chip or off-chip, and the full 16-bits of the Address Bus A[15:0] are driven during the off-chip transaction. 14.6.4. External Only When EMI0CF[3:2] are set to 11, all MOVX operations are directed to off-chip space. On-chip XRAM is not visible to the CPU. This mode is useful for accessing off-chip memory located between 0x0000 and the internal XRAM size boundary.  8-bit MOVX operations ignore the contents of EMI0CN. The upper Address bits A[15:8] are not driven (identical behavior to an off-chip access in “Split Mode without Bank Select” described above). This allows the user to manipulate the upper address bits at will by setting the Port state directly. The lower 8-bits of the effective address A[7:0] are determined by the contents of R0 or R1.  16-bit MOVX operations use the contents of DPTR to determine the effective address A[15:0]. The full 16-bits of the Address Bus A[15:0] are driven during the off-chip transaction. Rev. 1.4 101

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 14.7. Timing The timing parameters of the External Memory Interface can be configured to enable connection to devices having different setup and hold time requirements. The Address Setup time, Address Hold time, RD and WR strobe widths, and in multiplexed mode, the width of the ALE pulse are all programmable in units of SYSCLK periods through EMI0TC, shown in SFR Definition 14.3, and EMI0CF[1:0]. The timing for an off-chip MOVX instruction can be calculated by adding 4 SYSCLK cycles to the timing parameters defined by the EMI0TC register. Assuming non-multiplexed operation, the minimum execution time for an off-chip XRAM operation is 5 SYSCLK cycles (1 SYSCLK for RD or WR pulse + 4 SYSCLKs). For multiplexed operations, the Address Latch Enable signal will require a minimum of 2 additional SYSCLK cycles. Therefore, the minimum execution time for an off-chip XRAM operation in multiplexed mode is 7 SYSCLK cycles (2 for ALE + 1 for RD or WR + 4). The programmable setup and hold times default to the maximum delay settings after a reset. Table 14.1 lists the AC parameters for the External Memory Interface, and Figure 14.5 through Figure 14.10 show the timing diagrams for the different Exter- nal Memory Interface modes and MOVX operations. 102 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 14.3. EMI0TC: External Memory TIming Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name EAS[1:0] EWR[3:0] EAH[1:0] Type R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address = 0x84; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:6 EAS[1:0] EMIF Address Setup Time Bits. 00: Address setup time = 0 SYSCLK cycles. 01: Address setup time = 1 SYSCLK cycle. 10: Address setup time = 2 SYSCLK cycles. 11: Address setup time = 3 SYSCLK cycles. 5:2 EWR[3:0] EMIF WR and RD Pulse-Width Control Bits. 0000: WR and RD pulse width = 1 SYSCLK cycle. 0001: WR and RD pulse width = 2 SYSCLK cycles. 0010: WR and RD puls e width = 3 SYSCLK cycles. 0011: WR and RD pulse width = 4 SYSCLK cycles. 0100: WR and RD pulse width = 5 SYSCLK cycles. 0101: WR and RD pulse width = 6 SYSCLK cycles. 0110: WR and RD pulse width = 7 SYSCLK cycles. 0111: WR and RD pulse width = 8 SYSCLK cycles. 1000: WR and RD pulse width = 9 SYSCLK cycles. 1001: WR and RD pulse width = 10 SYSCLK cycles. 1010: WR and RD pulse width = 11 SYSCLK cycles. 1011: WR and RD pulse width = 12 SYSCLK cycles. 1100: WR and RD pulse width = 13 SYSCLK cycles. 1101: WR and RD pulse width = 14 SYSCLK cycles. 1110: WR and RD pulse width = 15 SYSCLK cycles. 1111: WR and RD pulse width = 16 SYSCLK cycles. 1:0 EAH[1:0] EMIF Address Hold Time Bits. 00: Address hold time = 0 SYSCLK cycles. 01: Address hold time = 1 SYSCLK cycle. 10: Address hold time = 2 SYSCLK cycles. 11: Address hold time = 3 SYSCLK cycles. Rev. 1.4 103

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 14.7.1. Non-multiplexed Mode 14.7.1.1. 16-bit MOVX: EMI0CF[4:2] = 101, 110, or 111 Figure 14.5. Non-Multiplexed 16-bit MOVX Timing 104 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 14.7.1.2. 8-bit MOVX without Bank Select: EMI0CF[4:2] = 101 or 111 Figure 14.6. Non-multiplexed 8-bit MOVX without Bank Select Timing Rev. 1.4 105

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 14.7.1.3. 8-bit MOVX with Bank Select: EMI0CF[4:2] = 110 Figure 14.7. Non-multiplexed 8-bit MOVX with Bank Select Timing 106 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 14.7.2. Multiplexed Mode 14.7.2.1. 16-bit MOVX: EMI0CF[4:2] = 001, 010, or 011 Figure 14.8. Multiplexed 16-bit MOVX Timing Rev. 1.4 107

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 14.7.2.2. 8-bit MOVX without Bank Select: EMI0CF[4:2] = 001 or 011 Figure 14.9. Multiplexed 8-bit MOVX without Bank Select Timing 108 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 14.7.2.3. 8-bit MOVX with Bank Select: EMI0CF[4:2] = 010 Figure 14.10. Multiplexed 8-bit MOVX with Bank Select Timing Rev. 1.4 109

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 14.1. AC Parameters for External Memory Interface Parameter Description Min* Max* Units T Address/Control Setup Time 0 3 x T ns ACS SYSCLK T Address/Control Pulse Width 1 x T 16 x T ns ACW SYSCLK SYSCLK T Address/Control Hold Time 0 3 x T ns ACH SYSCLK T Address Latch Enable High Time 1 x T 4 x T ns ALEH SYSCLK SYSCLK T Address Latch Enable Low Time 1 x T 4 x T ns ALEL SYSCLK SYSCLK T Write Data Setup Time 1 x T 19 x T ns WDS SYSCLK SYSCLK T Write Data Hold Time 0 3 x T ns WDH SYSCLK T Read Data Setup Time 20 ns RDS T Read Data Hold Time 0 ns RDH Note: T is equal to one period of the device system clock (SYSCLK). SYSCLK 110 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 15. Special Function Registers The direct-access data memory locations from 0x80 to 0xFF constitute the special function registers (SFRs). The SFRs provide control and data exchange with the C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C's resources and peripherals. The CIP-51 controller core duplicates the SFRs found in a typical 8051 implementation as well as implementing additional SFRs used to configure and access the sub-systems unique to the C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C. This allows the addition of new functionality while retaining compatibility with the MCS-51™ instruction set. Table 15.1 lists the SFRs implemented in the C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C device family. The SFR registers are accessed anytime the direct addressing mode is used to access memory locations from 0x80 to 0xFF. SFRs with addresses ending in 0x0 or 0x8 (e.g. P0, TCON, SCON0, IE, etc.) are bit- addressable as well as byte-addressable. All other SFRs are byte-addressable only. Unoccupied addresses in the SFR space are reserved for future use. Accessing these areas will have an indeterminate effect and should be avoided. Refer to the corresponding pages of the data sheet, as indicated in Table 15.2, for a detailed description of each register. 15.1. SFR Paging The CIP-51 features SFR paging, allowing the device to map many SFRs into the 0x80 to 0xFF memory address space. The SFR memory space has 256 pages. In this way, each memory location from 0x80 to 0xFF can access up to 256 SFRs. The C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C devices utilize two SFR pages: 0x0, and 0xF. Most SFRs are available on both pages. SFR pages are selected using the Special Function Reg- ister Page Selection register, SFRPAGE. The procedure for reading and writing an SFR is as follows: 1. Select the appropriate SFR page number u sing the SFRPAGE register. 2. Use direct accessing mode to read or write the special function register (MOV instruction). Important Note: When reading or writing SFRs that are not available on all pages within an ISR, it is rec- ommended to save the state of the SFRPAGE register on ISR entry, and restore state on exit. SFR Definition 15.1. SFRPAGE: SFR Page Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SFRPAGE[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xBF; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 SFRPAGE[7:0] SFR Page Bits. Represents the SFR Page the C8051 core uses when reading or modifying SFRs. Write: Sets the SFR Page. Read: Byte is the SFR page the C8051 core is using. Rev. 1.4 111

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 15.1. Special Function Register (SFR) Memory Map s s e dre ag 0(8) 1(9) 2(A) 3(B) 4(C) 5(D) 6(E) 7(F) d P A F8 SPI0CN PCA0L PCA0H PCA0CPL0 PCA0CPH0 PCA0CPL4 PCA0CPH4 VDM0CN F0 B P0MDIN P1MDIN P2MDIN P3MDIN P4MDIN EIP1 EIP2 E8 ADC0CN PCA0CPL1PCA0CPH1 PCA0CPL2 PCA0CPH2 PCA0CPL3 PCA0CPH3 RSTSRC 0 IT01CF E0 ACC XBR0 XBR1 XBR2 SMOD1 EIE1 EIE2 F CKCON1 D8 PCA0CN PCA0MD PCA0CPM0PCA0CPM1 PCA0CPM2PCA0CPM3PCA0CPM4 P3SKIP D0 PSW REF0CN SCON1 SBUF1 P0SKIP P1SKIP P2SKIP USB0XCN 0 TMR2CN TMR2RLL TMR2RLH TMR2L TMR2H SMB0ADM SMB0ADR C8 REG01CN F TMR5CN TMR5RLL TMR5RLH TMR5L TMR5H SMB1ADM SMB1ADR 0 SMB0CN SMB0CF SMB0DAT C0 ADC0GTL ADC0GTH ADC0LTL ADC0LTH P4 F SMB1CN SMB1CF SMB1DAT 0 CLKMUL ADC0CF B8 IP AMX0N AMX0P ADC0L ADC0H SFRPAGE F SMBTC B0 P3 OSCXCN OSCICN OSCICL SBRLL1 SBRLH1 FLSCL FLKEY A8 IE CLKSEL EMI0CN SBCON1 P4MDOUT PFE0CN A0 P2 SPI0CFG SPI0CKR S PI0DAT P0MDOUT P1MDOUT P2MDOUT P3MDOUT 98 SCON0 SBUF0 CPT1CN CPT0CN CPT1MD CPT0MD CPT1MX CPT0MX 0 TMR3CN TMR3RLL TMR3RLH TMR3L TMR3H 90 P1 USB0ADR USB0DAT F TMR4CN TMR4RLL TMR4RLH TMR4L TMR4H 88 TCON TMOD TL0 TL1 TH0 TH1 CKCON PSCTL 80 P0 SP DPL DPH EMI0TC EMI0CF OSCLCN PCON 0(8) 1(9) 2(A) 3(B) 4(C) 5(D) 6(E) 7(F) Notes: 1. SFR Addresses ending in 0x0 or 0x8 are bit-addressable locations and can be used with bitwise instructions. 2. Unless indicated otherwise, SFRs are available on both page 0 and page F. 112 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 15.2. Special Function Registers SFRs are listed in alphabetical order. All undefined SFR locations are reserved Register Address Page Description Page ACC 0xE0 All Pages Accumulator 86 ADC0CF 0xBC All Pages ADC0 Configuration 53 ADC0CN 0xE8 All Pages ADC0 Control 55 ADC0GTH 0xC4 All Pages ADC0 Greater-Than Compare High 56 ADC0GTL 0xC3 All Pages ADC0 Greater-Than Compare Low 56 ADC0H 0xBE All Pages ADC0 High 54 ADC0L 0xBD All Pages ADC0 Low 54 ADC0LTH 0xC6 All Pages ADC0 Less-Than Compare Word High 57 ADC0LTL 0xC5 All Pages ADC0 Less-Than Compare Word Low 57 AMX0N 0xBA All Pages AMUX0 Negative Channel Select 61 AMX0P 0xBB All Pages AMUX0 Positive Channel Select 60 B 0xF0 All Pages B Register 86 CKCON 0x8E All Pages Clock Control 264 CKCON1 0xE4 F Clock Control 1 265 CLKMUL 0xB9 0 Clock Multiplier 147 CLKSEL 0xA9 All Pages Clock Select 144 CPT0CN 0x9B All Pages Comparator0 Control 67 CPT0MD 0x9D All Pages Comparator0 Mode Selection 68 CPT0MX 0x9F All Pages Comparator0 MUX Selection 72 CPT1CN 0x9A All Pages Comparator1 Control 69 CPT1MD 0x9C All Pages Comparator1 Mode Selection 70 CPT1MX 0x9E All Pages Comparator1 MUX Selection 73 DPH 0x83 All Pages Data Pointer High 85 DPL 0x82 All Pages Data Pointer Low 85 EIE1 0xE6 All Pages Extended Interrupt Enable 1 123 EIE2 0xE7 All Pages Extended Interrupt Enable 2 125 EIP1 0xF6 All Pages Extended Interrupt Priority 1 124 EIP2 0xF7 All Pages Extended Interrupt Priority 2 126 EMI0CF 0x85 All Pages External Memory Interface Configuration 97 EMI0CN 0xAA All Pages External Memory Interface Control 96 EMI0TC 0x84 All Pages External Memory Interface Timing 103 FLKEY 0xB7 All Pages Flash Lock and Key 140 FLSCL 0xB6 All Pages Flash Scale 141 Rev. 1.4 113

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 15.2. Special Function Registers (Continued) SFRs are listed in alphabetical order. All undefined SFR locations are reserved Register Address Page Description Page IE 0xA8 All Pages Interrupt Enable 121 IP 0xB8 All Pages Interrupt Priority 122 IT01CF 0xE4 0 INT0/INT1 Configuration 128 OSCICL 0xB3 All Pages Internal Oscillator Calibration 145 OSCICN 0xB2 All Pages Internal Oscillator Control 146 OSCLCN 0x86 All Pages Internal Low-Frequency Oscillator Control 148 OSCXCN 0xB1 All Pages External Oscillator Control 152 P0 0x80 All Pages Port 0 Latch 162 P0MDIN 0xF1 All Pages Port 0 Input Mode Configuration 162 P0MDOUT 0xA4 All Pages Port 0 Output Mode Configuration 163 P0SKIP 0xD4 All Pages Port 0 Skip 163 P1 0x90 All Pages Port 1 Latch 164 P1MDIN 0xF2 All Pages Port 1 Input Mode Configuration 164 P1MDOUT 0xA5 All Pages Port 1 Output Mode Configuration 165 P1SKIP 0xD5 All Pages Port 1 Skip 165 P2 0xA0 All Pages Port 2 Latch 166 P2MDIN 0xF3 All Pages Port 2 Input Mode Configuration 166 P2MDOUT 0xA6 All Pages Port 2 Output Mode Configuration 167 P2SKIP 0xD6 All Pages Port 2 Skip 167 P3 0xB0 All Pages Port 3 Latch 168 P3MDIN 0xF4 All Pages Port 3 Input Mode Configuration 168 P3MDOUT 0xA7 All Pages Port 3 Output Mode Configuration 169 P3SKIP 0xDF All Pages Port 3Skip 169 P4 0xC7 All Pages Port 4 Latch 170 P4MDIN 0xF5 All Pages Port 4 Input Mode Configuration 170 P4MDOUT 0xAE All Pages Port 4 Output Mode Configuration 171 PCA0CN 0xD8 All Pages PCA Control 311 PCA0CPH0 0xFC All Pages PCA Capture 0 High 315 PCA0CPH1 0xEA All Pages PCA Capture 1 High 315 PCA0CPH2 0xEC All Pages PCA Capture 2 High 315 PCA0CPH3 0xEE All Pages PCA Capture 3High 315 PCA0CPH4 0xFE All Pages PCA Capture 4 High 315 PCA0CPL0 0xFB All Pages PCA Capture 0 Low 315 PCA0CPL1 0xE9 All Pages PCA Capture 1 Low 315 114 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 15.2. Special Function Registers (Continued) SFRs are listed in alphabetical order. All undefined SFR locations are reserved Register Address Page Description Page PCA0CPL2 0xEB All Pages PCA Capture 2 Low 315 PCA0CPL3 0xED All Pages PCA Capture 3 Low 315 PCA0CPL4 0xFD All Pages PCA Capture 4 Low 315 PCA0CPM0 0xDA All Pages PCA Module 0 Mode Register 313 PCA0CPM1 0xDB All Pages PCA Module 1 Mode Register 313 PCA0CPM2 0xDC All Pages PCA Module 2 Mode Register 313 PCA0CPM3 0xDD All Pages PCA Module 3 Mode Register 313 PCA0CPM4 0xDE All Pages PCA Module 4 Mode Register 313 PCA0H 0xFA All Pages PCA Counter High 314 PCA0L 0xF9 All Pages PCA Counter Low 314 PCA0MD 0xD9 All Pages PCA Mode 312 PCON 0x87 All Pages Power Control 78 PFE0CN 0xAF All Pages Prefetch Engine Control 88 PSCTL 0x8F All Pages Program Store R/W Control 139 PSW 0xD0 All Pages Program Status Word 87 REF0CN 0xD1 All Pages Voltage Reference Control 63 REG01CN 0xC9 All Pages Voltage Regulator 0 and 1 Control 75 RSTSRC 0xEF All Pages Reset Source Configuration/Status 134 SBCON1 0xAC All Pages UART1 Baud Rate Generator Control 248 SBRLH1 0xB5 All Pages UART1 Baud Rate Generator High 248 SBRLL1 0xB4 All Pages UART1 Baud Rate Generator Low 249 SBUF0 0x99 All Pages UART0 Data Buffer 238 SBUF1 0xD3 All Pages UART1 Data Buffer 247 SCON0 0x98 All Pages UART0 Control 237 SCON1 0xD2 All Pages UART1 Control 245 SFRPAGE 0xBF All Pages SFR Page Select 111 SMB0ADM 0xCE 0 SMBus0 Address Mask 219 SMB0ADR 0xCF 0 SMBus0 Address 218 SMB0CF 0xC1 0 SMBus0 Configuration 211 SMB0CN 0xC0 0 SMBus0 Control 215 SMB0DAT 0xC2 0 SMBus0 Data 221 SMB1ADM 0xCE F SMBus1 Address Mask 220 SMB1ADR 0xCF F SMBus1 Address 219 SMB1CF 0xC1 F SMBus1 Configuration 211 Rev. 1.4 115

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 15.2. Special Function Registers (Continued) SFRs are listed in alphabetical order. All undefined SFR locations are reserved Register Address Page Description Page SMB1CN 0xC0 F SMBus1 Control 216 SMB1DAT 0xC2 F SMBus1 Data 222 SMBTC 0xB9 F SMBus0/1 Timing Control 213 SMOD1 0xE5 All Pages UART1 Mode 246 SP 0x81 All Pages Stack Pointer 86 SPI0CFG 0xA1 All Pages SPI Configuration 257 SPI0CKR 0xA2 All Pages SPI Clock Rate Control 259 SPI0CN 0xF8 All Pages SPI Control 258 SPI0DAT 0xA3 All Pages SPI Data 259 TCON 0x88 All Pages Timer/Counter Control 270 TH0 0x8C All Pages Timer/Counter 0 High 273 TH1 0x8D All Pages Timer/Counter 1 High 273 TL0 0x8A All Pages Timer/Counter 0 Low 272 TL1 0x8B All Pages Timer/Counter 1 Low 272 TMOD 0x89 All Pages Timer/Counter Mode 271 TMR2CN 0xC8 0 Timer/Counter 2 Control 278 TMR2H 0xCD 0 Timer/Counter 2 High 280 TMR2L 0xCC 0 Timer/Counter 2 Low 279 TMR2RLH 0xCB 0 Timer/Counter 2 Reload High 279 TMR2RLL 0xCA 0 Timer/Counter 2 Reload Low 279 TMR3CN 0x91 0 Timer/Counter 3 Control 285 TMR3H 0x95 0 Timer/Counter 3 High 287 TMR3L 0x94 0 Timer/Counter 3 Low 286 TMR3RLH 0x93 0 Timer/Counter 3 Reload High 286 TMR3RLL 0x92 0 Timer/Counter 3 Reload Low 286 TMR4CN 0x91 F Timer/Counter 4 Control 290 TMR4H 0x95 F Timer/Counter 4 High 292 TMR4L 0x94 F Timer/Counter 4 Low 291 TMR4RLH 0x93 F Timer/Counter 4 Reload High 291 TMR4RLL 0x92 F Timer/Counter 4 Reload Low 291 TMR5CN 0xC8 F Timer/Counter 5 Control 295 TMR5H 0xCD F Timer/Counter 5 High 297 TMR5L 0xCC F Timer/Counter 5 Low 296 TMR5RLH 0xCB F Timer/Counter 5 Reload High 296 116 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 15.2. Special Function Registers (Continued) SFRs are listed in alphabetical order. All undefined SFR locations are reserved Register Address Page Description Page TMR5RLL 0xCA F Timer/Counter 5 Reload Low 296 USB0ADR 0x96 All Pages USB0 Indirect Address Register 176 USB0DAT 0x97 All Pages USB0 Data Register 177 USB0XCN 0xD7 All Pages USB0 Transceiver Control 174 VDM0CN 0xFF All Pages VDD Monitor Control 132 XBR0 0xE1 All Pages Port I/O Crossbar Control 0 159 XBR1 0xE2 All Pages Port I/O Crossbar Control 1 160 XBR2 0xE3 All Pages Port I/O Crossbar Control 2 161 Rev. 1.4 117

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 16. Interrupts The C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C include an extended interrupt system supporting multiple interrupt sources with two priority levels. The allocation of interrupt sources between on-chip peripherals and external inputs pins varies according to the specific version of the device. Each interrupt source has one or more associ- ated interrupt-pending flag(s) located in an SFR. When a peripheral or external source meets a valid inter- rupt condition, the associated interrupt-pending flag is set to logic 1. If interrupts are enabled for the source, an interrupt request is generated when the interrupt-pending flag is set. As soon as execution of the current instruction is complete, the CPU generates an LCALL to a prede- termined address to begin execution of an interrupt service routine (ISR). Each ISR must end with an RETI instruction, which returns program execution to the next instruction that would have been executed if the interrupt request had not occurred. If interrupts are not enabled, the interrupt-pending flag is ignored by the hardware and program execution continues as normal. (The interrupt-pending flag is set to logic 1 regard- less of the interrupt's enable/disable state.) Each interrupt source can be individually enabled or disabled through the use of an associated interrupt enable bit in an SFR (IE, EIE1, or EIE2). However, interrupts must first be globally enabled by setting the EA bit (IE.7) to logic 1 before the individual interrupt enables are recognized. Setting the EA bit to logic 0 disables all interrupt sources regardless of the individual interrupt-enable settings. Note: Any instruction that clears a bit to disable an interrupt should be immediately followed by an instruc- tion that has two or more opcode bytes. Using EA (global interrupt enable) as an example: // in 'C': EA = 0; // clear EA bit. EA = 0; // this is a dummy instruction with two-byte opcode. ; in assembly: CLR EA ; clear EA bit. CLR EA ; this is a dummy instruction with two-byte opcode. For example, if an interrupt is posted during the execution phase of a "CLR EA" opcode (or any instruction which clears a bit to disable an interrupt source), and the instruction is followed by a single-cycle instruc- tion, the interrupt may be taken. However, a read of the enable bit will return a 0 inside the interrupt service routine. When the bit-clearing opcode is followed by a multi-cycle instruction, the interrupt will not be taken. Some interrupt-pending flags are automatically cleared by the hardware when the CPU vectors to the ISR. However, most are not cleared by the hardware and must be cleared by software before returning from the ISR. If an interrupt-pending flag remains set after the CPU completes the return-from-interrupt (RETI) instruction, a new interrupt request will be generated immediately and the CPU will re-enter the ISR after the completion of the next instruction. Rev. 1.4 118

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 16.1. MCU Interrupt Sources and Vectors The C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C MCUs support several interrupt sources. Software can simulate an inter- rupt by setting any interrupt-pending flag to logic 1. If interrupts are enabled for the flag, an interrupt request will be generated and the CPU will vector to the ISR address associated with the interrupt-pending flag. MCU interrupt sources, associated vector addresses, priority order and control bits are summarized in Table 16.1. Refer to the datasheet section associated with a particular on-chip peripheral for information regarding valid interrupt conditions for the peripheral and the behavior of its interrupt-pending flag(s). 16.1.1. Interrupt Priorities Each interrupt source can be individually programmed to one of two priority levels: low or high. A low prior- ity interrupt service routine can be preempted by a high priority interrupt. A high priority interrupt cannot be preempted. Each interrupt has an associated interrupt priority bit in an SFR (IP, EIP1, or EIP2) used to configure its priority level. Low priority is the default. If two interrupts are recognized simultaneously, the interrupt with the higher priority is serviced first. If both interrupts have the same priority level, a fixed prior- ity order is used to arbitrate, given in Table 16.1. 16.1.2. Interrupt Latency Interrupt response time depends on the state of the CPU when the interrupt occurs. Pending interrupts are sampled and priority decoded each system clock cycle. Therefore, the fastest possible response time is 6 system clock cycles: 1 clock cycle to detect the interrupt and 5 clock cycles to complete the LCALL to the ISR. If an interrupt is pending when a RETI is executed, a single instruction is executed before an LCALL is made to service the pending interrupt. Therefore, the maximum response time for an interrupt (when no other interrupt is currently being serviced or the new interrupt is of greater priority) occurs when the CPU is performing an RETI instruction followed by a D IV as the next instruction. In this case, the response time is 20 system clock cycles: 1 clock cycle to detect the interrupt, 6 clock cycles to execute the RETI, 8 clock cycles to complete the DIV instruction and 5 clock cycles to execute the LCALL to the ISR. If the CPU is executing an ISR for an interrupt with equal or higher priority, the new interrupt will not be serviced until the current ISR completes, including the RETI and following instruction. Note that the CPU is stalled during Flash write operations and USB FIFO MOVX accesses. Interrupt ser- vice latency will be increased for interrupts occurring while the CPU is stalled. The latency for these situa- tions will be determined by the standard interrupt service procedure (as described above) and the amount of time the CPU is stalled. 16.2. Interrupt Register Descriptions The SFRs used to enable the interrupt sources and set their priority level are described in this section. Refer to the data sheet section associated with a particular on-chip peripheral for information regarding valid interrupt conditions for the peripheral and the behavior of its interrupt-pending flag(s). 119 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 16.1. Interrupt Summary Interrupt Source InVteecrrtuoprt POrirodreitry Pending Flag ss? ed W? EFnlaabgle CProinotrritoyl Bit ddre Clear by H A Reset 0x0000 Top None N/A N/A Always Always Enabled Highest External Interrupt 0 0x0003 0 IE0 (TCON.1) Y Y EX0 (IE.0) PX0 (IP.0) (INT0) Timer 0 Overflow 0x000B 1 TF0 (TCON.5) Y Y ET0 (IE.1) PT0 (IP.1) External Interrupt 1 0x0013 2 IE1 (TCON.3) Y Y EX1 (IE.2) PX1 (IP.2) (INT1) Timer 1 Overflow 0x001B 3 TF1 (TCON.7) Y Y ET1 (IE.3) PT1 (IP.3) UART0 0x0023 4 RI0 (SCON0.0) Y N ES0 (IE.4) PS0 (IP.4) TI0 (SCON0.1) Timer 2 Overflow 0x002B 5 TF2H (TMR2CN.7) Y N ET2 (IE.5) PT2 (IP.5) TF2L (TMR2CN.6) SPI0 0x0033 6 SPIF (SPI0CN.7) Y N ESPI0 PSPI0 WCOL (SPI0CN.6) (IE.6) (IP.6) MODF (SPI0CN.5) RXOVRN (SPI0CN.4) SMB0 0x003B 7 SI (SMB0CN.0) Y N ESMB0 PSMB0 (EIE1.0) (EIP1.0) USB0 0x0043 8 Special N N EUSB0 PUSB0 (EIE1.1) (EIP1.1) ADC0 Window Com- 0x004B 9 AD0WINT Y N EWADC0 PWADC0 pare (ADC0CN.3) (EIE1.2) (EIP1.2) ADC0 Conversion 0x0053 10 AD0INT (ADC0CN.5) Y N EADC0 PADC0 Complete (EIE1.3) (EIP1.3) Programmable 0x005B 11 CF (PCA0CN.7) Y N EPCA0 PPCA0 Counter Array CCFn (PCA0CN.n) (EIE1.4) (EIP1.4) Comparator0 0x0063 12 CP0FIF (CPT0CN.4) N N ECP0 PCP0 CP0RIF (CPT0CN.5) (EIE1.5) (EIP1.5) Comparator1 0x006B 13 CP1FIF (CPT1CN.4) N N ECP1 PCP1 CP1RIF (CPT1CN.5) (EIE1.6) (EIP1.6) Timer 3 Overflow 0x0073 14 TF3H (TMR3CN.7) N N ET3 PT3 TF3L (TMR3CN.6) (EIE1.7) (EIP1.7) VBUS Level 0x007B 15 N/A N/A N/A EVBUS PVBUS (EIE2.0) (EIP2.0) UART1 0x0083 16 RI1 (SCON1.0) N N ES1 PS1 TI1 (SCON1.1) (EIE2.1) (EIP2.1) Reserved 0x008B 17 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A SMB1 0x0093 18 SI (SMB1CN.0) Y N ESMB1 PSMB1 (EIE2.3) (EIP2.3) Timer 4 Overflow 0x009B 19 TF4H (TMR4CN.7) N N ET4 PT4 TF4L (TMR4CN.6) (EIE2.4) (E!P2.4) Timer 5 Overflow 0x00A3 20 TF5H (TMR5CN.7) Y N ET5 PT5 TF5L (TMR5CN.6) (EIE2.5) (E!P2.5) Rev. 1.4 120

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 16.1. IE: Interrupt Enable Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name EA ESPI0 ET2 ES0 ET1 EX1 ET0 EX0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xA8; SFR Page = All Pages; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Function 7 EA Enable All Interrupts. Globally enables/disables all interrupts. It overrides individual interrupt mask settings. 0: Disable all interrupt sources. 1: Enable each interrupt according to its individual mask setting. 6 ESPI0 Enable Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the SPI0 interrupts. 0: Disable all SPI0 interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by SPI0. 5 ET2 Enable Timer 2 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the Timer 2 interrupt. 0: Disable Timer 2 interrupt. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF2L or TF2H flags. 4 ES0 Enable UART0 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the UART0 interrupt. 0: Disable UART0 interrupt. 1: Enable UART0 interrupt. 3 ET1 Enable Timer 1 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the Timer 1 interrupt. 0: Disable all Timer 1 interrupt. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF1 flag. 2 EX1 Enable External Interrupt 1. This bit sets the masking of External Interrupt 1. 0: Disable external interrupt 1. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the INT1 input. 1 ET0 Enable Timer 0 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the Timer 0 interrupt. 0: Disable all Timer 0 interrupt. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF0 flag. 0 EX0 Enable External Interrupt 0. This bit sets the masking of External Interrupt 0. 0: Disable external interrupt 0. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the INT0 input. 121 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 16.2. IP: Interrupt Priority Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PSPI0 PT2 PS0 PT1 PX1 PT0 PX0 Type R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xB8; SFR Page = All Pages; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Function 7 Unused Read = 1b, Write = Don't Care. 6 PSPI0 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the SPI0 interrupt. 0: SPI0 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: SPI0 interrupt set to high priority level. 5 PT2 Timer 2 Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the Timer 2 interrupt. 0: Timer 2 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: Timer 2 interrupt set to high priority level. 4 PS0 UART0 Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the UART0 interrupt. 0: UART0 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: UART0 interrupt set to high priority level. 3 PT1 Timer 1 Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the Timer 1 interrupt. 0: Timer 1 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: Timer 1 interrupt set to high priority level. 2 PX1 External Interrupt 1 Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the External Interrupt 1 interrupt. 0: External Interrupt 1 set to low priority level. 1: External Interrupt 1 set to high priority level. 1 PT0 Timer 0 Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the Timer 0 interrupt. 0: Timer 0 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: Timer 0 interrupt set to high priority level. 0 PX0 External Interrupt 0 Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the External Interrupt 0 interrupt. 0: External Interrupt 0 set to low priority level. 1: External Interrupt 0 set to high priority level. Rev. 1.4 122

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 16.3. EIE1: Extended Interrupt Enable 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ET3 ECP1 ECP0 EPCA0 EADC0 EWADC0 EUSB0 ESMB0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xE6; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 ET3 Enable Timer 3 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the Timer 3 interrupt. 0: Disable Timer 3 interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF3L or TF3H flags. 6 ECP1 Enable Comparator1 (CP1) Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the CP1 interrupt. 0: Disable CP1 interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the CP1RIF or CP1FIF flags. 5 ECP0 Enable Comparator0 (CP0) Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the CP0 interrupt. 0: Disable CP0 interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the CP0RIF or CP0FIF flags. 4 EPCA0 Enable Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the PCA0 interrupts. 0: Disable all PCA0 interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by PCA0. 3 EADC0 Enable ADC0 Conversion Complete Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt. 0: Disable ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the AD0INT flag. 2 EWADC0 Enable Window Comparison ADC0 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of ADC0 Window Comparison interrupt. 0: Disable ADC0 Window Comparison interrupt. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by ADC0 Window Compare flag (AD0WINT). 1 EUSB0 Enable USB (USB0) Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the USB0 interrupt. 0: Disable all USB0 interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by USB0. 0 ESMB0 Enable SMBus0 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the SMB0 interrupt. 0: Disable all SMB0 interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by SMB0. 123 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 16.4. EIP1: Extended Interrupt Priority 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PT3 PCP1 PCP0 PPCA0 PADC0 PWADC0 PUSB0 PSMB0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xF6; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 PT3 Timer 3 Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the Timer 3 interrupt. 0: Timer 3 interrupts set to low priority level. 1: Timer 3 interrupts set to high priority level. 6 PCP1 Comparator1 (CP1) Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the CP1 interrupt. 0: CP1 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: CP1 interrupt set to high priority level. 5 PCP0 Comparator0 (CP0) Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the CP0 interrupt. 0: CP0 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: CP0 interrupt set to high priority level. 4 PPCA0 Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the PCA0 interrupt. 0: PCA0 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: PCA0 interrupt set to high priority level. 3 PADC0 ADC0 Conversion Complete Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt. 0: ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt set to low priority level. 1: ADC0 Conversion Complete interrupt set to high priority level. 2 PWADC0 ADC0 Window Comparator Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the ADC0 Window interrupt. 0: ADC0 Window interrupt set to low priority level. 1: ADC0 Window interrupt set to high priority level. 1 PUSB0 USB (USB0) Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the USB0 interrupt. 0: USB0 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: USB0 interrupt set to high priority level. 0 PSMB0 SMBus0 Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the SMB0 interrupt. 0: SMB0 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: SMB0 interrupt set to high priority level. Rev. 1.4 124

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 16.5. EIE2: Extended Interrupt Enable 2 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ET5 ET4 ESMB1 ES1 EVBUS Type R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xE7; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:6 Unused Read = 00b, Write = Don't Care. 5 ET5 Enable Timer 5 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the Timer 5 interrupt. 0: Disable Timer 5 interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF5L or TF5H flags. 4 ET4 Enable Timer 4 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the Timer 4 interrupt. 0: Disable Timer 4interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by the TF4L or TF4H flags. 3 ESMB1 Enable SMBus1 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the SMB1 interrupt. 0: Disable all SMB1 interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by SMB1. 2 Reserved Must Write 0b. 1 ES1 Enable UART1 Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the UART1 interrupt. 0: Disable UART1 interrupt. 1: Enable UART1 interrupt. 0 EVBUS Enable VBUS Level Interrupt. This bit sets the masking of the VBUS interrupt. 0: Disable all VBUS interrupts. 1: Enable interrupt requests generated by VBUS level sense. 125 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 16.6. EIP2: Extended Interrupt Priority 2 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PT5 PT4 PSMB1 PS1 PVBUS Type R R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xF7; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function :6 Unused Read = 00b, Write = Don't Care. 5 PT5 Timer 5 Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the Timer 5 interrupt. 0: Timer 5 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: Timer 5 interrupt set to high priority level. 4 PT4 Timer 4 Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the Timer 4 interrupt. 0: Timer 4 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: Timer 4 interrupt set to high priority level. 3 PSMB1 SMBus1 Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the SMB1 interrupt. 0: SMB1 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: SMB1 interrupt set to high priority level. 2 Reserved Must Write 0b. 1 PS1 UART1 Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the UART1 interrupt. 0: UART1 interrupt set to low priority level. 1: UART1 interrupt set to high priority level. 0 PVBUS VBUS Level Interrupt Priority Control. This bit sets the priority of the VBUS interrupt. 0: VBUS interrupt set to low priority level. 1: VBUS interrupt set to high priority level. Rev. 1.4 126

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 16.3. INT0 and INT1 External Interrupt Sources The INT0 and INT1 external interrupt sources are configurable as active high or low, edge or level sensi- tive. The IN0PL (INT0 Polarity) and IN1PL (INT1 Polarity) bits in the IT01CF register select active high or active low; the IT0 and IT1 bits in TCON (Section “26.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1” on page 266) select level or edge sensitive. The table below lists the possible configurations. IT0 IN0PL INT0 Interrupt IT1 IN1PL INT1 Interrupt 1 0 Active low, edge sensitive 1 0 Active low, edge sensitive 1 1 Active high, edge sensitive 1 1 Active high, edge sensitive 0 0 Active low, level sensitive 0 0 Active low, level sensitive 0 1 Active high, level sensitive 0 1 Active high, level sensitive INT0 and INT1 are assigned to Port pins as defined in the IT01CF register (see SFR Definition 16.7). Note that INT0 and INT0 Port pin assignments are independent of any Crossbar assignments. INT0 and INT1 will monitor their assigned Port pins without disturbing the peripheral that was assigned the Port pin via the Crossbar. To assign a Port pin only to INT0 and/or INT1, configure the Crossbar to skip the selected pin(s). This is accomplished by setting the associated bit in register PnSKIP (see Section “20.1. Priority Crossbar Decoder” on page 154 for complete details on configuring the Crossbar). IE0 (TCON.1) and IE1 (TCON.3) serve as the interrupt-pending flags for the INT0 and INT1 external inter- rupts, respectively. If an INT0 or INT1 external interrupt is configured as edge-sensitive, the corresponding interrupt-pending flag is automatically cleared by the hardware when the CPU vectors to the ISR. When configured as level sensitive, the interrupt-pending flag remains logic 1 while the input is active as defined by the corresponding polarity bit (IN0PL or IN1PL); the flag remains logic 0 while the input is inactive. The external interrupt source must hold the input active until the interrupt request is recognized. It must then deactivate the interrupt request before execution of the ISR completes or another interrupt request will be generated. 127 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C O SFR Definition 16.7. IT01CF: INT0/INT1 Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name IN1PL IN1SL[2:0] IN0PL IN0SL[2:0] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 SFR Address = 0xE4; SFR Page = 0 Bit Name Function 7 IN1PL INT1 Polarity. 0: INT1 input is active low. 1: INT1 input is active high. 6:4 IN1SL[2:0] INT1 Port Pin Selection Bits. These bits select which Port pin is assigned to INT1. Note that this pin assignment is independent of the Crossbar; INT1 will monitor the assigned Port pin without disturb- ing the peripheral that has been assigned the Port pin via the Crossbar. The Crossbar will not assign the Port pin to a peripheral if it is configured to skip the selected pin. 000: Select P0.0 001: Select P0.1 010: Select P0.2 011: Select P0.3 100: Select P0.4 101: Select P0.5 110: Select P0.6 111: Select P0.7 3 IN0PL INT0 Polarity. 0: INT0 input is active low. 1: INT0 input is active high. 2:0 IN0SL[2:0] INT0 Port Pin Selection Bits. These bits select which Port pin is assigned to INT0. Note that this pin assignment is independent of the Crossbar; INT0 will monitor the assigned Port pin without disturb- ing the peripheral that has been assigned the Port pin via the Crossbar. The Crossbar will not assign the Port pin to a peripheral if it is configured to skip the selected pin. 000: Select P0.0 001: Select P0.1 010: Select P0.2 011: Select P0.3 100: Select P0.4 101: Select P0.5 110: Select P0.6 111: Select P0.7 Rev. 1.4 128

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 17. Reset Sources Reset circuitry allows the controller to be easily placed in a predefined default condition. On entry to this reset state, the following occur:  CIP-51 halts program execution  Special Function Registers (SFRs) are initialized to their defined reset values  External Port pins are forced to a known state  Interrupts and timers are disabled. All SFRs are reset to the predefined values noted in the SFR detailed descriptions. The contents of internal data memory are unaffected during a reset; any previously stored data is preserved. However, since the stack pointer SFR is reset, the stack is effectively lost, even though the data on the stack is not altered. The Port I/O latches are reset to 0xFF (all logic ones) in open-drain mode. Weak pullups are enabled during and after the reset. For V Monitor and power-on resets, the RST pin is driven low until the device DD exits the reset state. On exit from the reset state, the program counter (PC) is reset, and the system clock defaults to the inter- nal oscillator. The Watchdog Timer is enabled with the system clock divided by 12 as its clock source. Pro- gram execution begins at location 0x0000. Figure 17.1. Reset Sources Rev. 1.4 129

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 17.1. Power-On Reset During power-up, the device is held in a reset state and the RST pin is driven low until V settles above DD V . A delay occurs before the device is released from reset; the delay decreases as the V ramp time RST DD increases (V ramp time is defined as how fast V ramps from 0 V to V ). Figure 17.2. plots the DD DD RST power-on and V monitor event timing. The maximum V ramp time is 1 ms; slower ramp times may DD DD cause the device to be released from reset before V reaches the V level. For ramp times less than DD RST 1 ms, the power-on reset delay (T ) is typically less than 0.3 ms. PORDelay On exit from a power-on or V monitor reset, the PORSF flag (RSTSRC.1) is set by hardware to logic 1. DD When PORSF is set, all of the other reset flags in the RSTSRC Register are indeterminate (PORSF is cleared by all other resets). Since all resets cause program execution to begin at the same location (0x0000) software can read the PORSF flag to determine if a power-up was the cause of reset. The con- tent of internal data memory should be assumed to be undefined after a power-on reset. The V monitor DD is enabled following a power-on reset. Figure 17.2. Power-On and V Monitor Reset Timing DD 130 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 17.2. Power-Fail Reset / V Monitor DD When a power-down transition or power irregularity causes V to drop below V , the power supply DD RST monitor will drive the RST pin low and hold the CIP-51 in a reset state (see Figure 17.2). When V returns DD to a level above V , the CIP-51 will be released from the reset state. Note that even though internal data RST memory contents are not altered by the power-fail reset, it is impossible to determine if V dropped below DD the level required for data retention. If the PORSF flag reads 1, the data may no longer be valid. The V DD monitor is enabled after power-on resets. Its defined state (enabled/disabled) is not altered by any other reset source. For example, if the V monitor is disabled by code and a software reset is performed, the DD V monitor will still be disabled after the reset. DD Important Note: If the V monitor is being turned on from a disabled state, it should be enabled before it DD is selected as a reset source. Selecting the V monitor as a reset source before it is enabled and stabi- DD lized may cause a system reset. In some applications, this reset may be undesirable. If this is not desirable in the application, a delay should be introduced between enabling the monitor and selecting it as a reset source. The procedure for enabling the V monitor and configuring it as a reset source from a disabled DD state is shown below: 1. Enable the V monitor (VDMEN bit in VDM0CN = 1). DD 2. If necessary, wait for the V monitor to stabilize (see Table 5.4 for the V Monitor turn-on time). DD DD 3. Select the V monitor as a reset source (PORSF bit in RSTSRC = 1). DD See Figure 17.2 for VDD monitor timing; note that the power-on-reset delay is not incurred after a VDD monitor reset. See Table 5.4 for complete electrical characteristics of the V monitor. DD Rev. 1.4 131

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 17.1. VDM0CN: V Monitor Control DD Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name VDMEN VDDSTAT Type R/W R R R R R R R Reset Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies SFR Address = 0xFF; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 VDMEN V Monitor Enable. DD This bit turns the V monitor circuit on/off. The V Monitor cannot generate sys- DD DD tem resets until it is also selected as a reset source in register RSTSRC (SFR Defi- nition 17.2). Selecting the V monitor as a reset source before it has stabilized DD may generate a system reset. In systems where this reset would be undesirable, a delay should be introduced between enabling the V Monitor and selecting it as a DD reset source. See Table 5.4 for the minimum V Monitor turn-on time. DD 0: V Monitor Disabled. DD 1: V Monitor Enabled. DD 6 VDDSTAT V Status. DD This bit indicates the current power supply status (V Monitor output). DD 0: V is at or below the V monitor threshold. DD DD 1: V is above the V monitor threshold. DD DD 5:0 Unused Read = 000000b; Write = Don’t care. 17.3. External Reset The external RST pin provides a means for external circuitry to force the device into a reset state. Assert- ing an active-low signal on the RST pin generates a reset; an external pullup and/or decoupling of the RST pin may be necessary to avoid erroneous noise-induced resets. See Table 5.4 for complete RST pin spec- ifications. The PINRSF flag (RSTSRC.0) is set on exit from an external reset. 17.4. Missing Clock Detector Reset The Missing Clock Detector (MCD) is a one-shot circuit that is triggered by the system clock. If the system clock remains high or low for more than the MCD time-out, a reset will be generated. After a MCD reset, the MCDRSF flag (RSTSRC.2) will read 1, signifying the MCD as the reset source; otherwise, this bit reads 0. Writing a 1 to the MCDRSF bit enables the Missing Clock Detector; writing a 0 disables it. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset. 17.5. Comparator0 Reset Comparator0 can be configured as a reset source by writing a 1 to the C0RSEF flag (RSTSRC.5). Com- parator0 should be enabled and allowed to settle prior to writing to C0RSEF to prevent any turn-on chatter on the output from generating an unwanted reset. The Comparator0 reset is active-low: if the non-inverting input voltage (on CP0+) is less than the inverting input voltage (on CP0-), the device is put into the reset state. After a Comparator0 reset, the C0RSEF flag (RSTSRC.5) will read 1 signifying Comparator0 as the reset source; otherwise, this bit reads 0. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset. 132 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 17.6. PCA Watchdog Timer Reset The programmable Watchdog Timer (WDT) function of the Programmable Counter Array (PCA) can be used to prevent software from running out of control during a system malfunction. The PCA WDT function can be enabled or disabled by software as described in Section “27.4. Watchdog Timer Mode” on page 308; the WDT is enabled and clocked by SYSCLK / 12 following any reset. If a system malfunction prevents user software from updating the WDT, a reset is generated and the WDTRSF bit (RSTSRC.5) is set to 1. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset. 17.7. Flash Error Reset If a Flash program read, write, or erase operation targets an illegal address, a system reset is generated. This may occur due to any of the following:  Programming hardware attempts to write or erase a Flash location which is above the user code space address limit.  A Flash read from firmware is attempted above user code space. This occurs when a MOVC operation is attempted above the user code space address limit.  A Program read is attempted above user code space. This occurs when user code attempts to branch to an address above the user code space address limit.  A Flash read, write, or erase attempt is restricted due to a Flash security setting.  A Flash write or erase is attempted when the VDD monitor is not enabled. The FERROR bit (RSTSRC.6) is set following a Flash error reset. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset. 17.8. Software Reset Software may force a reset by writing a 1 to the SWRSF bit (RSTSRC.4). The SWRSF bit will read 1 fol- lowing a software forced reset. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset. 17.9. USB Reset Writing 1 to the USBRSF bit in register RSTSRC selects USB0 as a reset source. With USB0 selected as a reset source, a system reset will be generated when either of the following occur: 1. RESET signaling is detected on the USB network. The USB Function Controller (USB0) must be enabled for RESET signaling to be detected. See Section “21. Universal Serial Bus Controller (USB0)” on page 172 for information on the USB Function Controller. 2. A falling or rising voltage on the VBUS pin. The USBRSF bit will read 1 following a USB reset. The state of the RST pin is unaffected by this reset. Rev. 1.4 133

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 17.2. RSTSRC: Reset Source Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name USBRSF FERROR C0RSEF SWRSF WDTRSF MCDRSF PORSF PINRSF Type R/W R R/W R/W R R/W R/W R Reset Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies SFR Address = 0xEF; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Description Write Read 7 USBRSF USB Reset Flag Writing a 1 enables USB Set to 1 if USB caused the as a reset source. last reset. 6 FERROR Flash Error Reset Flag. N/A Set to 1 if Flash read/write/erase error caused the last reset. 5 C0RSEF Comparator0 Reset Enable Writing a 1 enables Com- Set to 1 if Comparator0 and Flag. parator0 as a reset source caused the last reset. (active-low). 4 SWRSF Software Reset Force and Writing a 1 forces a sys- Set to 1 if last reset was Flag. tem reset. caused by a write to SWRSF. 3 WDTRSF Watchdog Timer Reset Flag. N/A Set to 1 if Watchdog Timer overflow caused the last reset. 2 MCDRSF Missing Clock Detector Writing a 1 enables the Set to 1 if Missing Clock Enable and Flag. Missing Clock Detector. Detector timeout caused The MCD triggers a reset the last reset. if a missing clock condition is detected. 1 PORSF Power-On / V Monitor Writing a 1 enables the Set to 1 anytime a power- DD Reset Flag, and VDD monitor VDD monitor as a reset on or VDD monitor reset source. occurs. Reset Enable. Writing 1 to this bit When set to 1 all other before the V monitor RSTSRC flags are inde- DD is enabled and stabilized terminate. may cause a system reset. 0 PINRSF HW Pin Reset Flag. N/A Set to 1 if RST pin caused the last reset. Note: Do not use read-modify-write operations on this register 134 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 18. Flash Memory On-chip, re-programmable Flash memory is included for program code and non-volatile data storage. The Flash memory can be programmed in-system through the C2 interface or by software using the MOVX instruction. Once cleared to logic 0, a Flash bit must be erased to set it back to logic 1. Flash bytes would typically be erased (set to 0xFF) before being reprogrammed. The write and erase operations are automat- ically timed by hardware for proper execution; data polling to determine the end of the write/erase opera- tion is not required. Code execution is stalled during a Flash write/erase operation. 18.1. Programming The Flash Memory The simplest means of programming the Flash memory is through the C2 interface using programming tools provided by Silicon Labs or a third party vendor. This is the only means for programming a non-initial- ized device. For details on the C2 commands to program Flash memory, see Section “28. C2 Interface” on page 316. To ensure the integrity of Flash contents, it is strongly recommended that the V monitor be left enabled DD in any system which writes or erases Flash memory from code. It is also crucial to ensure that the FLRT bit in register FLSCL be set to '1' if a clock speed higher than 25 MHz is being used for the device. 18.1.1. Flash Lock and Key Functions Flash writes and erases by user software are protected with a lock and key function. The Flash Lock and Key Register (FLKEY) must be written with the correct key codes, in sequence, before Flash operations may be performed. The key codes are: 0xA5, 0xF1. The timing does not matter, but the codes must be written in order. If the key codes are written out of order, or the wrong codes are written, Flash writes and erases will be disabled until the next system reset. Flash writes and erases will also be disabled if a Flash write or erase is attempted before the key codes have been written properly. The Flash lock resets after each write or erase; the key codes must be written again before a following Flash operation can be per- formed. The FLKEY register is detailed in SFR Definition 18.2. 18.1.2. Flash Erase Procedure The Flash memory can be programmed by software using the MOVX write instruction with the address and data byte to be programmed provided as normal operands. Before writing to Flash memory using MOVX, Flash write operations must be enabled by: (1) Writing the Flash key codes in sequence to the Flash Lock register (FLKEY); and (2) Setting the PSWE Program Store Write Enable bit (PSCTL.0) to logic 1 (this directs the MOVX writes to target Flash memory). The PSWE bit remains set until cleared by software. A write to Flash memory can clear bits to logic 0 but cannot set them; only an erase operation can set bits to logic 1 in Flash. A byte location to be programmed must be erased before a new value is written. The Flash memory is organized in 512-byte pages. The erase operation applies to an entire page (setting all bytes in the page to 0xFF). To erase an entire 512-byte page, perform the following steps: 1. Disable interrupts (recommended). 2. Write the first key code to FLKEY: 0xA5. 3. Write the second key code to FLKEY: 0xF1. 4. Set the PSEE bit (register PSCTL). 5. Set the PSWE bit (register PSCTL). 6. Using the MOVX instruction, write a data byte to any location within the 512-byte page to be erased. 7. Clear the PSWE bit (register PSCTL). 8. Clear the PSEE bit (register PSCTI). Rev. 1.4 135

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 18.1.3. Flash Write Procedure Bytes in Flash memory can be written one byte at a time, or in groups of two. The FLBWE bit in register PFE0CN (SFR Definition ) controls whether a single byte or a block of two bytes is written to Flash during a write operation. When FLBWE is cleared to 0, the Flash will be written one byte at a time. When FLBWE is set to 1, the Flash will be written in two-byte blocks. Block writes are performed in the same amount of time as single-byte writes, which can save time when storing large amounts of data to Flash mem- ory.During a single-byte write to Flash, bytes are written individually, and a Flash write will be performed after each MOVX write instruction. The recommended procedure for writing Flash in single bytes is: 1. Disable interrupts. 2. Clear the FLBWE bit (register PFE0CN) to select single-byte write mode. 3. Set the PSWE bit (register PSCTL). 4. Clear the PSEE bit (register PSCTL). 5. Write the first key code to FLKEY: 0xA5. 6. Write the second key code to FLKEY: 0xF1. 7. Using the MOVX instruction, write a single data byte to the desired location within the 512-byte sector. 8. Clear the PSWE bit. 9. Re-enable interrupts. Steps 5-7 must be repeated for each byte to be written. For block Flash writes, the Flash write procedure is only performed after the last byte of each block is writ- ten with the MOVX write instruction. A Flash write block is two bytes long, from even addresses to odd addresses. Writes must be performed sequentially (i.e. addresses ending in 0b and 1b must be written in order). The Flash write will be performed following the MOVX write that targets the address ending in 1b. If a byte in the block does not need to be updated in Flash, it should be written to 0xFF. The recommended procedure for writing Flash in blocks is: 1. Disable interrupts. 2. Set the FLBWE bit (register PFE0CN) to select block write mode. 3. Set the PSWE bit (register PSCTL). 4. Clear the PSEE bit (register PSCTL). 5. Write the first key code to FLKEY: 0xA5. 6. Write the second key code to FLKEY: 0xF1. 7. Using the MOVX instruction, write the first data byte to the even block location (ending in 0b). 8. Write the first key code to FLKEY: 0xA5. 9. Write the second key code to FLKEY: 0xF1. 10.Using the MOVX instruction, write the second data byte to the odd block location (ending in 1b). 11.Clear the PSWE bit. 12.Re-enable interrupts. Steps 5–10 must be repeated for each block to be written. 136 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 18.2. Non-Volatile Data Storage The Flash memory can be used for non-volatile data storage as well as program code. This allows data such as calibration coefficients to be calculated and stored at run time. Data is written using the MOVX write instruction and read using the MOVC instruction. Note: MOVX read instructions always target XRAM. 18.3. Security Options The CIP-51 provides security options to protect the Flash memory from inadvertent modification by soft- ware as well as to prevent the viewing of proprietary program code and constants. The Program Store Write Enable (bit PSWE in register PSCTL) and the Program Store Erase Enable (bit PSEE in register PSCTL) bits protect the Flash memory from accidental modification by software. PSWE must be explicitly set to 1 before software can modify the Flash memory; both PSWE and PSEE must be set to 1 before soft- ware can erase Flash memory. Additional security features prevent proprietary program code and data constants from being read or altered across the C2 interface. A Security Lock Byte located at the last byte of Flash user space offers protection of the Flash program memory from access (reads, writes, or erases) by unprotected code or the C2 interface. The Flash security mechanism allows the user to lock n 512-byte Flash pages, starting at page 0 (addresses 0x0000 to 0x01FF), where n is the 1s complement number represented by the Security Lock Byte. Note that the page containing the Flash Security Lock Byte is also locked when any other Flash pages are locked. See exam- ple below. Security Lock Byte: 11111101b 1s Complement: 00000010b Flash pages locked: 3 (2 + Flash Lock Byte Page) Addresses locked: First two pages of Flash: 0x0000 to 0x03FF Flash Lock Byte Page: (0xFA00 to 0xFBFF for 64k devices; 0x7E00 to 0x7FFF for 32k devices, 0x3E00 to 0x3FFF for 16k devices) Figure 18.1. Flash Program Memory Map and Security Byte The level of FLASH security depends on the FLASH access method. The three FLASH access methods that can be restricted are reads, writes, and erases from the C2 debug interface, user firmware executing on unlocked pages, and user firmware executing on locked pages. Rev. 1.4 137

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Accessing FLASH from the C2 debug interface: 1. Any unlocked page may be read, written, or erased. 2. Locked pages cannot be read, written, or erased. 3. The page containing the Lock Byte may be read, written, or erased if it is unlocked. 4. Reading the contents of the Lock Byte is always permitted. 5. Locking additional pages (changing 1s to 0s in the Lock Byte) is not permitted. 6. Unlocking FLASH pages (changing 0s to 1s in the Lock Byte) requires the C2 Device Erase command, which erases all FLASH pages including the page containing the Lock Byte and the Lock Byte itself. 7. The Reserved Area cannot be read, written, or erased. Accessing FLASH from user firmware executing on an unlocked page: 1. Any unlocked page except the page containing the Lock Byte may be read, written, or erased. 2. Locked pages cannot be read, written, or erased. 3. The page containing the Lock Byte cannot be erased. It may be read or written only if it is unlocked. 4. Reading the contents of the Lock Byte is always permitted. 5. Locking additional pages (changing 1s to 0s in the Lock Byte) is not permitted. 6. Unlocking FLASH pages (changing 0s to 1s in the Lock Byte) is not permitted. 7. The Reserved Area cannot be read, written, or erased. Any attempt to access the reserved area, or any other locked page, will result in a FLASH Error device reset. Accessing FLASH from user firmware executing on a locked page: 1. Any unlocked page except the page containing the Lock Byte may be read, written, or erased. 2. Any locked page except the page containing the Lock Byte may be read, written, or erased. 3. The page containing the Lock Byte cannot be erased. It may only be read or written. 4. Reading the contents of the Lock Byte is always permitted. 5. Locking additional pages (changing 1s to 0s in the Lock Byte) is not permitted. 6. Unlocking FLASH pages (changing 0s to 1s in the Lock Byte) is not permitted. 7. The Reserved Area cannot be read, written, or erased. Any attempt to access the reserved area, or any other locked page, will result in a FLASH Error device reset. 138 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 18.1. PSCTL: Program Store R/W Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PSEE PSWE Type R R R R R R R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address =0x8F; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:2 Reserved Must write 000000b. 1 PSEE Program Store Erase Enable. Setting this bit (in combination with PSWE) allows an entire page of Flash program memory to be erased. If this bit is logic 1 and Flash writes are enabled (PSWE is logic 1), a write to Flash memory using the MOVX instruction will erase the entire page that contains the location addressed by the MOVX instruction. The value of the data byte written does not matter. 0: Flash program memory erasure disabled. 1: Flash program memory erasure enabled. 0 PSWE Program Store Write Enable. Setting this bit allows writing a byte of data to the Flash program memory using the MOVX write instruction. The Flash location should be erased before writing data. 0: Writes to Flash program memory disabled. 1: Writes to Flash program memory enabled; the MOVX write instruction targets Flash memory. Rev. 1.4 139

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 18.2. FLKEY: Flash Lock and Key Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name FLKEY[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xB7; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 FLKEY[7:0] Flash Lock and Key Register. Write: This register provides a lock and key function for Flash erasures and writes. Flash writes and erases are enabled by writing 0xA5 followed by 0xF1 to the FLKEY regis- ter. Flash writes and erases are automatically disabled after the next write or erase is complete. If any writes to FLKEY are performed incorrectly, or if a Flash write or erase operation is attempted while these operations are disabled, the Flash will be perma- nently locked from writes or erasures until the next device reset. If an application never writes to Flash, it can intentionally lock the Flash by writing a non-0xA5 value to FLKEY from software. Read: When read, bits 1–0 indicate the current Flash lock state. 00: Flash is write/erase locked. 01: The first key code has been written (0xA5). 10: Flash is unlocked (writes/erases allowed). 11: Flash writes/erases disabled until the next reset. 140 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 18.3. FLSCL: Flash Scale Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name FOSE Reserved FLRT Reserved Type R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xB6; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 FOSE Flash One-shot Enable. This bit enables the Flash read one-shot. When the Flash one-shot disabled, the Flash sense amps are enabled for a full clock cycle during Flash reads. At system clock frequencies below 10 MHz, disabling the Flash one-shot will increase system power consumption. 0: Flash one-shot disabled. 1: Flash one-shot enabled. 6:5 Reserved Must write 00b. 4 FLRT FLASH Read Time. This bit should be programmed to the smallest allowed value, according to the system clock speed. 0: SYSCLK <= 25 MHz. 1: SYSCLK <= 48 MHz. 3:0 Reserved Must write 0000b. Rev. 1.4 141

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 19. Oscillators and Clock Selection C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C devices include a programmable internal high-frequency oscillator, a program- mable internal low-frequency oscillator, and an external oscillator drive circuit. The internal high-frequency oscillator can be enabled/disabled and calibrated using the OSCICN and OSCICL registers, as shown in Figure 19.1. The internal low-frequency oscillator can be enabled/disabled and calibrated using the OSCLCN register. The system clock can be sourced by the external oscillator circuit or either internal oscil- lator. Both internal oscillators offer a selectable post-scaling feature. The USB clock (USBCLK) can be derived from the internal oscillators or external oscillator. Figure 19.1. Oscillator Options Rev. 1.4 142

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 19.1. System Clock Selection The CLKSL[2:0] bits in register CLKSEL select which oscillator source is used as the system clock. CLKSL[2:0] must be set to 001b for the system clock to run from the external oscillator; however the exter- nal oscillator may still clock certain peripherals (timers, PCA) when the internal oscillator is selected as the system clock. The system clock may be switched on-the-fly between the internal oscillators and external oscillator so long as the selected clock source is enabled and running. The internal high-frequency and low-frequency oscillators require little start-up time and may be selected as the system clock immediately following the register write which enables the oscillator. The external RC and C modes also typically require no startup time. 19.2. USB Clock Selection The USBCLK[2:0] bits in register CLKSEL select which oscillator source is used as the USB clock. The USB clock may be derived from the internal oscillators, a divided version of the internal High-Frequency oscillator, or a divided version of the external oscillator. Note that the USB clock must be 48 MHz when operating USB0 as a Full Speed Function; the USB clock must be 6 MHz when operating USB0 as a Low Speed Function. See SFR Definition 19.1 for USB clock selection options. Some example USB clock configurations for Full and Low Speed mode are given below: USB Full Speed (48 MHz) Internal Oscillator Clock Signal Input Source Selection Register Bit Settings USB Clock Internal Oscillator* USBCLK = 000b Internal Oscillator Divide by 1 IFCN = 11b External Oscillator Clock Signal Input Source Selection Register Bit Settings USB Clock External Oscillator USBCLK = 010b External Oscillator CMOS Oscillator Mode XOSCMD = 010b 48 MHz Oscillator Note: Clock Recovery must be enabled for this configuration. USB Low Speed (6 MHz) Internal Oscillator Clock Signal Input Source Selection Register Bit Settings USB Clock Internal Oscillator / 8 USBCLK = 001b Internal Oscillator Divide by 1 IFCN = 11b External Oscillator Clock Signal Input Source Selection Register Bit Settings USB Clock External Oscillator / 4 USBCLK = 101b External Oscillator CMOS Oscillator Mode XOSCMD = 010b 24 MHz Oscillator Crystal Oscillator Mode XOSCMD = 110b 24 MHz Oscillator XFCN = 111b 143 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 19.1. CLKSEL: Clock Select Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name USBCLK[2:0] OUTCLK CLKSL[2:0] Type R R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xA9; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 Unused Read = 0b; Write = don’t care 6:4 USBCLK[2:0] USB Clock Source Select Bits. 000: USBCLK derived from the Internal High-Frequency Oscillator. 001: USBCLK derived from the Internal High-Frequency Oscillator / 8. 010: USBCLK derived from the External Oscillator. 011: USBCLK derived from the External Oscillator/2. 100: USBCLK derived from the External Oscillator/3. 101: USBCLK derived from the External Oscillator/4. 110: USBCLK derived fr om the Internal Low-Frequency Oscillator. 111: Reserved. 3 OUTCLK Crossbar Clock Out Select. If the SYSCLK signal is enabled on the Crossbar, this bit selects between outputting SYSCLK and SYSCLK synchronized with the Port I/O pins. 0: Enabling the Crossbar SYSCLK signal outputs SYSCLK. 1: Enabling the Crossbar SYSCLK signal outputs SYSCLK synchronized with the Port I/O. 2:0 CLKSL[2:0] System Clock Source Select Bits. 000: SYSCLK derived from the Internal High-Frequency Oscillator / 4 and scaled per the IFCN bits in register OSCICN. 001: SYSCLK derived from the External Oscillator circuit. 010: SYSCLK derived from the Internal High-Frequency Oscillator / 2. 011: SYSCLK derived from the Internal High-Frequency Oscillator. 100: SYSCLK derived from the Internal Low-Frequency Oscillator and scaled per the OSCLD bits in register OSCLCN. 101-111: Reserved. Rev. 1.4 144

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 145 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 19.3. Programmable Internal High-Frequency (H-F) Oscillator All C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C devices include a programmable internal high-frequency oscillator that defaults as the system clock after a system reset. The internal oscillator period can be adjusted via the OSCICL register as defined by SFR Definition 19.2. On C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C devices, OSCICL is factory calibrated to obtain a 48 MHz base frequency. Note that the system clock may be derived from the programmed internal oscillator divided by 1, 2, 4, or 8 after a divide by 4 stage, as defined by the IFCN bits in register OSCICN. The divide value defaults to 8 fol- lowing a reset, which results in a 1.5 MHz system clock. 19.3.1. Internal Oscillator Suspend Mode When software writes a logic 1 to SUSPEND (OSCICN.5), the internal oscillator is suspended. If the sys- tem clock is derived from the internal oscillator, the input clock to the peripheral or CIP-51 will be stopped until a non-idle USB event is detected or a rising or falling edge occurs on the VBUS signal. Note that the USB transceiver can still detect USB events when it is disabled. When one of the oscillator awakening events occur, the internal oscillator, CIP-51, and affected peripherals resume normal operation. The CPU resumes execution at the instruction following the write to the SUS- PEND bit. Note: The prefetch engine can be turned off in suspend mode to save power. Additionally, both Voltage Regulators (REG0 and REG1) have low-power modes for additional power savings in suspend mode. SFR Definition 19.2. OSCICL: Intern al H-F Oscillator Calibration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name OSCICL[6:0] Type R R/W Reset 0 Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies SFR Address = 0xB3; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 Unused Read = 0; Write = don’t care 6:0 OSCICL[6:0] Internal Oscillator Calibration Bits. These bits determine the internal oscillator period. When set to 0000000b, the H-F oscillator operates at its fastest setting. When set to 1111111b, the H-F oscillator operates at its slowest setting. The reset value is factory calibrated to generate an internal oscillator frequency of 48 MHz. OSCICL should only be changed by firm- ware when the H-F oscillator is disabled (IOSCEN = 0). Rev. 1.4 145

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 19.3. OSCICN: Internal H-F Oscillator Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name IOSCEN IFRDY SUSPEND IFCN[1:0] Type R/W R R/W R R R R/W Reset 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xB2; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 IOSCEN Internal H-F Oscillator Enable Bit. 0: Internal H-F Oscillator Disabled. 1: Internal H-F Oscillator Enabled. 6 IFRDY Internal H-F Oscillator Frequency Ready Flag. 0: Internal H-F Oscillator is not running at programmed frequency. 1: Internal H-F Oscillator is running at programmed frequency. 5 SUSPEND Internal Oscillator Suspend Enable Bit. Setting this bit to logic 1 places the internal oscillator in SUSPEND mode. The inter- nal oscillator resumes operation when one of the SUSPEND mode awakening events occurs. 4:2 Unused Read = 000b; Write = don’t care 1:0 IFCN[1:0] Internal H-F Oscillator Frequency Divider Control Bits. The Internal H-F Oscillator is divided by the IFCN bit setting after a divide-by-4 stage. 00: SYSCLK can be derived from Internal H-F Oscillator divided by 8 (1.5 MHz). 01: SYSCLK can be derived from Internal H-F Oscillator divided by 4 (3 MHz). 10: SYSCLK can be derived from Internal H-F Oscillator divided by 2 (6 MHz). 11: SYSCLK can be derived from Internal H-F Oscillator divided by 1 (12 MHz). 146 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 19.4. Clock Multiplier The C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C device includes a 48 MHz high-frequency oscillator instead of a 12 MHz oscillator and a 4x Clock Multiplier, so the USB0 module can be run directly from the internal high-fre- quency oscillator. For compatibility with C8051F34x and C8051F32x devices however, the CLKMUL regis- ter (SFR Definition 19.4) behaves as if the Clock Multiplier is present and working. SFR Definition 19.4. CLKMUL: Clock Multiplier Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name MULEN MULINIT MULRDY MULSEL[1:0] Type R R R R R R R Reset 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xB9; SFR Page = 0 Bit Name Description 7 MULEN Clock Multiplier Enable Bit. This bit always reads 1. 6 MULINIT Clock Multiplier Initialize Bit. This bit always reads 1. 5 MULRDY Clock Multiplier Ready Bit. This bit always reads 1. 4:2 Unused Read = 000b; Write = don’t care 1:0 MULSEL[1:0] Clock Multiplier Input Select Bits. These bits always read 00. Rev. 1.4 147

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 148 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 19.5. Programmable Internal Low-Frequency (L-F) Oscillator All C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C devices include a programmable low-frequency internal oscillator, which is calibrated to a nominal frequency of 80 kHz. The low-frequency oscillator circuit includes a divider that can be changed to divide the clock by 1, 2, 4, or 8, using the OSCLD bits in the OSCLCN register (see SFR Definition 19.5). Additionally, the OSCLF[3:0] bits can be used to adjust the oscillator’s output frequency. 19.5.1. Calibrating the Internal L-F Oscillator Timers 2 and 3 include capture functions that can be used to capture the oscillator frequency, when run- ning from a known time base. When either Timer 2 or Timer 3 is configured for L-F Oscillator Capture Mode, a falling edge (Timer 2) or rising edge (Timer 3) of the low-frequency oscillator’s output will cause a capture event on the corresponding timer. As a capture event occurs, the current timer value (TMRnH:TMRnL) is copied into the timer reload registers (TMRnRLH:TMRnRLL). By recording the differ- ence between two successive timer capture values, the low-frequency oscillator’s period can be calcu- lated. The OSCLF bits can then be adjusted to produce the desired oscillator frequency. SFR Definition 19.5. OSCLCN: Internal L-F Oscillator Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name OSCLEN OSCLRDY OSCLF[3:0] OSCLD[1:0] Type R/W R R.W R/W Reset 0 0 Varies Varies Varies Varies 0 0 SFR Address = 0x86; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 OSCLEN Internal L-F Oscillator Enable. 0: Internal L-F Oscillator Disabled. 1: Internal L-F Oscillator Enabled. 6 OSCLRDY Internal L-F Oscillator Ready. 0: Internal L-F Oscillator frequency not stabilized. 1: Internal L-F Oscillator frequency stabilized. Note: OSCLRDY is only set back to 0 in the event of a device reset or a change to the OSCLD[1:0] bits. 5:2 OSCLF[3:0] Internal L-F Oscillator Frequency Control Bits. Fine-tune control bits for the Internal L-F oscillator frequency. When set to 0000b, the L-F oscillator operates at its fastest setting. When set to 1111b, the L-F oscillator operates at its slowest setting. The OSCLF bits should only be changed by firmware when the L-F oscillator is disabled (OSCLEN = 0). 1:0 OSCLD[1:0] Internal L-F Oscillator Divider Select. 00: Divide by 8 selected. 01: Divide by 4 selected. 10: Divide by 2 selected. 11: Divide by 1 selected. Rev. 1.4 148

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 149 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 19.6. External Oscillator Drive Circuit The external oscillator circuit may drive an external crystal, ceramic resonator, capacitor, or RC network. A CMOS clock may also provide a clock input. Figure 19.1 shows a block diagram of the four external oscil- lator options. The external oscillator is enabled and configured using the OSCXCN register (see SFR Defi- nition 19.6). Important Note on External Oscillator Usage: Port pins must be configured when using the external oscillator circuit. When the external oscillator drive circuit is enabled in crystal/resonator mode, Port pins P0.2 and P0.3 are used as XTAL1 and XTAL2, respectively. When the external oscillator drive circuit is enabled in capacitor, RC, or CMOS clock mode, Port pin P0.3 is used as XTAL2. The Port I/O Crossbar should be configured to skip the Port pin used by the oscillator circuit; see Section “20.1. Priority Crossbar Decoder” on page 154 for Crossbar configuration. Additionally, when using the external oscillator circuit in crystal/resonator, capacitor, or RC mode, the associated Port pins should be configured as analog inputs. In CMOS clock mode, the associated pin should be configured as a digital input. See Section “20.2. Port I/O Initialization” on page 158 for details on Port input mode selection. The external oscillator output may be selected as the system clock or used to clock some of the digital peripherals (e.g. Timers, PCA, etc.). See the data sheet chapters for each digital peripheral for details. See Section “5. Electrical Characteristics” on page 37 for complete oscillator specifications. 19.6.1. External Crystal Mode If a crystal or ceramic resonator is used as the external oscillator, the crystal/resonator and a 10 Mresis- tor must be wired across the XTAL1 and XTAL2 pins as shown in Figure 19.1, “Crystal Mode”. Appropriate loading capacitors should be added to XTAL1 and XTAL2, and both pins should be configured for analog I/O with the digital output drivers disabled. The capacitors shown in the external crystal configuration provide the load capacitance required by the crystal for correct oscillation. These capacitors are “in series” as seen by the crystal and “in parallel” with the stray capacitance of the XTAL1 and XTAL2 pins. Note: The recommended load capacitance depends upon the crystal and the manufacturer. Refer to the crystal data sheet when completing these calculations. The equation for determining the load capacitance for two capacitors is C C A B C = -----------------------+C L C +C S A B Where: C and C are the capacitors connected to the crystal leads. A B C is the total stray capacitance of the PCB. S The stray capacitance for a typical layout where the crystal is as close as possible to the pins is 2-5 pF per pin. If C and C are the same (C), then the equation becomes A B C C = ----+C L 2 S For example, a tuning-fork crystal of 32 kHz with a recommended load capacitance of 12.5 pF should use the configuration shown in Figure 19.1, Option 1. With a stray capacitance of 3 pF per pin (6 pF total), the 13 pF capacitors yield an equivalent capacitance of 12.5 pF across the crystal, as shown in Figure 19.2. Rev. 1.4 149

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 19.2. External Crystal Example Important Note on External Crystals: Crystal oscillator circuits are quite sensitive to PCB layout. The crystal should be placed as close as possible to the XTAL pins on the device. The traces should be as short as possible and shielded with ground plane from any other traces which could introduce noise or interference. When using an external crystal, the external oscillator drive circuit must be configured by software for Crys- tal Oscillator Mode or Crystal Oscillator Mode with divide by 2 stage. The divide by 2 stage ensures that the clock derived from the external oscillator has a duty cycle of 50%. The External Oscillator Frequency Con- trol value (XFCN) must also be specified based on the crystal frequency (see SFR Definition 19.6). When the crystal oscillator is first enabled, the external oscillator valid detector allows software to deter- mine when the external system clock is valid and running. Switching to the external oscillator before the crystal oscillator has stabilized can result in unpredictable behavior. The recommended procedure for start- ing the crystal is: 1. Configure XTAL1 and XTAL2 for analog I/O. 2. Disable the XTAL1 and XTAL2 digital output drivers by writing 1s to the appropriate bits in the Port Latch register. 3. Configure and enable the external oscillator. 4. Wait at least 1 ms. 5. Poll for XTLVLD > 1. 6. Switch the system clock to the external oscillator. 150 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 19.6.2. External RC Example If an RC network is used as an external oscillator source for the MCU, the circuit should be configured as shown in Figure 19.1, “RC Mode”. The capacitor should be no greater than 100 pF; however, for very small capacitors, the total capacitance may be dominated by parasitic capacitance in the PCB layout. To deter- mine the required External Oscillator Frequency Control value (XFCN) in the OSCXCN Register, first select the RC network value to produce the desired frequency of oscillation, according to Equation , where f = the frequency of oscillation in MHz, C = the capacitor value in pF, and R = the pull-up resistor value in k. 3 f = 1.2310 §RC Equation 19.1. RC Mode Oscillator Frequency For example: If the frequency desired is 100 kHz, let R = 246 k and C = 50 pF: f = 1.23( 103 ) / RC = 1.23 ( 103 ) / [ 246 x 50 ] = 0.1 MHz = 100 kHz Referring to the table in SFR Definition 19.6, the required XFCN setting is 010b. 19.6.3. External Capacitor Example If a capacitor is used as an external oscillator for the MCU, the circuit should be configured as shown in Figure 19.1, “C Mode”. The capacitor should be no greater than 100 pF; however, for very small capaci- tors, the total capacitance may be dominated by parasitic capacitance in the PCB layout. To determine the required External Oscillator Frequency Control value (XFCN) in the OSCXCN Register, select the capaci- tor to be used and find the frequency of oscilla tion according to Equation , where f = the frequency of oscil- lation in MHz, C = the capacitor value in pF, and V = the MCU power supply in Volts. DD f = KFCV  DD Equation 19.2. C Mode Oscillator Frequency For example: Assume V = 3.0 V and f = 150 kHz: DD f = KF / (C x VDD) 0.150 MHz = KF / (C x 3.0) Since the frequency of roughly 150 kHz is desired, select the K Factor from the table in SFR Definition 19.6 (OSCXCN) as KF = 22: 0.150 MHz = 22 / (C x 3.0) C x 3.0 = 22 / 0.150 MHz C = 146.6 / 3.0 pF = 48.8 pF Therefore, the XFCN value to use in this example is 011b and C = 50 pF. Rev. 1.4 151

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 19.6. OSCXCN: External Oscillator Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name XCLKVLD XOSCMD[2:0] XFCN[2:0] Type R R/W R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xB1; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 XCLKVLD External Oscillator Valid Flag. Provides External Oscillator status and is valid at all times for all modes of opera- tion except External CMOS Clock Mode and External CMOS Clock Mode with divide by 2. In these modes, XCLKVLD always returns 0. 0: External Oscillator is unused or not yet stable. 1: External Oscillator is running and stable. 6:4 XOSCMD[2:0] External Oscillator Mode Select. 00x: External Oscillator circuit off. 010: External CMOS C lock Mode. 011: External CMOS Clock Mode with divide-by-2 stage. 100: RC Oscillator Mode with divide-by-2 stage. 101: Capacitor Oscillator Mode with divide-by-2 stage. 110: Crystal Oscillator Mode. 111: Crystal Oscillator Mode with divide-by-2 stage. 3 Unused Read = 0; Write = don’t care 2:0 XFCN[2:0] External Oscillator Frequency Control Bits. Set according to the desired frequency for RC mode. Set according to the desired K Factor for C mode. XFCN Crystal Mode RC Mode C Mode 000 f 20 kHz f 25 kHz K Factor = 0.87 001 20 kHz f 58 kHz 25 kHz f 50 kHz K Factor = 2.6 010 58 kHz f 155 kHz 50 kHz f 100 kHz K Factor = 7.7 011 155 kHz f 415 kHz 100 kHz f 200 kHz K Factor = 22 100 415 kHz f 1.1 MHz 200 kHz f 400 kHz K Factor = 65 101 1.1 MHz f 3.1 MHz 400 kHz f 800 kHz K Factor = 180 110 3.1 MHz f 8.2 MHz 800 kHz f 1.6 MHz K Factor = 664 111 8.2 MHz f 25 MHz 1.6 MHz f 3.2 MHz K Factor = 1590 152 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 20. Port Input/Output Digital and analog resources are available through 40 I/O pins (C8051F380/2/4/6) or 25 I/O pins (C8051F381/3/5/7/C). Port pins are organized as shown in Figure 20.1. Each of the Port pins can be defined as general-purpose I/O (GPIO) or analog input; Port pins P0.0-P3.7 can be assigned to one of the internal digital resources as shown in Figure 20.3. The designer has complete control over which functions are assigned, limited only by the number of physical I/O pins. This resource assignment flexibility is achieved through the use of a Priority Crossbar Decoder. Note that the state of a Port I/O pin can always be read in the corresponding Port latch, regardless of the Crossbar settings. The Crossbar assigns the selected internal digital resources to the I/O pins based on the Priority Decoder (Figure 20.3 and Figure 20.4). The registers XBR0, XBR1, and XBR2 defined in SFR Definition 20.1, SFR Definition 20.2, and SFR Definition 20.3, are used to select internal digital functions. All Port I/Os are 5 V tolerant (refer to Figure 20.2 for the Port cell circuit). The Port I/O cells are configured as either push-pull or open-drain in the Port Output Mode registers (PnMDOUT, where n = 0,1,2,3,4). Figure 20.1. Port I/O Functional Block Diagram (Port 0 through Port 3) Rev. 1.4 153

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 20.2. Port I/O Cell Block Diagram 20.1. Priority Crossbar Decoder The Priority Crossbar Decoder (Figure 20.3) assigns a priority to each I/O function, starting at the top with UART0. When a digital resource is selected, the least-significant unassigned Port pin is assigned to that resource (excluding UART0, which is always at pins 4 and 5). If a Port pin is assigned, the Crossbar skips that pin when assigning the next selected resource. Additionally, the Crossbar will skip Port pins whose associated bits in the PnSKIP registers are set. The PnSKIP registers allow software to skip Port pins that are to be used for analog input, dedicated functions, or GPIO. If a Port pin is claimed by a peripheral without use of the Crossbar, its corresponding PnSKIP bit should be set. This applies to the VREF signal, external oscillator pins (XTAL1, XTAL2), the ADC’s external conver- sion start signal (CNVSTR), EMIF control signals, and any selected ADC or Comparator inputs. The PnSKIP registers may also be used to skip pins to be used as GPIO. The Crossbar skips selected pins as if they were already assigned, and moves to the next unassigned pin. Figure 20.3 shows all the possible pins available to each peripheral. Figure 20.4 shows an example Crossbar configuration with no Port pins skipped. Figure 20.5 shows the same Crossbar example with pins P0.2, P0.3, and P1.0 skipped. Registers XBR0, XBR1, and XBR2 are used to assign the digital I/O resources to the physical I/O Port pins. Note that when either SMBus is selected, the Crossbar assigns both pins associated with the SMBus (SDA and SCL); when either UART is selected, the Crossbar assigns both pins associated with the UART (TX and RX). UART0 pin assignments are fixed for bootloading purposes: UART TX0 is always assigned to P0.4; UART RX0 is always assigned to P0.5. Standard Port I/Os appear contiguously after the prioritized functions have been assigned. Important Note: The SPI can be operated in either 3-wire or 4-wire modes, depending on the state of the NSSMD1-NSSMD0 bits in register SPI0CN. According to the SPI mode, the NSS signal may or may not be routed to a Port pin. 154 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 20.3. Peripheral Availability on Port I/O Pins Rev. 1.4 155

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 20.4. Crossbar Priority Decoder in Example Configuration (No Pins Skipped) 156 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 20.5. Crossbar Priority Decoder in Example Configuration (3 Pins Skipped) Rev. 1.4 157

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 20.2. Port I/O Initialization Port I/O initialization consists of the following steps: 1. Select the input mode (analog or digital) for all Port pins, using the Port Input Mode register (PnMDIN). 2. Select the output mode (open-drain or push-pull) for all Port pins, using the Port Output Mode register (PnMDOUT). 3. Select any pins to be skipped by the I/O Crossbar using the Port Skip registers (PnSKIP). 4. Assign Port pins to desired peripherals (XBR0, XBR1). 5. Enable the Crossbar (XBARE = 1). All Port pins must be configured as either analog or digital inputs. Any pins to be used as Comparator or ADC inputs should be configured as an analog inputs. When a pin is configured as an analog input, its weak pull-up, digital driver, and digital receiver are disabled. This process saves power and reduces noise on the analog input. Pins configured as digital inputs may still be used by analog peripherals; however this practice is not recommended. To configure a Port pin for digital input, write 0 to the corresponding bit in register PnMDOUT, and write 1 to the corresponding Port latch (register Pn). Additionally, all analog input pins should be configured to be skipped by the Crossbar (accomplished by setting the associated bits in PnSKIP). Port input mode is set in the PnMDIN register, where a 1 indicates a digital input, and a 0 indicates an analog input. All pins default to digital inputs on reset. The output driver characteristics of the I/O pins are defined using the Port Output Mode registers (PnMD- OUT). Each Port Output driver can be configured as either open drain or push-pull. This selection is required even for the digital resources selected in the XBRn registers, and is not automatic. The only exception to this are the SMBus (SDA, SCL, SDA1 and SCL1) pins, which are configured as open-drain regardless of the PnMDOUT settings. When the WEAKPUD bit in XBR1 is 0, a weak pull-up is enabled for all Port I/O configured as open-drain. WEAKPUD does not affect the push-pull Port I/O. Furthermore, the weak pull-up is turned off on an output that is driving a 0 to avoid unnecessary power dissipation. Registers XBR0 and XBR1 must be loaded with the appropriate values to select the digital I/O functions required by the design. Setting the XBARE bit in XBR1 to 1 enables the Crossbar. Until the Crossbar is enabled, the external pins remain as standard Port I/O (in input mode), regardless of the XBRn Register settings. For given XBRn Register settings, one can determine the I/O pin-out using the Priority Decode Table; as an alternative, the Configuration Wizard utility of the Silicon Labs IDE software will determine the Port I/O pin-assignments based on the XBRn Register settings. Important Note: The Crossbar must be enabled to use Ports P0, P1, P2, and P3 as standard Port I/O in output mode. These Port output drivers are disabled while the Crossbar is disabled. Port 4 always func- tions as standard GPIO. 158 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 20.1. XBR0: Port I/O Crossbar Register 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CP1AE CP1E CP0AE CP0E SYSCKE SMB0E SPI0E URT0E Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xE1; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 CP1AE Comparator1 Asynchronous Output Enable. 0: Asynchronous CP1A unavailable at Port pin. 1: Asynchronous CP1A routed to Port pin. 6 CP1E Comparator1 Output Enable. 0: CP1 unavailable at Port pin. 1: CP1 routed to Port pin. 5 CP0AE Comparator0 Asynchronous Output Enable. 0: Asynchronous CP0A unavailable at Port pin. 1: Asynchronous CP0A routed to Port pin. 4 CP0E Comparator0 Output Enable. 0: CP0 unavailable at Port pin. 1: CP0 routed to Port pin. 3 SYSCKE SYSCLK Output Enable. 0: SYSCLK unavailable at Port pin. 1: SYSCLK output routed to Port pin. 2 SMB0E SMBus I/O Enable. 0: SMBus I/O unavailable at Port pins. 1: SMBus I/O routed to Port pins. 1 SPI0E SPI I/O Enable. 0: SPI I/O unavailable at Port pins. 1: SPI I/O routed to Port pins. Note that the SPI can be assigned either 3 or 4 GPIO pins. 0 URT0E UART I/O Output Enable. 0: UART I/O unavailable at Port pin. 1: UART TX0, RX0 routed to Port pins P0.4 and P0.5. Rev. 1.4 159

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 20.2. XBR1: Port I/O Crossbar Register 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name WEAKPUD XBARE T1E T0E ECIE PCA0ME[2:0] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xE2; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 WEAKPUD Port I/O Weak Pullup Disable. 0: Weak Pullups enabled (except for Ports whose I/O are configured for analog mode). 1: Weak Pullups disabled. 6 XBARE Crossbar Enable. 0: Crossbar disabled. 1: Crossbar enabled. 5 T1E T1 Enable. 0: T1 unavailable at Por t pin. 1: T1 routed to Port pin. 4 T0E T0 Enable. 0: T0 unavailable at Port pin. 1: T0 routed to Port pin. 3 ECIE PCA0 External Counter Input Enable. 0: ECI unavailable at Port pin. 1: ECI routed to Port pin. 2:0 PCA0ME[2:0] PCA Module I/O Enable Bits. 000: All PCA I/O unavailable at Port pins. 001: CEX0 routed to Port pin. 010: CEX0, CEX1 routed to Port pins. 011: CEX0, CEX1, CEX2 routed to Port pins. 100: CEX0, CEX1, CEX2, CEX3 routed to Port pins. 101: CEX0, CEX1, CEX2, CEX3 routed to Port pins. 11x: Reserved. 160 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 20.3. XBR2: Port I/O Crossbar Register 2 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SMB1E URT1E Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xE3; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:2 Reserved Must write 000000b 1 SMB1E SMBus1 I/O Enable. 0: SMBus1 I/O unavailable at Port pins. 1: SMBus1 I/O routed to Port pins. 0 URT1E UART1 I/OEnable. 0: UART1 I/O unavailable at Port pins. 1: UART1 TX1, RX1 routed to Port pins. 20.3. General Purpose Port I/O Port pins that remain unassigned by the Crossbar and are not used by analog peripherals can be used for general purpose I/O. Ports 3-0 are accessed through corresponding special function registers (SFRs) that are both byte addressable and bit addressable. Port 4 (C8051F380/2/4/6 only) uses an SFR which is byte-addressable. When writing to a Port, the value written to the SFR is latched to maintain the output data value at each pin. When reading, the logic levels of the Port's input pins are returned regardless of the XBRn settings (i.e., even when the pin is assigned to another signal by the Crossbar, the Port register can always read its corresponding Port I/O pin). The exception to this is the execution of the read-modify-write instructions. The read-modify-write instructions when operating on a Port SFR are the following: ANL, ORL, XRL, JBC, CPL, INC, DEC, DJNZ and MOV, CLR or SETB, when the destination is an individual bit in a Port SFR. For these instructions, the value of the register (not the pin) is read, modified, and written back to the SFR. Rev. 1.4 161

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 20.4. P0: Port 0 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P0[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address = 0x80; SFR Page = All Pages; Bit Addressable Bit Name Description Write Read 7:0 P0[7:0] Port 0 Data. 0: Set output latch to logic 0: P0.n Port pin is logic Sets the Port latch logic LOW. LOW. value or reads the Port pin 1: Set output latch to logic 1: P0.n Port pin is logic logic state in Port cells con- HIGH. HIGH. figured for digital I/O. SFR Definition 20.5. P0MDIN: Port 0 Input Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P0MDIN[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address = 0xF1; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 P0MDIN[7:0] Analog Configuration Bits for P0.7–P0.0 (respectively). Port pins configured for analog mode have their weak pullup, digital driver, and digital receiver disabled. 0: Corresponding P0.n pin is configured for analog mode. 1: Corresponding P0.n pin is not configured for analog mode. 162 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 20.6. P0MDOUT: Port 0 Output Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P0MDOUT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xA4; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 P0MDOUT[7:0] Output Configuration Bits for P0.7–P0.0 (respectively). These bits are ignored if the corresponding bit in register P0MDIN is logic 0. 0: Corresponding P0.n Output is open-drain. 1: Corresponding P0.n Output is push-pull. SFR Definition 20.7. P0SKIP: Port 0 Skip Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P0SKIP[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xD4; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 P0SKIP[7:0] Port 0 Crossbar Skip Enable Bits. These bits select Port 0 pins to be skipped by the Crossbar Decoder. Port pins used for analog, special functions or GPIO should be skipped by the Crossbar. 0: Corresponding P0.n pin is not skipped by the Crossbar. 1: Corresponding P0.n pin is skipped by the Crossbar. Rev. 1.4 163

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 20.8. P1: Port 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P1[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address = 0x90; SFR Page = All Pages; Bit Addressable Bit Name Description Write Read 7:0 P1[7:0] Port 1 Data. 0: Set output latch to logic 0: P1.n Port pin is logic Sets the Port latch logic LOW. LOW. value or reads the Port pin 1: Set output latch to logic 1: P1.n Port pin is logic logic state in Port cells con- HIGH. HIGH. figured for digital I/O. SFR Definition 20.9. P1MDIN: Port 1 Input Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P1MDIN[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1* 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address = 0xF2; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 P1MDIN[7:0] Analog Configuration Bits for P1.7–P1.0 (respectively). Port pins configured for analog mode have their weak pullup, digital driver, and digital receiver disabled. 0: Corresponding P1.n pin is configured for analog mode. 1: Corresponding P1.n pin is not configured for analog mode. 164 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 20.10. P1MDOUT: Port 1 Output Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P1MDOUT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xA5; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 P1MDOUT[7:0] Output Configuration Bits for P1.7–P1.0 (respectively). These bits are ignored if the corresponding bit in register P1MDIN is logic 0. 0: Corresponding P1.n Output is open-drain. 1: Corresponding P1.n Output is push-pull. SFR Definition 20.11. P1SKIP: Port 1 Skip Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P1SKIP[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xD5; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 P1SKIP[7:0] Port 1 Crossbar Skip Enable Bits. These bits select Port 1 pins to be skipped by the Crossbar Decoder. Port pins used for analog, special functions or GPIO should be skipped by the Crossbar. 0: Corresponding P1.n pin is not skipped by the Crossbar. 1: Corresponding P1.n pin is skipped by the Crossbar. Rev. 1.4 165

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 20.12. P2: Port 2 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P2[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address = 0xA0; SFR Page = All Pages; Bit Addressable Bit Name Description Write Read 7:0 P2[7:0] Port 2 Data. 0: Set output latch to logic 0: P2.n Port pin is logic Sets the Port latch logic LOW. LOW. value or reads the Port pin 1: Set output latch to logic 1: P2.n Port pin is logic logic state in Port cells con- HIGH. HIGH. figured for digital I/O. SFR Definition 20.13. P2MDIN: Port 2 Input Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P2MDIN[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address = 0xF3; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 P2MDIN[7:0] Analog Configuration Bits for P2.7–P2.0 (respectively). Port pins configured for analog mode have their weak pullup, digital driver, and digital receiver disabled. 0: Corresponding P2.n pin is configured for analog mode. 1: Corresponding P2.n pin is not configured for analog mode. 166 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 20.14. P2MDOUT: Port 2 Output Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P2MDOUT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xA6; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 P2MDOUT[7:0] Output Configuration Bits for P2.7–P2.0 (respectively). These bits are ignored if the corresponding bit in register P2MDIN is logic 0. 0: Corresponding P2.n Output is open-drain. 1: Corresponding P2.n Output is push-pull. SFR Definition 20.15. P2SKIP: Port 2 Skip Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P2SKIP[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xD6; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 P2SKIP[3:0] Port 2 Crossbar Skip Enable Bits. These bits select Port 2 pins to be skipped by the Crossbar Decoder. Port pins used for analog, special functions or GPIO should be skipped by the Crossbar. 0: Corresponding P2.n pin is not skipped by the Crossbar. 1: Corresponding P2.n pin is skipped by the Crossbar. Rev. 1.4 167

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 20.16. P3: Port 3 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P3[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address = 0xB0; SFR Page = All Pages; Bit Addressable Bit Name Description Write Read 7:0 P3[7:0] Port 3 Data. 0: Set output latch to logic 0: P3.n Port pin is logic Sets the Port latch logic LOW. LOW. value or reads the Port pin 1: Set output latch to logic 1: P3.n Port pin is logic logic state in Port cells con- HIGH. HIGH. figured for digital I/O. SFR Definition 20.17. P3MDIN: Port 3 Input Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P3MDIN[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address = 0xF4; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 P3MDIN[7:0] Analog Configuration Bits for P3.7–P3.0 (respectively). Port pins configured for analog mode have their weak pullup, digital driver, and digital receiver disabled. 0: Corresponding P3.n pin is configured for analog mode. 1: Corresponding P3.n pin is not configured for analog mode. 168 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 20.18. P3MDOUT: Port 3 Output Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P3MDOUT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xA7; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 P3MDOUT[7:0] Output Configuration Bits for P3.7–P3.0 (respectively). These bits are ignored if the corresponding bit in register P3MDIN is logic 0. 0: Corresponding P3.n Output is open-drain. 1: Corresponding P3.n Output is push-pull. SFR Definition 20.19. P3SKIP: Port 3 Skip Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P3SKIP[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xDF; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 P3SKIP[3:0] Port 3 Crossbar Skip Enable Bits. These bits select Port 3 pins to be skipped by the Crossbar Decoder. Port pins used for analog, special functions or GPIO should be skipped by the Crossbar. 0: Corresponding P3.n pin is not skipped by the Crossbar. 1: Corresponding P3.n pin is skipped by the Crossbar. Rev. 1.4 169

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 20.20. P4: Port 4 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P4[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address = 0xC7; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Description Write Read 7:0 P4[7:0] Port 4 Data. 0: Set output latch to logic 0: P4.n Port pin is logic Sets the Port latch logic LOW. LOW. value or reads the Port pin 1: Set output latch to logic 1: P4.n Port pin is logic logic state in Port cells con- HIGH. HIGH. figured for digital I/O. SFR Definition 20.21. P4MDIN: Port 4 Input Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P4MDIN[7:0] Type R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SFR Address = 0xF5; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 P4MDIN[7:0] Analog Configuration Bits for P4.7–P4.0 (respectively). Port pins configured for analog mode have their weak pullup, digital driver, and digital receiver disabled. 0: Corresponding P4.n pin is configured for analog mode. 1: Corresponding P4.n pin is not configured for analog mode. 170 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 20.22. P4MDOUT: Port 4 Output Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name P4MDOUT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xAE; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 P4MDOUT[7:0] Output Configuration Bits for P4.7–P4.0 (respectively). These bits are ignored if the corresponding bit in register P4MDIN is logic 0. 0: Corresponding P4.n Output is open-drain. 1: Corresponding P4.n Output is push-pull. Rev. 1.4 171

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 21. Universal Serial Bus Controller (USB0) C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C devices include a complete Full/Low Speed USB function for USB peripheral implementations. The USB Function Controller (USB0) consists of a Serial Interface Engine (SIE), USB Transceiver (including matching resistors and configurable pull-up resistors), 1 kB FIFO block, and clock recovery mechanism for crystal-less operation. No external components are required. The USB Function Controller and Transceiver is Universal Serial Bus Specification 2.0 compliant. Figure 21.1. USB0 Block Diagram Important Note: This document assumes a comprehensive understanding of the USB Protocol. Terms and abbreviations used in this document are defined in the USB Specification. We encourage you to review the latest version of the USB Specification before proceeding. Note: The C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C cannot be used as a USB Host device. 21.1. Endpoint Addressing A total of eight endpoint pipes are available. The control endpoint (Endpoint0) always functions as a bi- directional IN/OUT endpoint. The other endpoints are implemented as three pairs of IN/OUT endpoint pipes: Rev. 1.4 172

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 21.1. Endpoint Addressing Scheme Endpoint Associated Pipes USB Protocol Address Endpoint0 Endpoint0 IN 0x00 Endpoint0 OUT 0x00 Endpoint1 Endpoint1 IN 0x81 Endpoint1 OUT 0x01 Endpoint2 Endpoint2 IN 0x82 Endpoint2 OUT 0x02 Endpoint3 Endpoint3 IN 0x83 Endpoint3 OUT 0x03 21.2. USB Transceiver The USB Transceiver is configured via the USB0XCN register shown in SFR Definition 21.1. This configu- ration includes Transceiver enable/disable, pull-up resistor enable/disable, and device speed selection (Full or Low Speed). When bit SPEED = 1, USB0 operates as a Full Speed USB function, and the on-chip pull-up resistor (if enabled) appears on the D+ pin. When bit SPEED = 0, USB0 operates as a Low Speed USB function, and the on-chip pull-up resistor (if enabled) appears on the D- pin. Bits4-0 of register USB0XCN can be used for Transceiver testing as described in SFR Definition 21.1. The pull-up resistor is enabled only when VBUS is present (see Section “9.1.2. VBUS Detection” on page 74 for details on VBUS detection). Important Note: The USB clock should be ac tive before the Transceiver is enabled. 173 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 21.1. USB0XCN: USB0 Transceiver Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PREN PHYEN SPEED PHYTST[1:0] DFREC Dp Dn Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R R R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xD7; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 PREN Internal Pull-up Resistor Enable. The location of the pull-up resistor (D+ or D-) is determined by the SPEED bit. 0: Internal pull-up resistor disabled (device effectively detached from USB network). 1: Internal pull-up resistor enabled when VBUS is present (device attached to the USB network). 6 PHYEN Physical Layer Enable. 0: USB0 physical layer Transceiver disabled (suspend). 1: USB0 physical layer Transceiver enabled (normal). 5 SPEED USB0 Speed Select. This bit selects the USB0 speed. 0: USB0 operates as a Low Speed device. If enabled, the internal pull-up resistor appears on the D– line. 1: USB0 operates as a Full Speed device. If enabled, the internal pull-up resistor appears on the D+ line. 4:3 PHYTST[1:0] Physical Layer Test Bits. 00: Mode 0: Normal (non-test mode) (D+ = X, D- = X) 01: Mode 1: Differential 1 Forced (D+ = 1, D- = 0) 10: Mode 2: Differential 0 Forced (D+ = 0, D- = 1) 11: Mode 3: Single-Ended 0 Forced (D+ = 0, D– = 0) 2 DFREC Differential Receiver Bit The state of this bit indicates the current differential value present on the D+ and D- lines when PHYEN = 1. 0: Differential 0 signalling on the bus. 1: Differential 1 signalling on the bus. 1 Dp D+ Signal Status. This bit indicates the current logic level of the D+ pin. 0: D+ signal currently at logic 0. 1: D+ signal currently at logic 1. 0 Dn D- Signal Status. This bit indicates the current logic level of the D- pin. 0: D- signal currently at logic 0. 1: D- signal currently at logic 1. Rev. 1.4 174

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 21.3. USB Register Access The USB0 controller registers listed in Table 21.2 are accessed through two SFRs: USB0 Address (USB0ADR) and USB0 Data (USB0DAT). The USB0ADR register selects which USB register is targeted by reads/writes of the USB0DAT register. See Figure 21.2. Endpoint control/status registers are accessed by first writing the USB register INDEX with the target end- point number. Once the target endpoint number is written to the INDEX register, the control/status registers associated with the target endpoint may be accessed. See the “Indexed Registers” section of Table 21.2 for a list of endpoint control/status registers. Important Note: The USB clock must be active when accessing USB registers. Figure 21.2. USB0 Register Access Scheme 175 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 21.2. USB0ADR: USB0 Indirect Address Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name BUSY AUTORD USBADDR[5:0] Type R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x96; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Description Write Read 7 BUSY USB0 Register Read 0: No effect. 0: USB0DAT register data Busy Flag. 1: A USB0 indirect regis- is valid. This bit is used during ter read is initiated at the 1: USB0 is busy access- indirect USB0 register address specified by the ing an indirect register; accesses. USBADDR bits. USB0DAT register data is invalid. 6 AUTORD USB0 Register Auto-read Flag. This bit is used for block FIFO reads. 0: BUSY must be written manually for each USB0 indirect register read. 1: The next indirect register read will automatically be initiated when software reads USB0DAT (USBADDR bits will not be changed). 5:0 USBADDR[5:0] USB0 Indirect Register Address Bits. These bits hold a 6-bit address used to indirectly access the USB0 core registers. Table 21.2 lists the USB0 core registers and their indirect addresses. Reads and writes to USB0DAT will target the register indicated by the USBADDR bits. Rev. 1.4 176

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 21.3. USB0DAT: USB0 Data Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name USB0DAT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x97; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Description Write Read 7:0 USB0DAT[7:0] USB0 Data Bits. Write Procedure: Read Procedure: This SFR is used to indi- 1. Poll for BUSY 1. Poll for BUSY rectly read and write (USB0ADR.7) => 0. (USB0ADR.7) => 0. USB0 registers. 2. Load the target USB0 2. Load the target USB0 register address into the register address into the USBADDR bits in register USBADDR bits in register USB0ADR. USB0ADR. 3. Write data to USB0DAT. 3. Write 1 to the BUSY bit 4. Repeat (Step 2 may be in register USB0ADR skipped when writing to (steps 2 and 3 can be per- the same USB0 register). formed in the same write). 4. Poll for BUSY (USB0ADR.7) => 0. 5. Read data from USB0- DAT. 6. Repeat from Step 2 (Step 2 may be skipped when reading the same USB0 register; Step 3 may be skipped when the AUTORD bit (USB0ADR.6) is logic 1). 177 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 21.2. USB0 Controller Registers USB Register USB Register Description Page Number Name Address Interrupt Registers IN1INT 0x02 Endpoint0 and Endpoints1-3 IN Interrupt Flags 187 OUT1INT 0x04 Endpoints1-3 OUT Interrupt Flags 188 CMINT 0x06 Common USB Interrupt Flags 189 IN1IE 0x07 Endpoint0 and Endpoints1-3 IN Interrupt Enables 190 OUT1IE 0x09 Endpoints1-3 OUT Interrupt Enables 191 CMIE 0x0B Common USB Interrupt Enables 192 Common Registers FADDR 0x00 Function Address 183 POWER 0x01 Power Management 185 FRAMEL 0x0C Frame Number Low Byte 186 FRAMEH 0x0D Frame Number High Byte 186 INDEX 0x0E Endpoint Index Selection 179 CLKREC 0x0F Clock Recovery Control 180 EENABLE 0x1E Endpoint Enable 197 FIFOn 0x20-0x23 Endpoints0-3 FIFOs 182 Indexed Registers E0CSR Endpoint0 Control / Status 195 0x11 EINCSRL Endpoint IN Control / Status Low Byte 199 EINCSRH 0x12 Endpoint IN Control / Status High Byte 200 EOUTCSRL 0x14 Endpoint OUT Control / Status Low Byte 202 EOUTCSRH 0x15 Endpoint OUT Control / Status High Byte 203 E0CNT Number of Received Bytes in Endpoint0 FIFO 196 0x16 EOUTCNTL Endpoint OUT Packet Count Low Byte 203 EOUTCNTH 0x17 Endpoint OUT Packet Count High Byte 204 Rev. 1.4 178

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.4. INDEX: USB0 Endpoint Index Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name EPSEL[3:0] Type R R R R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x0E Bit Name Function 7:4 Unused Read = 0000b. Write = don’t care. 3:0 EPSEL[3:0] Endpoint Select Bits. These bits select which endpoint is targeted when indexed USB0 registers are accessed. 0000: Endpoint 0 0001: Endpoint 1 0010: Endpoint 2 0011: Endpoint 3 0100-1111: Reserved. 21.4. USB Clock Configuration USB0 is capable of communication as a Full or Low Speed USB function. Communication speed is selected via the SPEED bit in SFR USB0XCN. When operating as a Low Speed function, the USB0 clock must be 6 MHz. When operating as a Full Speed function, the USB0 clock must be 48 MHz. Clock options are described in Section “19. Oscillators and Clock Selection” on page 142. The USB0 clock is selected via SFR CLKSEL (see SFR Definition 19.1). Clock Recovery circuitry uses the incoming USB data stream to adjust the internal oscillator; this allows the internal oscillator to meet the requirements for USB clock tolerance. Clock Recovery should be used in the following configurations: Communication Speed USB Clock Full Speed Internal Oscillator Low Speed Internal Oscillator / 8 When operating USB0 as a Low Speed function with Clock Recovery, software must write 1 to the CRLOW bit to enable Low Speed Clock Recovery. Clock Recovery is typically not necessary in Low Speed mode. Single Step Mode can be used to help the Clock Recovery circuitry to lock when high noise levels are pres- ent on the USB network. This mode is not required (or recommended) in typical USB environments. 179 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.5. CLKREC: Clock Recovery Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CRE CRSSEN CRLOW Type R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 USB Register Address = 0x0F Bit Name Function 7 CRE Clock Recovery Enable Bit. This bit enables/disables the USB clock recovery feature. 0: Clock recovery disabled. 1: Clock recovery enabled. 6 CRSSEN Clock Recovery Single Step. This bit forces the oscillator calibration into single-step mode during clock recovery. 0: Normal calibration mode. 1: Single step mode. 5 CRLOW Low Speed Clock Recovery Mode. This bit must be set to 1 if clock recovery is used when operating as a Low Speed USB device. 0: Full Speed Mode. 1: Low Speed Mode. 4:0 Reserved Must Write = 01111b. Rev. 1.4 180

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 21.5. FIFO Management 1024 bytes of on-chip XRAM are used as FIFO space for USB0. This FIFO space is split between End- points0-3 as shown in Figure 21.3. FIFO space allocated for Endpoints1-3 is configurable as IN, OUT, or both (Split Mode: half IN, half OUT). Figure 21.3. USB FIFO Allocation 21.5.1. FIFO Split Mode The FIFO space for Endpoints1-3 can be split such that the upper half of the FIFO space is used by the IN endpoint, and the lower half is used by the OUT endpoint. For example: if the Endpoint3 FIFO is configured for Split Mode, the upper 256 bytes (0x0540 to 0x063F) are used by Endpoint3 IN and the lower 256 bytes (0x0440 to 0x053F) are used by Endpoint3 OUT. If an endpoint FIFO is not configured for Split Mode, that endpoint IN/OUT pair’s FIFOs are combined to form a single IN or OUT FIFO. In this case only one direction of the endpoint IN/OUT pair may be used at a time. The endpoint direction (IN/OUT) is determined by the DIRSEL bit in the corresponding endpoint’s EINCSRH register (see SFR Definition 21.13). 181 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 21.5.2. FIFO Double Buffering FIFO slots for Endpoints1-3 can be configured for double-buffered mode. In this mode, the maximum packet size is halved and the FIFO may contain two packets at a time. This mode is available for End- points1-3. When an endpoint is configured for Split Mode, double buffering may be enabled for the IN End- point and/or the OUT endpoint. When Split Mode is not enabled, double-buffering may be enabled for the entire endpoint FIFO. See Table 21.3 for a list of maximum packet sizes for each FIFO configuration. Table 21.3. FIFO Configurations Endpoint Split Mode Maximum IN Packet Size Maximum OUT Packet Size Number Enabled? (Double Buffer Disabled / (Double Buffer Disabled / Enabled) Enabled) 0 N/A 64 N 128 / 64 1 Y 64 / 32 64 / 32 N 256 / 128 2 Y 128 / 64 128 / 64 N 512 / 256 3 Y 256 / 128 256 / 128 21.5.1. FIFO Access Each endpoint FIFO is accessed through a corresponding FIFOn register. A read of an endpoint FIFOn register unloads one byte from the FIFO; a wri te of an endpoint FIFOn register loads one byte into the end- point FIFO. When an endpoint FIFO is configured for Split Mode, a read of the endpoint FIFOn register unloads one byte from the OUT endpoint FIFO; a write of the endpoint FIFOn register loads one byte into the IN endpoint FIFO. USB Register Definition 21.6. FIFOn: USB0 Endpoint FIFO Access Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name FIFODATA[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x20-0x23 Bit Name Function 7:0 FIFODATA[7:0] Endpoint FIFO Access Bits. USB Addresses 0x20-0x23 provide access to the 4 pairs of endpoint FIFOs: 0x20: Endpoint 0 0x21: Endpoint 1 0x22: Endpoint 2 0x23: Endpoint 3 Writing to the FIFO address loads data into the IN FIFO for the corresponding endpoint. Reading from the FIFO address unloads data from the OUT FIFO for the corresponding endpoint. Rev. 1.4 182

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 21.6. Function Addressing The FADDR register holds the current USB0 function address. Software should write the host-assigned 7- bit function address to the FADDR register when received as part of a SET_ADDRESS command. A new address written to FADDR will not take effect (USB0 will not respond to the new address) until the end of the current transfer (typically following the status phase of the SET_ADDRESS command transfer). The UPDATE bit (FADDR.7) is set to 1 by hardware when software writes a new address to the FADDR regis- ter. Hardware clears the UPDATE bit when the new address takes effect as described above. USB Register Definition 21.7. FADDR: USB0 Function Address Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name UPDATE FADDR[6:0] Type R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x00 Bit Name Function 7 UPDATE Function Address Update Bit. Set to 1 when software wr ites the FADDR register. USB0 clears this bit to 0 when the new address takes effect. 0: The last address written to FADDR is in effect. 1: The last address written to FADDR is not yet in effect. 6:0 FADDR[6:0] Function Address Bits. Holds the 7-bit function address for USB0. This address should be written by software when the SET_ADDRESS standard device request is received on Endpoint0. The new address takes effect when the device request completes. 21.7. Function Configuration and Control The USB register POWER (USB Register Definition 21.8) is used to configure and control USB0 at the device level (enable/disable, Reset/Suspend/Resume handling, etc.). USB Reset: The USBRST bit (POWER.3) is set to 1 by hardware when Reset signaling is detected on the bus. Upon this detection, the following occur: 1. The USB0 Address is reset (FADDR = 0x00). 2. Endpoint FIFOs are flushed. 3. Control/status registers are reset to 0x00 (E0CSR, EINCSRL, EINCSRH, EOUTCSRL, EOUTCSRH). 4. USB register INDEX is reset to 0x00. 5. All USB interrupts (excluding the Suspend interrupt) are enabled and their corresponding flags cleared. 6. A USB Reset interrupt is generated if enabled. Writing a 1 to the USBRST bit will generate an asynchronous USB0 reset. All USB registers are reset to their default values following this asynchronous reset. Suspend Mode: With Suspend Detection enabled (SUSEN = 1), USB0 will enter Suspend Mode when Suspend signaling is detected on the bus. An interrupt will be generated if enabled (SUSINTE = 1). The 183 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Suspend Interrupt Service Routine (ISR) should perform application-specific configuration tasks such as disabling appropriate peripherals and/or configuring clock sources for low power modes. See Section “19.3. Programmable Internal High-Frequency (H-F) Oscillator” on page 145 for more details on internal oscillator configuration, including the Suspend mode feature of the internal oscillator. USB0 exits Suspend mode when any of the following occur: (1) Resume signaling is detected or gener- ated, (2) Reset signaling is detected, or (3) a device or USB reset occurs. If suspended, the internal oscil- lator will exit Suspend mode upon any of the above listed events. Resume Signaling: USB0 will exit Suspend mode if Resume signaling is detected on the bus. A Resume interrupt will be generated upon detection if enabled (RESINTE = 1). Software may force a Remote Wakeup by writing 1 to the RESUME bit (POWER.2). When forcing a Remote Wakeup, software should write RESUME = 0 to end Resume signaling 10-15 ms after the Remote Wakeup is initiated (RESUME = 1). ISO Update: When software writes 1 to the ISOUP bit (POWER.7), the ISO Update function is enabled. With ISO Update enabled, new packets written to an ISO IN endpoint will not be transmitted until a new Start-Of-Frame (SOF) is received. If the ISO IN endpoint receives an IN token before a SOF, USB0 will transmit a zero-length packet. When ISOUP = 1, ISO Update is enabled for all ISO endpoints. USB Enable: USB0 is disabled following a Power-On-Reset (POR). USB0 is enabled by clearing the USBINH bit (POWER.4). Once written to 0, the USBINH can only be set to 1 by one of the following: (1) a Power-On-Reset (POR), or (2) an asynchronous USB0 reset generated by writing 1 to the USBRST bit (POWER.3). Software should perform all USB0 configuration before enabling USB0. The configuration sequence should be performed as follows: 1. Select and enable the USB clock source. 2. Reset USB0 by writing USBRST= 1. 3. Configure and enable the USB Transceiver. 4. Perform any USB0 function configuration (interrupts, Suspend detect). 5. Enable USB0 by writing USBINH = 0. Rev. 1.4 184

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.8. POWER: USB0 Power Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ISOUD USBINH USBRST RESUME SUSMD SUSEN Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x01 Bit Name Function 7 ISOUD ISO Update Bit. This bit affects all IN Isochronous endpoints. 0: When software writes INPRDY = 1, USB0 will send the packet when the next IN token is received. 1: When software writes INPRDY = 1, USB0 will wait for a SOF token before sending the packet. If an IN token is received before a SOF token, USB0 will send a zero-length data packet. 6:5 Unused Read = 00b. Write = don’t care. 4 USBINH USB0 Inhibit Bit. This bit is set to 1 following a power-on reset (POR) or an asynchronous USB0 reset. Software should clear this bit after all USB0 transceiver initialization is complete. Soft- ware cannot set this bit to 1. 0: USB0 enabled. 1: USB0 inhibited. All USB traffic is ignored. 3 USBRST Reset Detect. Read: Write: 0: Reset signaling is not present. Writing 1 to this bit forces an 1: Reset signaling detected on asynchronous USB0 reset. the bus. 2 RESUME Force Resume. Writing a 1 to this bit while in Suspend mode (SUSMD = 1) forces USB0 to generate Resume signaling on the bus (a remote wakeup event). Software should write RESUME = 0 after 10 to 15 ms to end the Resume signaling. An interrupt is generated, and hard- ware clears SUSMD, when software writes RESUME = 0. 1 SUSMD Suspend Mode. Set to 1 by hardware when USB0 enters suspend mode. Cleared by hardware when soft- ware writes RESUME = 0 (following a remote wakeup) or reads the CMINT register after detection of Resume signaling on the bus. 0: USB0 not in suspend mode. 1: USB0 in suspend mode. 0 SUSEN Suspend Detection Enable. 0: Suspend detection disabled. USB0 will ignore suspend signaling on the bus. 1: Suspend detection enabled. USB0 will enter suspend mode if it detects suspend sig- naling on the bus. 185 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.9. FRAMEL: USB0 Frame Number Low Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name FRMEL[7:0] Type R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x0C Bit Name Function 7:0 FRMEL[7:0] Frame Number Low Bits. This register contains bits 7-0 of the last received frame number. USB Register Definition 21.10. FRAMEH: USB0 Frame Number High Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name FRMEH[2:0] Type R R R R R R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x0D Bit Name Function 7:3 Unused Read = 00000b. Write = don’t care. 2:0 FRMEH[2:0] Frame Number High Bits. This register contains bits 10-8 of the last received frame number. 21.8. Interrupts The read-only USB0 interrupt flags are located in the USB registers shown in USB Register Definition 21.11 through USB Register Definition 21.13. The associated interrupt enable bits are located in the USB registers shown in USB Register Definition 21.14 through USB Register Definition 21.16. A USB0 interrupt is generated when any of the USB interrupt flags is set to 1. The USB0 interrupt is enabled via the EIE1 SFR (see Section “16. Interrupts” on page 118). Important Note: Reading a USB interrupt flag register resets all flags in that register to 0. Rev. 1.4 186

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.11. IN1INT: USB0 IN Endpoint Interrupt Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name IN3 IN2 IN1 EP0 Type R R R R R R R R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x02 Bit Name Function 7:4 Unused Read = 0000b. Write = don’t care. 3 IN3 IN Endpoint 3 Interrupt-Pending Flag. This bit is cleared when software reads the IN1INT register. 0: IN Endpoint 3 interrupt inactive. 1: IN Endpoint 3 interrupt active. 2 IN2 IN Endpoint 2 Interrupt-Pending Flag. This bit is cleared when software reads the IN1INT register. 0: IN Endpoint 2 interrupt inactive. 1: IN Endpoint 2 interrupt active. 1 IN1 IN Endpoint 1 Interrupt-Pending Flag. This bit is cleared when software reads the IN1INT register. 0: IN Endpoint 1 interrupt inactive. 1: IN Endpoint 1 interrupt active. 0 EP0 Endpoint 0 Interrupt-Pending Flag. This bit is cleared when software reads the IN1INT register. 0: Endpoint 0 interrupt inactive. 1: Endpoint 0 interrupt active. 187 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.12. OUT1INT: USB0 OUT Endpoint Interrupt Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 Type R R R R R R R R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x04 Bit Name Function 7:4 Unused Read = 0000b. Write = don’t care. 3 OUT3 OUT Endpoint 3 Interrupt-Pending Flag. This bit is cleared when software reads the OUT1INT register. 0: OUT Endpoint 3 interrupt inactive. 1: OUT Endpoint 3 interrupt active. 2 OUT2 OUT Endpoint 2 Interrupt-Pending Flag. This bit is cleared when software reads the OUT1INT register. 0: OUT Endpoint 2 interrupt inactive. 1: OUT Endpoint 2 interrupt active. 1 OUT1 OUT Endpoint 1 Interrupt-Pending Flag. This bit is cleared when software reads the OUT1INT register. 0: OUT Endpoint 1 interrupt inactive. 1: OUT Endpoint 1 interrupt active. 0 Unused Read = 0b. Write = don’t care. Rev. 1.4 188

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.13. CMINT: USB0 Common Interrupt Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SOF RSTINT RSUINT SUSINT Type R R R R R R R R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x06 Bit Name Function 7:4 Unused Read = 0000b. Write = don’t care. 3 SOF Start of Frame Interrupt Flag. Set by hardware when a SOF token is received. This interrupt event is synthesized by hardware: an interrupt will be generated when hardware expects to receive a SOF event, even if the actual SOF signal is missed or corrupted. This bit is cleared when software reads the CMINT register. 0: SOF interrupt inactive. 1: SOF interrupt active. 2 RSTINT Reset Interrupt-Pending Flag. Set by hardware when Reset signaling is detected on the bus. This bit is cleared when software reads the CMINT register. 0: Reset interrupt inactive. 1: Reset interrupt active. 1 RSUINT Resume Interrupt-Pending Flag. Set by hardware when Resume signaling is detected on the bus while USB0 is in sus- pend mode. This bit is cleared when software reads the CMINT register. 0: Resume interrupt inactive. 1: Resume interrupt active. 0 SUSINT Suspend Interrupt-Pending Flag. When Suspend detection is enabled (bit SUSEN in register POWER), this bit is set by hardware when Suspend signaling is detected on the bus. This bit is cleared when software reads the CMINT register. 0: Suspend interrupt inactive. 1: Suspend interrupt active. 189 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.14. IN1IE: USB0 IN Endpoint Interrupt Enable Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name IN3E IN2E IN1E EP0E Type R R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 USB Register Address = 0x07 Bit Name Function 7:4 Unused Read = 0000b. Write = don’t care. 3 IN3E IN Endpoint 3 Interrupt Enable. 0: IN Endpoint 3 interrupt disabled. 1: IN Endpoint 3 interrupt enabled. 2 IN2E IN Endpoint 2 Interrupt Enable. 0: IN Endpoint 2 interrupt disabled. 1: IN Endpoint 2 interrupt enabled. 1 IN1E IN Endpoint 1 Interrupt E nable. 0: IN Endpoint 1 interrupt disabled. 1: IN Endpoint 1 interrupt enabled. 0 EP0E Endpoint 0 Interrupt Enable. 0: Endpoint 0 interrupt disabled. 1: Endpoint 0 interrupt enabled. Rev. 1.4 190

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.15. OUT1IE: USB0 OUT Endpoint Interrupt Enable Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name OUT3E OUT2E OUT1E Type R R R R R/W R/W R/W R Reset 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 USB Register Address = 0x09 Bit Name Function 7:4 Unused Read = 0000b. Write = don’t care. 3 OUT3E OUT Endpoint 3 Interrupt Enable. 0: OUT Endpoint 3 interrupt disabled. 1: OUT Endpoint 3 interrupt enabled. 2 OUT2E OUT Endpoint 2 Interrupt Enable. 0: OUT Endpoint 2 interrupt disabled. 1: OUT Endpoint 2 interrupt enabled. 1 OUT1E OUT Endpoint 1 Interrup t Enable. 0: OUT Endpoint 1 interrupt disabled. 1: OUT Endpoint 1 interrupt enabled. 0 Unused Read = 0b. Write = don’t care. 191 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.16. CMIE: USB0 Common Interrupt Enable Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SOFE RSTINTE RSUINTE SUSINTE Type R R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 USB Register Address = 0x0B Bit Name Function 7:4 Unused Read = 0000b. Write = don’t care. 3 SOFE Start of Frame Interrupt Enable. 0: SOF interrupt disabled. 1: SOF interrupt enabled. 2 RSTINTE Reset Interrupt Enable. 0: Reset interrupt disabled. 1: Reset interrupt enabled. 1 RSUINTE Resume Interrupt Enabl e. 0: Resume interrupt disabled. 1: Resume interrupt enabled. 0 SUSINTE Suspend Interrupt Enable. 0: Suspend interrupt disabled. 1: Suspend interrupt enabled. Rev. 1.4 192

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 21.9. The Serial Interface Engine The Serial Interface Engine (SIE) performs all low level USB protocol tasks, interrupting the processor when data has successfully been transmitted or received. When receiving data, the SIE will interrupt the processor when a complete data packet has been received; appropriate handshaking signals are automat- ically generated by the SIE. When transmitting data, the SIE will interrupt the processor when a complete data packet has been transmitted and the appropriate handshake signal has been received. The SIE will not interrupt the processor when corrupted/erroneous packets are received. 21.10. Endpoint0 Endpoint0 is managed through the USB register E0CSR (USB Register Definition 21.18). The INDEX reg- ister must be loaded with 0x00 to access the E0CSR register. An Endpoint0 interrupt is generated when: 1. A data packet (OUT or SETUP) has been received and loaded into the Endpoint0 FIFO. The OPRDY bit (E0CSR.0) is set to 1 by hardware. 2. An IN data packet has successfully been unloaded from the Endpoint0 FIFO and transmitted to the host; INPRDY is reset to 0 by hardware. 3. An IN transaction is completed (this interrupt generated during the status stage of the transaction). 4. Hardware sets the STSTL bit (E0CSR.2) after a control transaction ended due to a protocol violation. 5. Hardware sets the SUEND bit (E0CSR.4) because a control transfer ended before firmware sets the DATAEND bit (E0CSR.3). The E0CNT register (USB Register Definition 21.11) holds the number of received data bytes in the End- point0 FIFO. Hardware will automatically detect protocol errors and send a STALL condition in response. Firmware may force a STALL condition to abort the current transfer. When a STALL condition is generated, the STSTL bit will be set to 1 and an interrupt generated. The following conditions will cause hardware to generate a STALL condition: 1. The host sends an OUT token during a OUT data phase after the DATAEND bit has been set to 1. 2. The host sends an IN token during an IN data phase after the DATAEND bit has been set to 1. 3. The host sends a packet that exceeds the maximum packet size for Endpoint0. 4. The host sends a non-zero length DATA1 packet during the status phase of an IN transaction. Firmware sets the SDSTL bit (E0CSR.5) to 1. 21.10.1. Endpoint0 SETUP Transactions All control transfers must begin with a SETUP packet. SETUP packets are similar to OUT packets, contain- ing an 8-byte data field sent by the host. Any SETUP packet containing a command field of anything other than 8 bytes will be automatically rejected by USB0. An Endpoint0 interrupt is generated when the data from a SETUP packet is loaded into the Endpoint0 FIFO. Software should unload the command from the Endpoint0 FIFO, decode the command, perform any necessary tasks, and set the SOPRDY bit to indicate that it has serviced the OUT packet. 21.10.2. Endpoint0 IN Transactions When a SETUP request is received that requires USB0 to transmit data to the host, one or more IN requests will be sent by the host. For the first IN transaction, firmware should load an IN packet into the Endpoint0 FIFO, and set the INPRDY bit (E0CSR.1). An interrupt will be generated when an IN packet is transmitted successfully. Note that no interrupt will be generated if an IN request is received before firm- 193 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C ware has loaded a packet into the Endpoint0 FIFO. If the requested data exceeds the maximum packet size for Endpoint0 (as reported to the host), the data should be split into multiple packets; each packet should be of the maximum packet size excluding the last (residual) packet. If the requested data is an inte- ger multiple of the maximum packet size for Endpoint0, the last data packet should be a zero-length packet signaling the end of the transfer. Firmware should set the DATAEND bit to 1 after loading into the End- point0 FIFO the last data packet for a transfer. Upon reception of the first IN token for a particular control transfer, Endpoint0 is said to be in Transmit Mode. In this mode, only IN tokens should be sent by the host to Endpoint0. The SUEND bit (E0CSR.4) is set to 1 if a SETUP or OUT token is received while Endpoint0 is in Transmit Mode. Endpoint0 will remain in Transmit Mode until any of the following occur: 1. USB0 receives an Endpoint0 SETUP or OUT token. 2. Firmware sends a packet less than the maximum Endpoint0 packet size. 3. Firmware sends a zero-length packet. Firmware should set the DATAEND bit (E0CSR.3) to 1 when performing (2) and (3) above. The SIE will transmit a NAK in response to an IN token if there is no packet ready in the IN FIFO (INPRDY = 0). 21.10.3. Endpoint0 OUT Transactions When a SETUP request is received that requires the host to transmit data to USB0, one or more OUT requests will be sent by the host. When an OUT packet is successfully received by USB0, hardware will set the OPRDY bit (E0CSR.0) to 1 and generate an Endpoint0 interrupt. Following this interrupt, firmware should unload the OUT packet from the Endpoint0 FIFO and set the SOPRDY bit (E0CSR.6) to 1. If the amount of data required for the transfer exceeds the maximum packet size for Endpoint0, the data will be split into multiple packets. If the requested data is an integer multiple of the maximum packet size for Endpoint0 (as reported to the host), the host will send a zero-length data packet signaling the end of the transfer. Upon reception of the first OUT token for a particular control transfer, Endpoint0 is said to be in Receive Mode. In this mode, only OUT tokens should be sent by the host to Endpoint0. The SUEND bit (E0CSR.4) is set to 1 if a SETUP or IN token is received while Endpoint0 is in Receive Mode. Endpoint0 will remain in Receive mode until: 1. The SIE receives a SETUP or IN token. 2. The host sends a packet less than the maximum Endpoint0 packet size. 3. The host sends a zero-length packet. Firmware should set the DATAEND bit (E0CSR.3) to 1 when the expected amount of data has been received. The SIE will transmit a STALL condition if the host sends an OUT packet after the DATAEND bit has been set by firmware. An interrupt will be generated with the STSTL bit (E0CSR.2) set to 1 after the STALL is transmitted. Rev. 1.4 194

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.17. E0CSR: USB0 Endpoint0 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SSUEND SOPRDY SDSTL SUEND DATAEND STSTL INPRDY OPRDY Type R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x11 Bit Name Description Write Read 7 SSUEND Serviced Setup End Software should set this bit to 1 This bit always reads 0. Bit. after servicing a Setup End (bit SUEND) event. Hardware clears the SUEND bit when software writes 1 to SSUEND. 6 SOPRDY Serviced OPRDY Bit. Software should write 1 to this bit This bit always reads 0. after servicing a received End- point0 packet. The OPRDY bit will be cleared by a write of 1 to SO PRDY. 5 SDSTL Send Stall Bit. Software can write 1 to this bit to terminate the current transfer (due to an error condi- tion, unexpected transfer request, etc.). Hardware will clear this bit to 0 when the STALL handshake is transmitted. 4 SUEND Setup End Bit. Hardware sets this read-only bit to 1 when a control transaction ends before software has written 1 to the DATAEND bit. Hardware clears this bit when software writes 1 to SSUEND. 3 DATAEND Data End Bit. Software should write 1 to this bit: 1) When writing 1 to INPRDY for the last outgoing data packet. 2) When writing 1 to INPRDY for a zero-length data packet. 3) When writ- ing 1 to SOPRDY after servicing the last incoming data packet. This bit is automatically cleared by hardware. 2 STSTL Sent Stall Bit. Hardware sets this bit to 1 after transmitting a STALL handshake signal. This flag must be cleared by software. 1 INPRDY IN Packet Ready Bit. Software should write 1 to this bit after loading a data packet into the Endpoint0 FIFO for transmit. Hardware clears this bit and generates an interrupt under either of the fol- lowing conditions: 1) The packet is transmitted. 2) The packet is overwritten by an incoming SETUP packet. 3) The packet is overwritten by an incoming OUT packet. 0 OPRDY OUT Packet Ready Bit. Hardware sets this read-only bit and generates an interrupt when a data packet has been received. This bit is cleared only when software writes 1 to the SOPRDY bit. 195 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.18. E0CNT: USB0 Endpoint0 Data Count Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name E0CNT[6:0] Type R R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x16 Bit Name Function 7 Unused Read = 0b. Write = don’t care. 6:0 E0CNT[6:0] Endpoint 0 Data Count. This 7-bit number indicates the number of received data bytes in the Endpoint 0 FIFO. This number is only valid while bit OPRDY is a 1. 21.11. Configuring Endpoints1-3 Endpoints1-3 are configured and controlled through their own sets of the following control/status registers: IN registers EINCSRL and EINCSRH, and OUT registers EOUTCSRL and EOUTCSRH. Only one set of endpoint control/status registers is mapped in to the USB register address space at a time, defined by the contents of the INDEX register (USB Register Definition 21.4). Endpoints1-3 can be configured as IN, OUT, or both IN/OUT (Split Mode) as described in Section 21.5.1. The endpoint mode (Split/Normal) is selected via the SPLIT bit in register EINCSRH. When SPLIT = 1, the corresponding endpoint FIFO is split, and both IN and OUT pipes are available. When SPLIT = 0, the corresponding endpoint functions as either IN or OUT; the endpoint direction is selected by the DIRSEL bit in register EINCSRH. Endpoints1-3 can be disabled individually by the corresponding bits in the ENABLE register. When an End- point is disabled, it will not respond to bus traffic or stall the bus. All Endpoints are enabled by default. Rev. 1.4 196

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.19. EENABLE: USB0 Endpoint Enable Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name EEN3 EEN2 EEN1 Type R R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 USB Register Address = 0x1E Bit Name Function 7:4 Unused Read = 1111b. Write = don’t care. 3 EEN3 Endpoint 3 Enable. This bit enables/disables Endpoint 3. 0: Endpoint 3 is disabled (no NACK, ACK, or STALL on the USB network). 1: Endpoint 3 is enabled (normal). 2 EEN2 Endpoint 2 Enable. This bit enables/disables Endpoint 2. 0: Endpoint 2 is disabled (no NACK, ACK, or STALL on the USB network). 1: Endpoint 2 is enabled ( normal). 1 EEN1 Endpoint 1 Enable. This bit enables/disables Endpoint 1. 0: Endpoint 1 is disabled (no NACK, ACK, or STALL on the USB network). 1: Endpoint 1 is enabled (normal). 0 Reserved Must Write 1b. 21.12. Controlling Endpoints1-3 IN Endpoints1-3 IN are managed via USB registers EINCSRL and EINCSRH. All IN endpoints can be used for Interrupt, Bulk, or Isochronous transfers. Isochronous (ISO) mode is enabled by writing 1 to the ISO bit in register EINCSRH. Bulk and Interrupt transfers are handled identically by hardware. An Endpoint1-3 IN interrupt is generated by any of the following conditions: 1. An IN packet is successfully transferred to the host. 2. Software writes 1 to the FLUSH bit (EINCSRL.3) when the target FIFO is not empty. 3. Hardware generates a STALL condition. 21.12.1. Endpoints1-3 IN Interrupt or Bulk Mode When the ISO bit (EINCSRH.6) = 0 the target endpoint operates in Bulk or Interrupt Mode. Once an end- point has been configured to operate in Bulk/Interrupt IN mode (typically following an Endpoint0 SET_IN- TERFACE command), firmware should load an IN packet into the endpoint IN FIFO and set the INPRDY bit (EINCSRL.0). Upon reception of an IN token, hardware will transmit the data, clear the INPRDY bit, and generate an interrupt. Writing 1 to INPRDY without writing any data to the endpoint FIFO will cause a zero-length packet to be transmitted upon reception of the next IN token. 197 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C A Bulk or Interrupt pipe can be shut down (or Halted) by writing 1 to the SDSTL bit (EINCSRL.4). While SDSTL = 1, hardware will respond to all IN requests with a STALL condition. Each time hardware gener- ates a STALL condition, an interrupt will be generated and the STSTL bit (EINCSRL.5) set to 1. The STSTL bit must be reset to 0 by firmware. Hardware will automatically reset INPRDY to 0 when a packet slot is open in the endpoint FIFO. Note that if double buffering is enabled for the target endpoint, it is possible for firmware to load two packets into the IN FIFO at a time. In this case, hardware will reset INPRDY to 0 immediately after firmware loads the first packet into the FIFO and sets INPRDY to 1. An interrupt will not be generated in this case; an interrupt will only be generated when a data packet is transmitted. When firmware writes 1 to the FCDT bit (EINCSRH.3), the data toggle for each IN packet will be toggled continuously, regardless of the handshake received from the host. This feature is typically used by Inter- rupt endpoints functioning as rate feedback communication for Isochronous endpoints. When FCDT = 0, the data toggle bit will only be toggled when an ACK is sent from the host in response to an IN packet. 21.12.2. Endpoints1-3 IN Isochronous Mode When the ISO bit (EINCSRH.6) is set to 1, the target endpoint operates in Isochronous (ISO) mode. Once an endpoint has been configured for ISO IN mode, the host will send one IN token (data request) per frame; the location of data within each frame may vary. Because of this, it is recommended that double buffering be enabled for ISO IN endpoints. Hardware will automatically reset INPRDY (EINCSRL.0) to 0 when a packet slot is open in the endpoint FIFO. Note that if double buffering is enabled for the target endpoint, it is possible for firmware to load two packets into the IN FIFO at a time. In this case, hardware will reset INPRDY to 0 immediately after firm- ware loads the first packet into the FIFO and sets INPRDY to 1. An interrupt will not be generated in this case; an interrupt will only be generated when a data packet is transmitted. If there is not a data packet ready in the endpoint FIFO when USB0 receives an IN token from the host, USB0 will transmit a zero-length data packet and set the UNDRUN bit (EINCSRL.2) to 1. The ISO Update feature (see Section 21.7) can be useful in starting a double buffered ISO IN endpoint. If the host has already set up the ISO IN pipe (has begun transmitting IN tokens) when firmware writes the first data packet to the endpoint FIFO, the next IN token may arrive and the first data packet sent before firmware has written the second (double buffered) data packet to the FIFO. The ISO Update feature ensures that any data packet written to the endpoint FIFO will not be transmitted during the current frame; the packet will only be sent after a SOF signal has been received. Rev. 1.4 198

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.20. EINCSRL: USB0 IN Endpoint Control Low Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CLRDT STSTL SDSTL FLUSH UNDRUN FIFONE INPRDY Type R W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x11 Bit Name Description Write Read 7 Unused Read = 0b. Write = don’t care. 6 CLRDT Clear Data Toggle Bit. Software should write 1 to This bit always reads 0. this bit to reset the IN End- point data toggle to 0. 5 STSTL Sent Stall Bit. Hardware sets this bit to 1 when a STALL handshake signal is transmitted. The FIFO is flushed, and the INPRDY bit cleared. This flag must be cleared by software. 4 SDSTL Send Stall. Software should write 1 to this bit to generate a STALL handshake in response to an IN token. Software should write 0 to this bit to terminate the STALL signal. This bit has no effect in ISO mode. 3 FLUSH FIFO Flush Bit. Writing a 1 to this bit flushes the next packet to be transmitted from the IN Endpoint FIFO. The FIFO pointer is reset and the INPRDY bit is cleared. If the FIFO contains mul- tiple packets, software must write 1 to FLUSH for each packet. Hardware resets the FLUSH bit to 0 when the FIFO flush is complete. 2 UNDRUN Data Underrun Bit. The function of this bit depends on the IN Endpoint mode: ISO: Set when a zero-length packet is sent after an IN token is received while bit INPRDY = 0. Interrupt/Bulk: Set when a NAK is returned in response to an IN token. This bit must be cleared by software. 1 FIFONE FIFO Not Empty. 0: The IN Endpoint FIFO is empty. 1. The IN Endpoint FIFO contains one or more packets. 0 INPRDY In Packet Ready. Software should write 1 to this bit after loading a data packet into the IN Endpoint FIFO. Hardware clears INPRDY due to any of the following: 1) A data packet is transmitted. 2) Double buffering is enabled (DBIEN = 1) and there is an open FIFO packet slot. 3) If the endpoint is in Isochronous Mode (ISO = 1) and ISOUD = 1, INPRDY will read 0 until the next SOF is received. Note: An interrupt (if enabled) will be generated when hardware clears INPRDY as a result of a packet being transmitted. 199 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.21. EINCSRH: USB0 IN Endpoint Control High Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name DBIEN ISO DIRSEL FCDT SPLIT Type R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x12 Bit Name Function 7 DBIEN IN Endpoint Double-buffer Enable. 0: Double-buffering disabled for the selected IN endpoint. 1: Double-buffering enabled for the selected IN endpoint. 6 ISO Isochronous Transfer Enable. This bit enables/disables isochronous transfers on the current endpoint. 0: Endpoint configured for bulk/interrupt transfers. 1: Endpoint configured for isochronous transfers. 5 DIRSEL Endpoint Direction Select. This bit is valid only when the selected FIFO is not split (SPLIT = 0). 0: Endpoint direction selected as OUT. 1: Endpoint direction selected as IN. 4 Unused Read = 0b. Write = don’t care. 3 FCDT Force Data Toggle Bit. 0: Endpoint data toggle switches only when an ACK is received following a data packet transmission. 1: Endpoint data toggle forced to switch after every data packet is transmitted, regard- less of ACK reception. 2 SPLIT FIFO Split Enable. When SPLIT = 1, the selected endpoint FIFO is split. The upper half of the selected FIFO is used by the IN endpoint; the lower half of the selected FIFO is used by the OUT endpoint. 1:0 Unused Read = 00b. Write = don’t care. Rev. 1.4 200

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 21.13. Controlling Endpoints1-3 OUT Endpoints1-3 OUT are managed via USB registers EOUTCSRL and EOUTCSRH. All OUT endpoints can be used for Interrupt, Bulk, or Isochronous transfers. Isochronous (ISO) mode is enabled by writing 1 to the ISO bit in register EOUTCSRH. Bulk and Interrupt transfers are handled identically by hardware. An Endpoint1-3 OUT interrupt may be generated by the following: 1. Hardware sets the OPRDY bit (EINCSRL.0) to 1. 2. Hardware generates a STALL condition. 21.13.1. Endpoints1-3 OUT Interrupt or Bulk Mode When the ISO bit (EOUTCSRH.6) = 0 the target endpoint operates in Bulk or Interrupt mode. Once an end- point has been configured to operate in Bulk/Interrupt OUT mode (typically following an Endpoint0 SET_INTERFACE command), hardware will set the OPRDY bit (EOUTCSRL.0) to 1 and generate an interrupt upon reception of an OUT token and data packet. The number of bytes in the current OUT data packet (the packet ready to be unloaded from the FIFO) is given in the EOUTCNTH and EOUTCNTL reg- isters. In response to this interrupt, firmware should unload the data packet from the OUT FIFO and reset the OPRDY bit to 0. A Bulk or Interrupt pipe can be shut down (or Halted) by writing 1 to the SDSTL bit (EOUTCSRL.5). While SDSTL = 1, hardware will respond to all OUT requests with a STALL condition. Each time hardware gener- ates a STALL condition, an interrupt will be generated and the STSTL bit (EOUTCSRL.6) set to 1. The STSTL bit must be reset to 0 by firmware. Hardware will automatically set OPRDY when a packet is ready in the OUT FIFO. Note that if double buff- ering is enabled for the target endpoint, it is possible for two packets to be ready in the OUT FIFO at a time. In this case, hardware will set OPRDY to 1 immediately after firmware unloads the first packet and resets OPRDY to 0. A second interrupt will be generated in this case. 21.13.2. Endpoints1-3 OUT Isochronous Mode When the ISO bit (EOUTCSRH.6) is set to 1, the target endpoint operates in Isochronous (ISO) mode. Once an endpoint has been configured for ISO OUT mode, the host will send exactly one data per USB frame; the location of the data packet within each frame may vary, however. Because of this, it is recom- mended that double buffering be enabled for ISO OUT endpoints. Each time a data packet is received, hardware will load the received data packet into the endpoint FIFO, set the OPRDY bit (EOUTCSRL.0) to 1, and generate an interrupt (if enabled). Firmware would typically use this interrupt to unload the data packet from the endpoint FIFO and reset the OPRDY bit to 0. If a data packet is received when there is no room in the endpoint FIFO, an interrupt will be generated and the OVRUN bit (EOUTCSRL.2) set to 1. If USB0 receives an ISO data packet with a CRC error, the data packet will be loaded into the endpoint FIFO, OPRDY will be set to 1, an interrupt (if enabled) will be gen- erated, and the DATAERR bit (EOUTCSRL.3) will be set to 1. Software should check the DATAERR bit each time a data packet is unloaded from an ISO OUT endpoint FIFO. 201 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.22. EOUTCSRL: USB0 OUT Endpoint Control Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CLRDT STSTL SDSTL FLUSH DATERR OVRUN FIFOFUL OPRDY Type W R/W R/W R/W R R/W R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x14 Bit Name Description Write Read 7 CLRDT Clear Data Toggle Bit. Software should write 1 to This bit always reads 0. this bit to reset the OUT end- point data toggle to 0. 6 STSTL Sent Stall Bit. Hardware sets this bit to 1 when a STALL handshake signal is transmitted. This flag must be cleared by software. 5 SDSTL Send Stall Bit. Software should write 1 to this bit to generate a STALL handshake. Software should write 0 to this bit to terminat e the STALL signal. This bit has no effect in ISO mode. 4 FLUSH FIFO Flush Bit. Writing a 1 to this bit flushes the next packet to be read from the OUT endpoint FIFO. The FIFO pointer is reset and the OPRDY bit is cleared. Multiple packets must be flushed individually. Hardware resets the FLUSH bit to 0 when the flush is complete. Note: If data for the current packet has already been read from the FIFO, the FLUSH bit should not be used to flush the packet. Instead, the FIFO should be read manually. 3 DATERR Data Error Bit. In ISO mode, this bit is set by hardware if a received packet has a CRC or bit-stuffing error. It is cleared when software clears OPRDY. This bit is only valid in ISO mode. 2 OVRUN Data Overrun Bit. This bit is set by hardware when an incoming data packet cannot be loaded into the OUT endpoint FIFO. This bit is only valid in ISO mode, and must be cleared by software. 0: No data overrun. 1: A data packet was lost because of a full FIFO since this flag was last cleared. 1 FIFOFUL OUT FIFO Full. This bit indicates the contents of the OUT FIFO. If double buffering is enabled (DBIEN = 1), the FIFO is full when the FIFO contains two packets. If DBIEN = 0, the FIFO is full when the FIFO contains one packet. 0: OUT endpoint FIFO is not full. 1: OUT endpoint FIFO is full. 0 OPRDY OUT Packet Ready. Hardware sets this bit to 1 and generates an interrupt when a data packet is available. Software should clear this bit after each data packet is unloaded from the OUT endpoint FIFO. Rev. 1.4 202

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.23. EOUTCSRH: USB0 OUT Endpoint Control High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name DBOEN ISO Type R/W R/W R R R R R R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x15 Bit Name Function 7 DBOEN Double-buffer Enable. 0: Double-buffering disabled for the selected OUT endpoint. 1: Double-buffering enabled for the selected OUT endpoint. 6 ISO Isochronous Transfer Enable. This bit enables/disables isochronous transfers on the current endpoint. 0: Endpoint configured for bulk/interrupt transfers. 1: Endpoint configured for isochronous transfers. 5:0 Unused Read = 000000b. Write = do n’t care. USB Register Definition 21.24. EOUTCNTL: USB0 OUT Endpoint Count Low Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name EOCL[7:0] Type R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x16 Bit Name Function 7:0 EOCL[7:0] OUT Endpoint Count Low Byte. EOCL holds the lower 8-bits of the 10-bit number of data bytes in the last received packet in the current OUT endpoint FIFO. This number is only valid while OPRDY = 1. 203 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C USB Register Definition 21.25. EOUTCNTH: USB0 OUT Endpoint Count High Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name EOCH[1:0] Type R R R R R R R R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 USB Register Address = 0x17 Bit Name Function 7:2 Unused Read = 000000b. Write = don’t care. 1:0 EOCH[1:0] OUT Endpoint Count High Byte. EOCH holds the upper 2-bits of the 10-bit number of data bytes in the last received packet in the current OUT endpoint FIFO. This number is only valid while OPRDY = 1. Rev. 1.4 204

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 2 22. SMBus0 and SMBus1 (I C Compatible) The SMBus I/O interface is a two-wire, bi-directional serial bus. The SMBus is compliant with the System Management Bus Specification, version 1.1, and compatible with the I2C serial bus. The C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C devices contain two SMBus interfaces, SMBus0 and SMBus1. Reads and writes to the SMBus by the system controller are byte oriented with the SMBus interface auton- omously controlling the serial transfer of the data. Data can be transferred at up to 1/20th of the system clock as a master or slave (this can be faster than allowed by the SMBus specification, depending on the system clock used). A method of extending the clock-low duration is available to accommodate devices with different speed capabilities on the same bus. The SMBus may operate as a master and/or slave, and may function on a bus with multiple masters. The SMBus provides control of SDA (serial data), SCL (serial clock) generation and synchronization, arbitration logic, and START/STOP control and generation. The SMBus peripherals can be fully driven by software (i.e., software accepts/rejects slave addresses, and generates ACKs), or hardware slave address recogni- tion and automatic ACK generation can be enabled to minimize software overhead. A block diagram of the SMBus0 peripheral and the associated SFRs is shown in Figure 22.1. SMBus1 is identical,with the excep- tion of the available timer options for the clock source, and the timer used to implement the SCL low time- out feature. Refer to the specific SFR definitions for more details. Figure 22.1. SMBus Block Diagram Rev. 1.4 205

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 22.1. Supporting Documents It is assumed the reader is familiar with or has access to the following supporting documents:  The I2C-Bus and How to Use It (including specifications), Philips Semiconductor.  The I2C-Bus Specification—Version 2.0, Philips Semiconductor.  System Management Bus Specification—Version 1.1, SBS Implementers Forum. 22.2. SMBus Configuration Figure 22.2 shows a typical SMBus configuration. The SMBus specification allows any recessive voltage between 3.0 V and 5.0 V; different devices on the bus may operate at different voltage levels. The bi-direc- tional SCL (serial clock) and SDA (serial data) lines must be connected to a positive power supply voltage through a pullup resistor or similar circuit. Every device connected to the bus must have an open-drain or open-collector output for both the SCL and SDA lines, so that both are pulled high (recessive state) when the bus is free. The maximum number of devices on the bus is limited only by the requirement that the rise and fall times on the bus not exceed 300 ns and 1000 ns, respectively. Figure 22.2. Typical SMBus Configuration 22.3. SMBus Operation Two types of data transfers are possible: data transfers from a master transmitter to an addressed slave receiver (WRITE), and data transfers from an addressed slave transmitter to a master receiver (READ). The master device initiates both types of data transfers and provides the serial clock pulses on SCL. The SMBus interface may operate as a master or a slave, and multiple master devices on the same bus are supported. If two or more masters attempt to initiate a data transfer simultaneously, an arbitration scheme is employed with a single master always winning the arbitration. It is not necessary to specify one device as the Master in a system; any device who transmits a START and a slave address becomes the master for the duration of that transfer. A typical SMBus transaction consists of a START condition followed by an address byte (Bits7–1: 7-bit slave address; Bit0: R/W direction bit), one or more bytes of data, and a STOP condition. Bytes that are received (by a master or slave) are acknowledged (ACK) with a low SDA during a high SCL (see Figure 22.3). If the receiving device does not ACK, the transmitting device will read a NACK (not acknowl- edge), which is a high SDA during a high SCL. The direction bit (R/W) occupies the least-significant bit position of the address byte. The direction bit is set to logic 1 to indicate a "READ" operation and cleared to logic 0 to indicate a "WRITE" operation. 206 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C All transactions are initiated by a master, with one or more addressed slave devices as the target. The master generates the START condition and then transmits the slave address and direction bit. If the trans- action is a WRITE operation from the master to the slave, the master transmits the data a byte at a time waiting for an ACK from the slave at the end of each byte. For READ operations, the slave transmits the data waiting for an ACK from the master at the end of each byte. At the end of the data transfer, the master generates a STOP condition to terminate the transaction and free the bus. Figure 22.3 illustrates a typical SMBus transaction. Figure 22.3. SMBus Transaction 22.3.1. Transmitter Vs. Receiver On the SMBus communications interface, a device is the “transmitter” when it is sending an address or data byte to another device on the bus. A device is a “receiver” when an address or data byte is being sent to it from another device on the bus. The transmitter controls the SDA line during the address or data byte. After each byte of address or data information is sent by the transmitter, the receiver sends an ACK or NACK bit during the ACK phase of the transfer, during which time the receiver controls the SDA line. 22.3.2. Arbitration A master may start a transfer only if the bus is free. The bus is free after a STOP condition or after the SCL and SDA lines remain high for a specified time (see Section “22.3.5. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout” on page 208). In the event that two or more devices attempt to begin a transfer at the same time, an arbitra- tion scheme is employed to force one master to give up the bus. The master devices continue transmitting until one attempts a HIGH while the other transmits a LOW. Since the bus is open-drain, the bus will be pulled LOW. The master attempting the HIGH will detect a LOW SDA and lose the arbitration. The winning master continues its transmission without interruption; the losing master becomes a slave and receives the rest of the transfer if addressed. This arbitration scheme is non-destructive: one device always wins, and no data is lost. 22.3.3. Clock Low Extension SMBus provides a clock synchronization mechanism, similar to I2C, which allows devices with different speed capabilities to coexist on the bus. A clock-low extension is used during a transfer in order to allow slower slave devices to communicate with faster masters. The slave may temporarily hold the SCL line LOW to extend the clock low period, effectively decreasing the serial clock frequency. 22.3.4. SCL Low Timeout If the SCL line is held low by a slave device on the bus, no further communication is possible. Furthermore, the master cannot force the SCL line high to correct the error condition. To solve this problem, the SMBus protocol specifies that devices participating in a transfer must detect any clock cycle held low longer than 25 ms as a “timeout” condition. Devices that have detected the timeout condition must reset the communi- cation no later than 10 ms after detecting the timeout condition. For the SMBus0 interface, Timer 3 is used to implement SCL low timeouts. Timer 4 is used on the SMBus1 interface for SCL low timeouts. The SCL low timeout feature is enabled by setting the SMBnTOE bit in SMBnCF. The associated timer is forced to reload when SCL is high, and allowed to count when SCL is Rev. 1.4 207

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C low. With the associated timer enabled and configured to overflow after 25 ms (and SMBnTOE set), the timer interrupt service routine can be used to reset (disable and re-enable) the SMBus in the event of an SCL low timeout. 22.3.5. SCL High (SMBus Free) Timeout The SMBus specification stipulates that if the SCL and SDA lines remain high for more that 50 μs, the bus is designated as free. When the SMBnFTE bit in SMBnCF is set, the bus will be considered free if SCL and SDA remain high for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods (as defined by the timer configured for the SMBus clock source). If the SMBus is waiting to generate a Master START, the START will be generated following this timeout. A clock source is required for free timeout detection, even in a slave-only implemen- tation. 22.4. Using the SMBus The SMBus can operate in both Master and Slave modes. The interface provides timing and shifting con- trol for serial transfers; higher level protocol is determined by user software. The SMBus interface provides the following application-independent features:  Byte-wise serial data transfers  Clock signal generation on SCL (Master Mode only) and SDA data synchronization  Timeout/bus error recognition, as defined by the SMB0CF configuration register  START/STOP timing, detection, and generation  Bus arbitration  Interrupt generation  Status information  Optional hardware recognition of slave address and automatic acknowledgement of address/data SMBus interrupts are generated for each data byte or slave address that is transferred. When hardware acknowledgement is disabled, the point at which the interrupt is generated depends on whether the hard- ware is acting as a data transmitter or receiver. When a transmitter (i.e., sending address/data, receiving an ACK), this interrupt is generated after the ACK cycle so that software may read the received ACK value; when receiving data (i.e., receiving address/data, sending an ACK), this interrupt is generated before the ACK cycle so that software may define the outgoing ACK value. If hardware acknowledgement is enabled, these interrupts are always generated after the ACK cycle. See Section 22.5 for more details on transmis- sion sequences. Interrupts are also generated to indicate the beginning of a transfer when a master (START generated), or the end of a transfer when a slave (STOP detected). Software should read the SMBnCN (SMBus Control register) to find the cause of the SMBus interrupt. The SMBnCN register is described in Section 22.4.3; Table 22.5 provides a quick SMBnCN decoding reference. 22.4.1. SMBus Configuration Register The SMBus Configuration register (SMBnCF) is used to enable the SMBus Master and/or Slave modes, select the SMBus clock source, and select the SMBus timing and timeout options. When the ENSMB bit is set, the SMBus is enabled for all master and slave events. Slave events may be disabled by setting the INH bit. With slave events inhibited, the SMBus interface will still monitor the SCL and SDA pins; however, the interface will NACK all received addresses and will not generate any slave interrupts. When the INH bit is set, all slave events will be inhibited following the next START (interrupts will continue for the duration of the current transfer). 208 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 22.1. SMBus Clock Source Selection SMBnCS1 SMBnCS0 SMBus0 Clock Source SMBus1 Clock Source 0 0 Timer 0 Overflow Timer 0 Overflow 0 1 Timer 1 Overflow Timer 5 Overflow 1 0 Timer 2 High Byte Overflow Timer 2 High Byte Overflow 1 1 Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow The SMBnCS1–0 bits select the SMBus clock source, which is used only when operating as a master or when the Free Timeout detection is enabled. When operating as a master, overflows from the selected source determine the absolute minimum SCL low and high times as defined in Equation 22.1.The selected clock source may be shared by other peripherals so long as the timer is left running at all times. For exam- ple, Timer 1 overflows may generate the SMBus0 and SMBus1 clock rates simultaneously. Timer configu- ration is covered in Section “26. Timers” on page 263. 1 T = T = ------------------------------------------------------------------ HighMin LowMin f ClockSourceOverflow Equation 22.1. Minimum SCL High and Low Times The selected clock source should be configured to establish the minimum SCL High and Low times as per Equation 22.1. When the interface is operating as a master (and SCL is not driven or extended by any other devices on the bus), the typical SMBus bit rate is approximated by Equation 22.2. f ClockSourceOverflow BitRate = ------------------------------------------------------------------ 3 Equation 22.2. Typical SMBus Bit Rate Figure 22.4 shows the typical SCL generation described by Equation 22.2. Notice that T is typically HIGH twice as large as T . The actual SCL output may vary due to other devices on the bus (SCL may be LOW extended low by slower slave devices, or driven low by contending master devices). The bit rate when operating as a master will never exceed the limits defined by equation Equation 22.1. Figure 22.4. Typical SMBus SCL Generation Setting the EXTHOLD bit extends the minimum setup and hold times for the SDA line. The minimum SDA setup time defines the absolute minimum time that SDA is stable before SCL transitions from low-to-high. The minimum SDA hold time defines the absolute minimum time that the current SDA value remains stable after SCL transitions from high-to-low. EXTHOLD should be set so that the minimum setup and hold times meet the SMBus Specification requirements of 250 ns and 300 ns, respectively. Table 22.2 shows the min- Rev. 1.4 209

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C imum setup and hold times for the two EXTHOLD settings. Setup and hold time extensions are typically necessary when SYSCLK is above 10 MHz. Table 22.2. Minimum SDA Setup and Hold Times EXTHOLD Minimum SDA Setup Time Minimum SDA Hold Time T – 4 system clocks low 0 or 3 system clocks 1 system clock + s/w delay* 1 11 system clocks 12 system clocks Note: Setup Time for ACK bit transmissions and the MSB of all data transfers. When using software acknowledgement, the s/w delay occurs between the time SMB0DAT or ACK is written and when SI is cleared. Note that if SI is cleared in the same write that defines the outgoing ACK value, s/w delay is zero. With the SMBnTOE bit set, Timer 3 (SMBus0) and Timer 5 (SMBus1) should be configured to overflow after 25 ms in order to detect SCL low timeouts (see Section “22.3.4. SCL Low Timeout” on page 207). The SMBus interface will force the associated timer to reload while SCL is high, and allow the timer to count when SCL is low. The timer interrupt service routine should be used to reset SMBus communication by disabling and re-enabling the SMBus. SMBus Free Timeout detection can be enabled by setting the SMBnFTE bit. When this bit is set, the bus will be considered free if SDA and SCL remain high for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods (see Figure 22.4). 22.4.2. SMBus Timing Control Register The SMBus Timing Control Register (SMBTC)is used to restrict the detection of a START condition under certain circumstances. In some systems where there is significant mis-match between the impedance or the capacitance on the SDA and SCL lines, it may be possible for SCL to fall after SDA during an address or data transfer. Such an event can cause a false START detection on the bus. These kind of events are not expected in a standard SMBus or I2C-compliant system. In most systems this parameter should not be adjusted, and it is recommended that it be left at its default value. By default, if the SCL falling edge is detected after the falling edge of SDA (i.e. one SYSCLK cycle or more), the device will detect this as a START condition. The SMBTC register is used to increase the amount of hold time that is required between SDA and SCL falling before a START is recognized. An addi- tional 2, 4, or 8 SYSCLKs can be added to prevent false START detection in systems where the bus condi- tions warrant this. 210 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 22.1. SMB0CF: SMBus Clock/Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ENSMB0 INH0 BUSY0 EXTHOLD0 SMB0TOE SMB0FTE SMB0CS[1:0] Type R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xC1; SFR Page = 0 Bit Name Function 7 ENSMB0 SMBus0 Enable. This bit enables the SMBus0 interface when set to 1. When enabled, the interface constantly monitors the SDA0 and SCL0 pins. 6 INH0 SMBus0 Slave Inhibit. When this bit is set to logic 1, the SMBus0 does not generate an interrupt when slave events occur. This effectively removes the SMBus0 slave from the bus. Mas- ter Mode interrupts are not affected. 5 BUSY0 SMBus0 Busy Indicator. This bit is set to logic 1 b y hardware when a transfer is in progress. It is cleared to logic 0 when a STOP or free-timeout is sensed. 4 EXTHOLD0 SMBus0 Setup and Hold Time Extension Enable. This bit controls the SDA0 setup and hold times according to Table 22.2. 0: SDA0 Extended Setup and Hold Times disabled. 1: SDA0 Extended Setup and Hold Times enabled. 3 SMB0TOE SMBus0 SCL Timeout Detection Enable. This bit enables SCL low timeout detection. If set to logic 1, the SMBus0 forces Timer 3 to reload while SCL0 is high and allows Timer 3 to count when SCL0 goes low. If Timer 3 is configured to Split Mode, only the High Byte of the timer is held in reload while SCL0 is high. Timer 3 should be programmed to generate interrupts at 25 ms, and the Timer 3 interrupt service routine should reset SMBus0 communica- tion. 2 SMB0FTE SMBus0 Free Timeout Detection Enable. When this bit is set to logic 1, the bus will be considered free if SCL0 and SDA0 remain high for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods. 1:0 SMB0CS[1:0] SMBus0 Clock Source Selection. These two bits select the SMBus0 clock source, which is used to generate the SMBus0 bit rate. The selected device should be configured according to Equation 22.1. 00: Timer 0 Overflow 01: Timer 1 Overflow 10: Timer 2 High Byte Overflow 11: Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow Rev. 1.4 211

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 22.2. SMB1CF: SMBus Clock/Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name ENSMB1 INH1 BUSY1 EXTHOLD1 SMB1TOE SMB1FTE SMB1CS[1:0] Type R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xC1; SFR Page = F Bit Name Function 7 ENSMB1 SMBus1 Enable. This bit enables the SMBus1 interface when set to 1. When enabled, the interface constantly monitors the SDA1 and SCL1 pins. 6 INH1 SMBus1 Slave Inhibit. When this bit is set to logic 1, the SMBus1 does not generate an interrupt when slave events occur. This effectively removes the SMBus1 slave from the bus. Mas- ter Mode interrupts are not affected. 5 BUSY1 SMBus1 Busy Indicator. This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware when a transfer is in progress. It is cleared to logic 0 when a STOP or free-timeout is sensed. 4 EXTHOLD1 SMBus1 Setup and Hold Time Extension Enable. This bit controls the SDA1 setup and hold times according to Table 22.2. 0: SDA1 Extended Setup and Hold Times disabled. 1: SDA1 Extended Setup and Hold Times enabled. 3 SMB1TOE SMBus1 SCL Timeout Detection Enable. This bit enables SCL low timeout detection. If set to logic 1, the SMBus1 forces Timer 4 to reload while SCL1 is high and allows Timer 4 to count when SCL1 goes low. If Timer 4 is configured to Split Mode, only the High Byte of the timer is held in reload while SCL1 is high. Timer 4 should be programmed to generate interrupts at 25 ms, and the Timer 4 interrupt service routine should reset SMBus1 communica- tion. 2 SMB1FTE SMBus1 Free Timeout Detection Enable. When this bit is set to logic 1, the bus will be considered free if SCL1 and SDA1 remain high for more than 10 SMBus clock source periods. 1:0 SMB1CS[1:0] SMBus1 Clock Source Selection. These two bits select the SMBus1 clock source, which is used to generate the SMBus1 bit rate. The selected device should be configured according to Equation 22.1. 00: Timer 0 Overflow 01: Timer 5 Overflow 10: Timer 2 High Byte Overflow 11: Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow 212 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 22.3. SMBTC: SMBus Timing Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SMB1SDD[1:0] SMB0SDD[1:0] Type R R R R R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xB9; SFR Page = F Bit Name Function 7:4 Unused Read = 0000b; Write = don’t care. 3:2 SMB1SDD[1:0] SMBus1 Start Detection Window These bits increase the hold time requirement between SDA falling and SCL fall- ing for START detection. 00: No additional hold time requirement (0-1 SYSCLK). 01: Increase hold time window to 2-3 SYSCLKs. 10: Increase hold time window to 4-5 SYSCLKs. 11: Increase hold time window to 8-9 SYSCLKs. 1:0 SMB0SDD[1:0] SMBus0 Start Detect ion Window These bits increase the hold time requirement between SDA falling and SCL fall- ing for START detection. 00: No additional hold time window (0-1 SYSCLK). 01: Increase hold time window to 2-3 SYSCLKs. 10: Increase hold time window to 4-5 SYSCLKs. 11: Increase hold time window to 8-9 SYSCLKs. Rev. 1.4 213

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 22.4.3. SMBnCN Control Register SMBnCN is used to control the interface and to provide status information (see SFR Definition 22.4). The higher four bits of SMBnCN (MASTER, TXMODE, STA, and STO) form a status vector that can be used to jump to service routines. MASTER indicates whether a device is the master or slave during the current transfer. TXMODE indicates whether the device is transmitting or receiving data for the current byte. STA and STO indicate that a START and/or STOP has been detected or generated since the last SMBus interrupt. STA and STO are also used to generate START and STOP conditions when operating as a mas- ter. Writing a 1 to STA will cause the SMBus interface to enter Master Mode and generate a START when the bus becomes free (STA is not cleared by hardware after the START is generated). Writing a 1 to STO while in Master Mode will cause the interface to generate a STOP and end the current transfer after the next ACK cycle. If STO and STA are both set (while in Master Mode), a STOP followed by a START will be generated. The ARBLOST bit indicates that the interface has lost an arbitration. This may occur anytime the interface is transmitting (master or slave). A lost arbitration while operating as a slave indicates a bus error condi- tion. ARBLOST is cleared by hardware each time SI is cleared. The SI bit (SMBus Interrupt Flag) is set at the beginning and end of each transfer, after each byte frame, or when an arbitration is lost; see Table 22.3 for more details. Important Note About the SI Bit: The SMBus interface is stalled while SI is set; thus SCL is held low, and the bus is stalled until software clears SI. 22.4.3.1. Software ACK Generation When the EHACK bit in register SMBnADM is cleared to 0, the firmware on the device must detect incom- ing slave addresses and ACK or NACK the slave address and incoming data bytes. As a receiver, writing the ACK bit defines the outgoing ACK value; as a transmitter, reading the ACK bit indicates the value received during the last ACK cycle. ACKRQ is set each time a byte is received, indicating that an outgoing ACK value is needed. When ACKRQ is set, software should write the desired outgoing value to the ACK bit before clearing SI. A NACK will be generated if software does not write the ACK bit before clearing SI. SDA will reflect the defined ACK value immediately following a write to the ACK bit; however SCL will remain low until SI is cleared. If a received slave address is not acknowledged, further slave events will be ignored until the next START is detected. 22.4.3.2. Hardware ACK Generation When the EHACK bit in register SMB0ADM is set to 1, automatic slave address recognition and ACK gen- eration is enabled. More detail about automatic slave address recognition can be found in Section 22.4.4. As a receiver, the value currently specified by the ACK bit will be automatically sent on the bus during the ACK cycle of an incoming data byte. As a transmitter, reading the ACK bit indicates the value received on the last ACK cycle. The ACKRQ bit is not used when hardware ACK generation is enabled. If a received slave address is NACKed by hardware, further slave events will be ignored until the next START is detected, and no interrupt will be generated. Table 22.3 lists all sources for hardware changes to the SMBnCN bits. Refer to Table 22.5 for SMBus sta- tus decoding using the SMBnCN register. 214 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 22.4. SMB0CN: SMBus Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name MASTER0 TXMODE0 STA0 STO0 ACKRQ0 ARBLOST0 ACK0 SI0 Type R R R/W R/W R R R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xC0; SFR Page = 0; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Description Read Write 7 MASTER0 SMBus0 Master/Slave 0: SMBus0 operating in N/A Indicator. This read-only bit slave mode. indicates when the SMBus0 is 1: SMBus0 operating in operating as a master. master mode. 6 TXMODE0 SMBus0 Transmit Mode 0: SMBus0 in Receiver N/A Indicator. This read-only bit Mode. indicates when the SMBus0 is 1: SMBus0 in Transmitter operating as a transmitter. Mode. 5 STA0 SMBus0 Start Flag. 0: No Start or repeated 0: No Start generated. Start detected. 1: When Configured as a 1: Start or repeated Start Master, initiates a START detected. or repeated START. 4 STO0 SMBus0 Stop Flag. 0: No Stop condition 0: No STOP condition is detected. transmitted. 1: Stop condition detected 1: When configured as a (if in Slave Mode) or Master, causes a STOP pending (if in Master condition to be transmit- Mode). ted after the next ACK cycle. Cleared by Hardware. 3 ACKRQ0 SMBus0 Acknowledge 0: No ACK requested N/A Request. 1: ACK requested 2 ARBLOST0 SMBus0 Arbitration Lost 0: No arbitration error. N/A Indicator. 1: Arbitration Lost 1 ACK0 SMBus0 Acknowledge. 0: NACK received. 0: Send NACK 1: ACK received. 1: Send ACK 0 SI0 SMBus0 Interrupt Flag. 0: No interrupt pending 0: Clear interrupt, and ini- This bit is set by hardware 1: Interrupt Pending tiate next state machine under the conditions listed in event. Table 15.3. SI0 must be 1: Force interrupt. cleared by software. While SI0 is set, SCL0 is held low and the SMBus0 is stalled. Rev. 1.4 215

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 22.5. SMB1CN: SMBus Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name MASTER1 TXMODE1 STA1 STO1 ACKRQ1 ARBLOST1 ACK1 SI1 Type R R R/W R/W R R R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xC0; SFR Page = F; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Description Read Write 7 MASTER1 SMBus1 Master/Slave 0: SMBus1 operating in N/A Indicator. This read-only bit slave mode. indicates when the SMBus1 is 1: SMBus1 operating in operating as a master. master mode. 6 TXMODE1 SMBus1 Transmit Mode 0: SMBus1 in Receiver N/A Indicator. This read-only bit Mode. indicates when the SMBus1 is 1: SMBus1 in Transmitter operating as a transmitter. Mode. 5 STA1 SMBus1 Start Flag. 0: No Start or repeated 0: No Start generated. Start detected. 1: When Configured as a 1: Start or repeated Start Master, initiates a START detected. or repeated START. 4 STO1 SMBus1 Stop Flag. 0: No Stop condition 0: No STOP condition is detected. transmitted. 1: Stop condition detected 1: When configured as a (if in Slave Mode) or Master, causes a STOP pending (if in Master condition to be transmit- Mode). ted after the next ACK cycle. Cleared by Hardware. 3 ACKRQ1 SMBus1 Acknowledge 0: No ACK requested N/A Request. 1: ACK requested 2 ARBLOST1 SMBus1 Arbitration Lost 0: No arbitration error. N/A Indicator. 1: Arbitration Lost 1 ACK1 SMBus1 Acknowledge. 0: NACK received. 0: Send NACK 1: ACK received. 1: Send ACK 0 SI1 SMBus1 Interrupt Flag. 0: No interrupt pending 0: Clear interrupt, and ini- This bit is set by hardware 1: Interrupt Pending tiate next state machine under the conditions listed in event. Table 15.3. SI1 must be 1: Force interrupt. cleared by software. While SI1 is set, SCL1 is held low and the SMBus1 is stalled. 216 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 22.3. Sources for Hardware Changes to SMBnCN Bit Set by Hardware When: Cleared by Hardware When:  A START is generated.  A STOP is generated. MASTERn  Arbitration is lost.  START is generated.  A START is detected.  SMBnDAT is written before the start of an  Arbitration is lost. TXMODEn SMBus frame.  SMBnDAT is not written before the start of an SMBus frame.  A START followed by an address byte is  Must be cleared by software. STAn received.  A STOP is detected while addressed as a  A pending STOP is generated. STOn slave.  Arbitration is lost due to a detected STOP.  A byte has been received and an ACK  After each ACK cycle. ACKRQn response value is needed (only when hardware ACK is not enabled).  A repeated START is detected as a  Each time SIn is cleared. MASTER when STAn is low (unwanted repeated START).  SCLn is sensed low while attempting to ARBLOSTn generate a STOP or repe ated START condition.  SDAn is sensed low while transmitting a 1 (excluding ACK bits).  The incoming ACK value is low  The incoming ACK value is high ACKn (ACKNOWLEDGE). (NOT ACKNOWLEDGE).  A START has been generated.  Must be cleared by software.  Lost arbitration.  A byte has been transmitted and an ACK/NACK received. SIn  A byte has been received.  A START or repeated START followed by a slave address + R/W has been received.  A STOP has been received. 22.4.4. Hardware Slave Address Recognition The SMBus hardware has the capability to automatically recognize incoming slave addresses and send an ACK without software intervention. Automatic slave address recognition is enabled by setting the EHACK bit in register SMB0ADM to 1. This will enable both automatic slave address recognition and automatic hardware ACK generation for received bytes (as a master or slave). More detail on automatic hardware ACK generation can be found in Section 22.4.3.2. The registers used to define which address(es) are recognized by the hardware are the SMBus Slave Address register and the SMBus Slave Address Mask register. A single address or range of addresses (including the General Call Address 0x00) can be specified using these two registers. The most-significant seven bits of the two registers are used to define which addresses will be ACKed. A 1 in bit positions of the slave address mask SLVM[6:0] enable a comparison between the received slave address and the hard- ware’s slave address SLV[6:0] for those bits. A 0 in a bit of the slave address mask means that bit will be treated as a “don’t care” for comparison purposes. In this case, either a 1 or a 0 value are acceptable on Rev. 1.4 217

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C the incoming slave address. Additionally, if the GCn bit in register SMBnADR is set to 1, hardware will rec- ognize the General Call Address (0x00). Table 22.4 shows some example parameter settings and the slave addresses that will be recognized by hardware under those conditions. Table 22.4. Hardware Address Recognition Examples (EHACK = 1) Hardware Slave Address Slave Address Mask GCn bit Slave Addresses Recognized by SLVn[6:0] SLVMn[6:0] Hardware 0x34 0x7F 0 0x34 0x34 0x7F 1 0x34, 0x00 (General Call) 0x34 0x7E 0 0x34, 0x35 0x34 0x7E 1 0x34, 0x35, 0x00 (General Call) 0x70 0x73 0 0x70, 0x74, 0x78, 0x7C SFR Definition 22.6. SMB0ADR: SMBus0 Slave Address Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SLV0[6:0] GC0 Type R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xCF; SFR Page = 0 Bit Name Function 7:1 SLV0[6:0] SMBus Hardware Slave Address. Defines the SMBus0 Slave Address(es) for automatic hardware acknowledge- ment. Only address bits which have a 1 in the corresponding bit position in SLVM0[6:0] are checked against the incoming address. This allows multiple addresses to be recognized. 0 GC0 General Call Address Enable. When hardware address recognition is enabled (EHACK0 = 1), this bit will deter- mine whether the General Call Address (0x00) is also recognized by hardware. 0: General Call Address is ignored. 1: General Call Address is recognized. 218 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 22.7. SMB0ADM: SMBus0 Slave Address Mask Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SLVM0[6:0] EHACK0 Type R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 SFR Address = 0xCE; SFR Page = 0 Bit Name Function 7:1 SLVM0[6:0] SMBus0 Slave Address Mask. Defines which bits of register SMB0ADR are compared with an incoming address byte, and which bits are ignored. Any bit set to 1 in SLVM0[6:0] enables compari- sons with the corresponding bit in SLV0[6:0]. Bits set to 0 are ignored (can be either 0 or 1 in the incoming address). 0 EHACK0 Hardware Acknowledge Enable. Enables hardware acknowledgement of slave address and received data bytes. 0: Firmware must manually acknowledge all incoming address and data bytes. 1: Automatic Slave Address Recognition and Hardware Acknowledge is Enabled. SFR Definition 22.8. SMB1ADR: SMBus1 Slave Address Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SLV1[6:0] GC1 Type R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xCF; SFR Page = F Bit Name Function 7:1 SLV1[6:0] SMBus1 Hardware Slave Address. Defines the SMBus1 Slave Address(es) for automatic hardware acknowledge- ment. Only address bits which have a 1 in the corresponding bit position in SLVM1[6:0] are checked against the incoming address. This allows multiple addresses to be recognized. 0 GC1 General Call Address Enable. When hardware address recognition is enabled (EHACK1 = 1), this bit will deter- mine whether the General Call Address (0x00) is also recognized by hardware. 0: General Call Address is ignored. 1: General Call Address is recognized. Rev. 1.4 219

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 22.9. SMB1ADM: SMBus1 Slave Address Mask Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SLVM1[6:0] EHACK1 Type R/W R/W Reset 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 SFR Address = 0xCE; SFR Page = F Bit Name Function 7:1 SLVM1[6:0] SMBus1 Slave Address Mask. Defines which bits of register SMB1ADR are compared with an incoming address byte, and which bits are ignored. Any bit set to 1 in SLVM1[6:0] enables compari- sons with the corresponding bit in SLV1[6:0]. Bits set to 0 are ignored (can be either 0 or 1 in the incoming address). 0 EHACK1 Hardware Acknowledge Enable. Enables hardware acknowledgement of slave address and received data bytes. 0: Firmware must manually acknowledge all incoming address and data bytes. 1: Automatic Slave Address Recognition and Hardware Acknowledge is Enabled. 220 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 22.4.5. Data Register The SMBus Data register SMBnDAT holds a byte of serial data to be transmitted or one that has just been received. Software may safely read or write to the data register when the SIn flag is set. Software should not attempt to access the SMBnDAT register when the SMBus is enabled and the SIn flag is cleared to logic 0, as the interface may be in the process of shifting a byte of data into or out of the register. Data in SMBnDAT is always shifted out MSB first. After a byte has been received, the first bit of received data is located at the MSB of SMBnDAT. While data is being shifted out, data on the bus is simultaneously being shifted in. SMBnDAT always contains the last data byte present on the bus. In the event of lost arbi- tration, the transition from master transmitter to slave receiver is made with the correct data or address in SMBnDAT. SFR Definition 22.10. SMB0DAT: SMBus Data Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SMB0DAT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xC2; SFR Page = 0 Bit Name Function 7:0 SMB0DAT[7:0] SMBus0 Data. The SMB0DAT register contains a byte of data to be transmitted on the SMBus0 serial interface or a byte that has just been received on the SMBus0 serial inter- face. The CPU can read from or write to this register whenever the SI0 serial inter- rupt flag (SMB0CN.0) is set to logic 1. The serial data in the register remains stable as long as the SI0 flag is set. When the SI0 flag is not set, the system may be in the process of shifting data in/out and the CPU should not attempt to access this regis- ter. Rev. 1.4 221

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 22.11. SMB1DAT: SMBus Data Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SMB1DAT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xC2; SFR Page = F Bit Name Function 7:0 SMB1DAT[7:0] SMBus1 Data. The SMB1DAT register contains a byte of data to be transmitted on the SMBus1 serial interface or a byte that has just been received on the SMBus1 serial inter- face. The CPU can read from or write to this register whenever the SI1 serial inter- rupt flag (SMB1CN.0) is set to logic 1. The serial data in the register remains stable as long as the SI1 flag is set. When the SI1 flag is not set, the system may be in the process of shifting data in/out and the CPU should not attempt to access this regis- ter. 222 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 22.5. SMBus Transfer Modes The SMBus interface may be configured to operate as master and/or slave. At any particular time, it will be operating in one of the following four modes: Master Transmitter, Master Receiver, Slave Transmitter, or Slave Receiver. The SMBus interface enters Master Mode any time a START is generated, and remains in Master Mode until it loses an arbitration or generates a STOP. An SMBus interrupt is generated at the end of all SMBus byte frames. The position of the ACK interrupt when operating as a receiver depends on whether hardware ACK generation is enabled. As a receiver, the interrupt for an ACK occurs before the ACK with hardware ACK generation disabled, and after the ACK when hardware ACK generation is enabled. As a transmitter, interrupts occur after the ACK, regardless of whether hardware ACK generation is enabled or not. 22.5.1. Write Sequence (Master) During a write sequence, an SMBus master writes data to a slave device. The master in this transfer will be a transmitter during the address byte, and a transmitter during all data bytes. The SMBus interface gener- ates the START condition and transmits the first byte containing the address of the target slave and the data direction bit. In this case the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 0 (WRITE). The master then trans- mits one or more bytes of serial data. After each byte is transmitted, an acknowledge bit is generated by the slave. The transfer is ended when the STO bit is set and a STOP is generated. The interface will switch to Master Receiver Mode if SMB0DAT is not written following a Master Transmitter interrupt. Figure 22.5 shows a typical master write sequence. Two transmit data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be transmitted. Notice that all of the “data byte transferred” interrupts occur after the ACK cycle in this mode, regardless of whether hardware ACK generation is enabled. Figure 22.5. Typical Master Write Sequence Rev. 1.4 223

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 22.5.2. Read Sequence (Master) During a read sequence, an SMBus master reads data from a slave device. The master in this transfer will be a transmitter during the address byte, and a receiver during all data bytes. The SMBus interface gener- ates the START condition and transmits the first byte containing the address of the target slave and the data direction bit. In this case the data direction bit (R/W) will be logic 1 (READ). Serial data is then received from the slave on SDA while the SMBus outputs the serial clock. The slave transmits one or more bytes of serial data. If hardware ACK generation is disabled, the ACKRQ is set to 1 and an interrupt is generated after each received byte. Software must write the ACK bit at that time to ACK or NACK the received byte. With hardware ACK generation enabled, the SMBus hardware will automatically generate the ACK/NACK, and then post the interrupt. It is important to note that the appropriate ACK or NACK value should be set up by the software prior to receiving the byte when hardware ACK generation is enabled. Writing a 1 to the ACK bit generates an ACK; writing a 0 generates a NACK. Software should write a 0 to the ACK bit for the last data transfer, to transmit a NACK. The interface exits Master Receiver Mode after the STO bit is set and a STOP is generated. The interface will switch to Master Transmitter Mode if SMB0- DAT is written while an active Master Receiver. Figure 22.6 shows a typical master read sequence. Two received data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be received. Notice that the ‘data byte transferred’ interrupts occur at different places in the sequence, depending on whether hardware ACK gen- eration is enabled. The interrupt occurs before the ACK with hardware ACK generation disabled, and after the ACK when hardware ACK generation is enabled. Figure 22.6. Typical Master Read Sequence 224 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 22.5.3. Write Sequence (Slave) During a write sequence, an SMBus master writes data to a slave device. The slave in this transfer will be a receiver during the address byte, and a receiver during all data bytes. When slave events are enabled (INH = 0), the interface enters Slave Receiver Mode when a START followed by a slave address and direc- tion bit (WRITE in this case) is received. If hardware ACK generation is disabled, upon entering Slave Receiver Mode, an interrupt is generated and the ACKRQ bit is set. The software must respond to the received slave address with an ACK, or ignore the received slave address with a NACK. If hardware ACK generation is enabled, the hardware will apply the ACK for a slave address which matches the criteria set up by SMB0ADR and SMB0ADM. The interrupt will occur after the ACK cycle. If the received slave address is ignored (by software or hardware), slave interrupts will be inhibited until the next START is detected. If the received slave address is acknowledged, zero or more data bytes are received. If hardware ACK generation is disabled, the ACKRQ is set to 1 and an interrupt is generated after each received byte. Software must write the ACK bit at that time to ACK or NACK the received byte. With hardware ACK generation enabled, the SMBus hardware will automatically generate the ACK/NACK, and then post the interrupt. It is important to note that the appropriate ACK or NACK value should be set up by the software prior to receiving the byte when hardware ACK generation is enabled. The interface exits Slave Receiver Mode after receiving a STOP. The interface will switch to Slave Trans- mitter Mode if SMB0DAT is written while an active Slave Receiver. Figure 22.7 shows a typical slave write sequence. Two received data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be received. Notice that the ‘data byte transferred’ interrupts occur at different places in the sequence, depending on whether hard- ware ACK generation is enabled. The interrup t occurs before the ACK with hardware ACK generation dis- abled, and after the ACK when hardware ACK generation is enabled. Figure 22.7. Typical Slave Write Sequence Rev. 1.4 225

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 22.5.4. Read Sequence (Slave) During a read sequence, an SMBus master reads data from a slave device. The slave in this transfer will be a receiver during the address byte, and a transmitter during all data bytes. When slave events are enabled (INH = 0), the interface enters Slave Receiver Mode (to receive the slave address) when a START followed by a slave address and direction bit (READ in this case) is received. If hardware ACK generation is disabled, upon entering Slave Receiver Mode, an interrupt is generated and the ACKRQ bit is set. The software must respond to the received slave address with an ACK, or ignore the received slave address with a NACK. If hardware ACK generation is enabled, the hardware will apply the ACK for a slave address which matches the criteria set up by SMB0ADR and SMB0ADM. The interrupt will occur after the ACK cycle. If the received slave address is ignored (by software or hardware), slave interrupts will be inhibited until the next START is detected. If the received slave address is acknowledged, zero or more data bytes are trans- mitted. If the received slave address is acknowledged, data should be written to SMB0DAT to be transmit- ted. The interface enters slave transmitter mode, and transmits one or more bytes of data. After each byte is transmitted, the master sends an acknowledge bit; if the acknowledge bit is an ACK, SMB0DAT should be written with the next data byte. If the acknowledge bit is a NACK, SMB0DAT should not be written to before SI is cleared (an error condition may be generated if SMB0DAT is written following a received NACK while in slave transmitter mode). The interface exits slave transmitter mode after receiving a STOP. The interface will switch to slave receiver mode if SMB0DAT is not written following a Slave Transmitter interrupt. Figure 22.8 shows a typical slave read sequence. Two transmitted data bytes are shown, though any number of bytes may be transmitted. Notice that all of the “data byte transferred” interrupts occur after the ACK cycle in this mode, regardless of whether hardware ACK generation is enabled. Figure 22.8. Typical Slave Read Sequence 22.6. SMBus Status Decoding The current SMBus status can be easily decoded using the SMB0CN register. The appropriate actions to take in response to an SMBus event depend on whether hardware slave address recognition and ACK generation is enabled or disabled. Table 22.5 describes the typical actions when hardware slave address recognition and ACK generation is disabled. Table 22.6 describes the typical actions when hardware slave address recognition and ACK generation is enabled. In the tables, STATUS VECTOR refers to the four upper bits of SMB0CN: MASTER, TXMODE, STA, and STO. The shown response options are only the typ- ical responses; application-specific procedures are allowed as long as they conform to the SMBus specifi- cation. Highlighted responses are allowed by hardware but do not conform to the SMBus specification. 226 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 22.5. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) Values to d Values Read e Write us ct e at pe od s r Q ST Current SMbus State Typical Response Options St Ex M atu cto KR LO CK TA TO CK ext or St Ve AC RB A S S A N ect A V A master START was gener- Load slave address + R/W into 0 0 X 1100 1110 0 0 X ated. SMB0DAT. A master data or address byte Set STA to restart transfer. 1 0 X 1110 0 0 0 was transmitted; NACK received. Abort transfer. 0 1 X — r e t mit Load next data byte into SMB0- 0 0 X 1100 s DAT. n a r End transfer with STOP. 0 1 X — T r 1100 e A master data or address byte End transfer with STOP and start 1 1 X — t s a 0 0 1 was transmitted; ACK another transfer. M received. Send repeated START. 1 0 X 1110 Switch to Master Receiver Mode 0 0 X 1000 (clear SI without writing new data to SMB0DAT). Acknowledge received byte; 0 0 1 1000 Read SMB0DAT. Send NACK to indicate last byte, 0 1 0 — and send STOP. Send NACK to indicate last byte, 1 1 0 1110 and send STOP followed by er START. v ei Send ACK followed by repeated 1 0 1 1110 ec A master data byte was R 1000 1 0 X START. received; ACK requested. r e Send NACK to indicate last byte, 1 0 0 1110 t s a and send repeated START. M Send ACK and switch to Master 0 0 1 1100 Transmitter Mode (write to SMB0DAT before clearing SI). Send NACK and switch to Mas- 0 0 0 1100 ter Transmitter Mode (write to SMB0DAT before clearing SI). Rev. 1.4 227

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 22.5. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) (Continued) Values to d Values Read e Write us ct e at pe od s r Q ST Current SMbus State Typical Response Options St Ex M atu cto KR LO CK TA TO CK ext or St Ve AC RB A S S A N ect A V A slave byte was transmitted; No action required (expecting 0 0 X 0001 0 0 0 NACK received. STOP condition). r e t A slave byte was transmitted; Load SMB0DAT with next data 0 0 X 0100 mit 0100 0 0 1 ACK received. byte to transmit. s n a A Slave byte was transmitted; No action required (expecting 0 0 X 0001 r 0 1 X T error detected. Master to end transfer). e v a An illegal STOP or bus error 0 0 X — Sl 0101 0 X X was detected while a Slave Clear STO. Transmission was in progress. If Write, Acknowledge received 0 0 1 0000 address A slave address + R/W was 1 0 X If Read, Load SMB0DAT with 0 0 1 0100 received; ACK requested. data byte; ACK received address NACK received address. 0 0 0 — If Write, Acknowledge received 0 0 1 0000 0010 address Lost arbitration as master; If Read, Load SMB0DAT with 0 0 1 0100 r ve 1 1 X slave address + R/W received; data byte; ACK received address cei ACK requested. NACK received address. 0 0 0 — e R e Reschedule failed transfer; 1 0 0 1110 v a NACK received address. Sl A STOP was detected while 0 0 X — 0 0 X addressed as a Slave Trans- Clear STO. 0001 mitter or Slave Receiver. Lost arbitration while attempt- No action required (transfer 0 0 0 — 1 1 X ing a STOP. complete/aborted). Acknowledge received byte; 0 0 1 0000 0000 1 0 X A slave byte was received; Read SMB0DAT. ACK requested. NACK received byte. 0 0 0 — 228 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 22.5. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Disabled (EHACK = 0) (Continued) Values to d Values Read e Write us ct e at pe od s r Q ST Current SMbus State Typical Response Options St Ex M atu cto KR LO CK TA TO CK ext or St Ve AC RB A S S A N ect A V n Lost arbitration while attempt- Abort failed transfer. 0 0 X — o 0010 0 1 X ti ing a repeated START. Reschedule failed transfer. 1 0 X 1110 di n o Lost arbitration due to a Abort failed transfer. 0 0 X — C 0001 0 1 X or detected STOP. Reschedule failed transfer. 1 0 X 1110 r r s E 0000 1 1 X Lost arbitration while transmit- Abort failed transfer. 0 0 0 — Bu ting a data byte as master. Reschedule failed transfer. 1 0 0 1110 Table 22.6. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) Values to d Values Read e Write us ct e at pe Mod Status Vector ACKRQ RBLOST ACK Current SMbus State Typical Response Options STA STO ACK Next St ector Ex A V A master START was gener- Load slave address + R/W into 0 0 X 1100 1110 0 0 X ated. SMB0DAT. A master data or address byte Set STA to restart transfer. 1 0 X 1110 0 0 0 was transmitted; NACK 0 1 X — Abort transfer. received. r e tt Load next data byte into SMB0- 0 0 X 1100 mi DAT. s n a End transfer with STOP. 0 1 X — r T r 1100 End transfer with STOP and start 1 1 X — e A master data or address byte t another transfer. s 0 0 1 was transmitted; ACK a M received. Send repeated START. 1 0 X 1110 Switch to Master Receiver Mode 0 0 1 1000 (clear SI without writing new data to SMB0DAT). Set ACK for initial data byte. Rev. 1.4 229

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 22.6. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) (Continued) Values to d Values Read e Write us ct e at pe Mod Status Vector ACKRQ RBLOST ACK Current SMbus State Typical Response Options STA STO ACK Next St ector Ex A V Set ACK for next data byte; 0 0 1 1000 Read SMB0DAT. Set NACK to indicate next data 0 0 0 1000 byte as the last data byte; A master data byte was 0 0 1 Read SMB0DAT. received; ACK sent. r Initiate repeated START. 1 0 0 1110 e v ei Switch to Master Transmitter 0 0 X 1100 c Mode (write to SMB0DAT before e R 1000 clearing SI). r e t Read SMB0DAT; send STOP. 0 1 0 — s a M Read SMB0DAT; Send STOP 1 1 0 1110 A master data byte was followed by START. 0 0 0 received; NACK sent (l ast Initiate repeated START. 1 0 0 1110 byte). Switch to Master Transmitter 0 0 X 1100 Mode (write to SMB0DAT before clearing SI). A slave byte was transmitted; No action required (expecting 0 0 X 0001 0 0 0 NACK received. STOP condition). r e t A slave byte was transmitted; Load SMB0DAT with next data 0 0 X 0100 mit 0100 0 0 1 ACK received. byte to transmit. s n a A Slave byte was transmitted; No action required (expecting 0 0 X 0001 r 0 1 X T error detected. Master to end transfer). e av An illegal STOP or bus error 0 0 X — Sl 0101 0 X X was detected while a Slave Clear STO. Transmission was in progress. 230 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 22.6. SMBus Status Decoding: Hardware ACK Enabled (EHACK = 1) (Continued) Values to d Values Read e Write us ct e at pe Mod Status Vector ACKRQ RBLOST ACK Current SMbus State Typical Response Options STA STO ACK Next St ector Ex A V If Write, Set ACK for first data 0 0 1 0000 A slave address + R/W was byte. 0 0 X received; ACK sent. If Read, Load SMB0DAT with 0 0 X 0100 data byte 0010 If Write, Set ACK for first data 0 0 1 0000 byte. Lost arbitration as master; 0 1 X slave address + R/W received; If Read, Load SMB0DAT with 0 0 X 0100 r e ACK sent. data byte v ei c Reschedule failed transfer 1 0 X 1110 e R A STOP was detected while 0 0 X — e v 0 0 X addressed as a Slave Trans- Clear STO. a Sl 0001 mitter or Slave Receiver. Lost arbitration while attempt- No action required (transfer 0 0 0 — 0 1 X ing a STOP. complete/aborted). Set ACK for next data byte; 0 0 1 0000 Read SMB0DAT. 0000 0 0 X A slave byte was received. Set NACK for next data byte; 0 0 0 0000 Read SMB0DAT. n Lost arbitration while attempt- Abort failed transfer. 0 0 X — o 0010 0 1 X diti ing a repeated START. Reschedule failed transfer. 1 0 X 1110 n o Lost arbitration due to a Abort failed transfer. 0 0 X — C 0001 0 1 X r detected STOP. Reschedule failed transfer. 1 0 X 1110 o r r Abort failed transfer. 0 0 X — E Lost arbitration while transmit- us 0000 0 1 X ting a data byte as master. Reschedule failed transfer. 1 0 X 1110 B Rev. 1.4 231

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 23. UART0 UART0 is an asynchronous, full duplex serial port offering modes 1 and 3 of the standard 8051 UART. Enhanced baud rate support allows a wide range of clock sources to generate standard baud rates (details in Section “23.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation” on page 233). Received data buffering allows UART0 to start reception of a second incoming data byte before software has finished reading the previous data byte. UART0 has two associated SFRs: Serial Control Register 0 (SCON0) and Serial Data Buffer 0 (SBUF0). The single SBUF0 location provides access to both transmit and receive registers. Writes to SBUF0 always access the Transmit register. Reads of SBUF0 always access the buffered Receive register; it is not possible to read data from the Transmit register. With UART0 interrupts enabled, an interrupt is generated each time a transmit is completed (TI0 is set in SCON0), or a data byte has been received (RI0 is set in SCON0). The UART0 interrupt flags are not cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine. They must be cleared manually by software, allowing software to determine the cause of the UART0 interrupt (transmit complete or receive complete). Figure 23.1. UART0 Block Diagram Rev. 1.4 232

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 23.1. Enhanced Baud Rate Generation The UART0 baud rate is generated by Timer 1 in 8-bit auto-reload mode. The TX clock is generated by TL1; the RX clock is generated by a copy of TL1 (shown as RX Timer in Figure 23.2), which is not user- accessible. Both TX and RX Timer overflows are divided by two to generate the TX and RX baud rates. The RX Timer runs when Timer 1 is enabled, and uses the same reload value (TH1). However, an RX Timer reload is forced when a START condition is detected on the RX pin. This allows a receive to begin any time a START is detected, independent of the TX Timer state. Figure 23.2. UART0 Baud Rate Logic Timer 1 should be configured for Mode 2, 8-bit auto-reload (see Section “26.1.3. Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload” on page 267). The Timer 1 reload value should be set so that overflows will occur at two times the desired UART baud rate frequency. Note that Timer 1 may be clocked by one of six sources: SYSCLK, SYSCLK/4, SYSCLK/12, SYSCLK/48, the external oscillator clock/8, or an external input T1. For any given Timer 1 clock source, the UART0 baud rate is determined by Equation 23.1-A and Equation 23.1-B. A) 1 UARTBaudRate = ---T1_Overflow_Rate 2 T1 B) CLK T1_Overflow_Rate = --------------------------- 256–TH1 Equation 23.1. UART0 Baud Rate Where T1 is the frequency of the clock supplied to Timer 1, and T1H is the high byte of Timer 1 (reload CLK value). Timer 1 clock frequency is selected as described in Section “26. Timers” on page 263. A quick ref- erence for typical baud rates and system clock frequencies is given in Table 23.1. The internal oscillator may still generate the system clock when the external oscillator is driving Timer 1. 233 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 23.2. Operational Modes UART0 provides standard asynchronous, full duplex communication. The UART mode (8-bit or 9-bit) is selected by the S0MODE bit (SCON0.7). Typical UART connection options are shown in Figure 23.3. Figure 23.3. UART Interconnect Diagram 23.2.1. 8-Bit UART 8-Bit UART mode uses a total of 10 bits per data byte: one start bit, eight data bits (LSB first), and one stop bit. Data are transmitted LSB first from the TX0 pin and received at the RX0 pin. On receive, the eight data bits are stored in SBUF0 and the stop bit goes into RB80 (SCON0.2). Data transmission begins when software writes a data byte to the SBUF0 register. The TI0 Transmit Inter- rupt Flag (SCON0.1) is set at the end of the transmission (the beginning of the stop-bit time). Data recep- tion can begin any time after the REN0 Receive Enable bit (SCON0.4) is set to logic 1. After the stop bit is received, the data byte will be loaded into the SBUF0 receive register if the following conditions are met: RI0 must be logic 0, and if MCE0 is logic 1, the stop bit must be logic 1. In the event of a receive data over- run, the first received 8 bits are latched into the SBUF0 receive register and the following overrun data bits are lost. If these conditions are met, the eight bits of data is stored in SBUF0, the stop bit is stored in RB80 and the RI0 flag is set. If these conditions are not met, SBUF0 and RB80 will not be loaded and the RI0 flag will not be set. An interrupt will occur if enabled when either TI0 or RI0 is set. Figure 23.4. 8-Bit UART Timing Diagram Rev. 1.4 234

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 23.2.2. 9-Bit UART 9-bit UART mode uses a total of eleven bits per data byte: a start bit, 8 data bits (LSB first), a programma- ble ninth data bit, and a stop bit. The state of the ninth transmit data bit is determined by the value in TB80 (SCON0.3), which is assigned by user software. It can be assigned the value of the parity flag (bit P in reg- ister PSW) for error detection, or used in multiprocessor communications. On receive, the ninth data bit goes into RB80 (SCON0.2) and the stop bit is ignored. Data transmission begins when an instruction writes a data byte to the SBUF0 register. The TI0 Transmit Interrupt Flag (SCON0.1) is set at the end of the transmission (the beginning of the stop-bit time). Data reception can begin any time after the REN0 Receive Enable bit (SCON0.4) is set to 1. After the stop bit is received, the data byte will be loaded into the SBUF0 receive register if the following conditions are met: (1) RI0 must be logic 0, and (2) if MCE0 is logic 1, the 9th bit must be logic 1 (when MCE0 is logic 0, the state of the ninth data bit is unimportant). If these conditions are met, the eight bits of data are stored in SBUF0, the ninth bit is stored in RB80, and the RI0 flag is set to 1. If the above conditions are not met, SBUF0 and RB80 will not be loaded and the RI0 flag will not be set to 1. A UART0 interrupt will occur if enabled when either TI0 or RI0 is set to 1. Figure 23.5. 9-Bit UART Timing Diagram 235 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 23.3. Multiprocessor Communications 9-Bit UART mode supports multiprocessor communication between a master processor and one or more slave processors by special use of the ninth data bit. When a master processor wants to transmit to one or more slaves, it first sends an address byte to select the target(s). An address byte differs from a data byte in that its ninth bit is logic 1; in a data byte, the ninth bit is always set to logic 0. Setting the MCE0 bit (SCON0.5) of a slave processor configures its UART such that when a stop bit is received, the UART will generate an interrupt only if the ninth bit is logic 1 (RB80 = 1) signifying an address byte has been received. In the UART interrupt handler, software will compare the received address with the slave's own assigned 8-bit address. If the addresses match, the slave will clear its MCE0 bit to enable interrupts on the reception of the following data byte(s). Slaves that weren't addressed leave their MCE0 bits set and do not generate interrupts on the reception of the following data bytes, thereby ignoring the data. Once the entire message is received, the addressed slave resets its MCE0 bit to ignore all transmis- sions until it receives the next address byte. Multiple addresses can be assigned to a single slave and/or a single address can be assigned to multiple slaves, thereby enabling "broadcast" transmissions to more than one slave simultaneously. The master processor can be configured to receive all transmissions or a protocol can be implemented such that the master/slave role is temporarily reversed to enable half-duplex transmission between the original master and slave(s). Figure 23.6. UART Multi-Processor Mode Interconnect Diagram Rev. 1.4 236

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 23.1. SCON0: Serial Port 0 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name S0MODE - MCE0 REN0 TB80 RB80 TI0 RI0 Type R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x98; SFR Page = All Pages; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Function 7 S0MODE Serial Port 0 Operation Mode. Selects the UART0 Operation Mode. 0: 8-bit UART with Variable Baud Rate. 1: 9-bit UART with Variable Baud Rate. 6 Unused Read = 1b, Write = don’t care. 5 MCE0 Multiprocessor Communication Enable. The function of this bit is dependent on the Serial Port 0 Operation Mode: Mode 0: Checks for valid stop bit. 0: Logic level of stop bit is i gnored. 1: RI0 will only be activated if stop bit is logic level 1. Mode 1: Multiprocessor Communications Enable. 0: Logic level of ninth bit is ignored. 1: RI0 is set and an interrupt is generated only when the ninth bit is logic 1. 4 REN0 Receive Enable. 0: UART0 reception disabled. 1: UART0 reception enabled. 3 TB80 Ninth Transmission Bit. The logic level of this bit will be sent as the ninth transmission bit in 9-bit UART Mode (Mode 1). Unused in 8-bit mode (Mode 0). 2 RB80 Ninth Receive Bit. RB80 is assigned the value of the STOP bit in Mode 0; it is assigned the value of the 9th data bit in Mode 1. 1 TI0 Transmit Interrupt Flag. Set by hardware when a byte of data has been transmitted by UART0 (after the 8th bit in 8-bit UART Mode, or at the beginning of the STOP bit in 9-bit UART Mode). When the UART0 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the UART0 interrupt service routine. This bit must be cleared manually by software. 0 RI0 Receive Interrupt Flag. Set to 1 by hardware when a byte of data has been received by UART0 (set at the STOP bit sampling time). When the UART0 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit to 1 causes the CPU to vector to the UART0 interrupt service routine. This bit must be cleared manually by software. 237 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 23.2. SBUF0: Serial (UART0) Port Data Buffer Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SBUF0[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x99; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 SBUF0[7:0] Serial Data Buffer Bits 7–0 (MSB–LSB). This SFR accesses two registers; a transmit shift register and a receive latch register. When data is written to SBUF0, it goes to the transmit shift register and is held for serial transmission. Writing a byte to SBUF0 initiates the transmission. A read of SBUF0 returns the contents of the receive latch. Table 23.1. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using Internal Oscillator Target Actual Baud Osc illator Timer Clock SCA1-SCA0 T1M Timer 1 Baud Baud Rate Divide Source (pre-scale Reload Rate (bps) Rate (bps) Error Factor select* Value (hex) 230400 230769 0.16% 52 SYSCLK XX 1 0xE6 z H 115200 115385 0.16% 104 SYSCLK XX 1 0xCC M 2 57600 57692 0.16% 208 SYSCLK XX 1 0x98 1 28800 28846 0.16% 416 SYSCLK XX 1 0x30 = K 14400 14423 0.16% 832 SYSCLK / 4 01 0 0x98 L C 9600 9615 0.16% 1248 SYSCLK / 4 01 0 0x64 S 2400 2404 0.16% 4992 SYSCLK / 12 00 0 0x30 Y S 1200 1202 0.16% 9984 SYSCLK / 48 10 0 0x98 230400 230769 0.16% 104 SYSCLK XX 1 0xCC z H 115200 115385 0.16% 208 SYSCLK XX 1 0x98 M 4 57600 57692 0.16% 416 SYSCLK XX 1 0x30 2 28800 28846 0.16% 832 SYSCLK / 4 01 0 0x98 = K 14400 14423 0.16% 1664 SYSCLK / 4 01 0 0x30 L C 9600 9615 0.16% 2496 SYSCLK / 12 00 0 0x98 S 2400 2404 0.16% 9984 SYSCLK / 48 10 0 0x98 Y S 1200 1202 0.16% 19968 SYSCLK / 48 10 0 0x30 z 230400 230769 0.16% 208 SYSCLK XX 1 0x98 H M 115200 115385 0.16% 416 SYSCLK XX 1 0x30 8 57600 57692 0.16% 832 SYSCLK / 4 01 0 0x98 4 = 28800 28846 0.16% 1664 SYSCLK / 4 01 0 0x30 K 14400 14388 0.08% 3336 SYSCLK / 12 00 0 0x75 L C 9600 9615 0.16% 4992 SYSCLK / 12 00 0 0x30 S Y 2400 2404 0.16% 19968 SYSCLK / 48 10 0 0x30 S Rev. 1.4 238

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 23.1. Timer Settings for Standard Baud Rates Using Internal Oscillator Target Actual Baud Oscillator Timer Clock SCA1-SCA0 T1M Timer 1 Baud Baud Rate Divide Source (pre-scale Reload Rate (bps) Rate (bps) Error Factor select* Value (hex) Note: SCA1-SCA0 and T1M define the Timer Clock Source. X = Don’t care 239 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 24. UART1 UART1 is an asynchronous, full duplex serial port offering a variety of data formatting options. A dedicated baud rate generator with a 16-bit timer and selectable prescaler is included, which can generate a wide range of baud rates (details in Section “24.1. Baud Rate Generator” on page 241). A received data FIFO allows UART1 to receive up to three data bytes before data is lost and an overflow occurs. UART1 has six associated SFRs. Three are used for the Baud Rate Generator (SBCON1, SBRLH1, and SBRLL1), two are used for data formatting, control, and status functions (SCON1, SMOD1), and one is used to send and receive data (SBUF1). The single SBUF1 location provides access to both the transmit holding register and the receive FIFO. Writes to SBUF1 always access the Transmit Holding Register. Reads of SBUF1 always access the first byte of the Receive FIFO; it is not possible to read data from the Transmit Holding Register. With UART1 interrupts enabled, an interrupt is generated each time a transmit is completed (TI1 is set in SCON1), or a data byte has been received (RI1 is set in SCON1). The UART1 interrupt flags are not cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine. They must be cleared manually by software, allowing software to determine the cause of the UART1 interrupt (transmit complete or receive complete). Note that if additional bytes are available in the Receive FIFO, the RI1 bit cannot be cleared by software. Figure 24.1. UART1 Block Diagram Rev. 1.4 240

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 24.1. Baud Rate Generator The UART1 baud rate is generated by a dedicated 16-bit timer which runs from the controller’s core clock (SYSCLK), and has prescaler options of 1, 4, 12, or 48. The timer and prescaler options combined allow for a wide selection of baud rates over many SYSCLK frequencies. The baud rate generator is configured using three registers: SBCON1, SBRLH1, and SBRLL1. The UART1 Baud Rate Generator Control Register (SBCON1, SFR Definition ) enables or disables the baud rate generator, and selects the prescaler value for the timer. The baud rate generator must be enabled for UART1 to function. Registers SBRLH1 and SBRLL1 contain a 16-bit reload value for the dedicated 16-bit timer. The internal timer counts up from the reload value on every clock tick. On timer overflows (0xFFFF to 0x0000), the timer is reloaded. For reliable UART operation, it is recommended that the UART baud rate is not configured for baud rates faster than SYSCLK/16. The baud rate for UART1 is defined in Equation 24.1. SYSCLK 1 1 Baud Rate = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 65536–(SBRLH1:SBRLL1) 2 Prescaler Equation 24.1. UART1 Baud Rate A quick reference for typical baud rates and system clock frequencies is given in Table 24.1. Table 24.1. Baud Rate Generator Settings for Standard Baud Rates Target Baud Actual Baud Baud Rate Oscillator SB1PS[1:0] Reload Value in Rate (bps) Rate (bps) Error Divide (Prescaler Bits) SBRLH1:SBRLL1 Factor 230400 230769 0.16% 52 11 0xFFE6 z H 115200 115385 0.16% 104 11 0xFFCC M 2 57600 57692 0.16% 208 11 0xFF98 1 28800 28846 0.16% 416 11 0xFF30 = K 14400 14388 0.08% 834 11 0xFE5F L C 9600 9600 0.0% 1250 11 0xFD8F S 2400 2400 0.0% 5000 11 0xF63C Y S 1200 1200 0.0% 10000 11 0xEC78 230400 230769 0.16% 104 11 0xFFCC z H 115200 115385 0.16% 208 11 0xFF98 M 4 57600 57692 0.16% 416 11 0xFF30 2 28800 28777 0.08% 834 11 0xFE5F = K 14400 14406 0.04% 1666 11 0xFCBF L C 9600 9600 0.0% 2500 11 0xFB1E S 2400 2400 0.0% 10000 11 0xEC78 Y S 1200 1200 0.0% 20000 11 0xD8F0 230400 230769 0.16% 208 11 0xFF98 z H 115200 115385 0.16% 416 11 0xFF30 M 8 57600 57554 0.08% 834 11 0xFE5F 4 28800 28812 0.04% 1666 11 0xFCBF = K 14400 14397 0.02% 3334 11 0xF97D L C 9600 9600 0.0% 5000 11 0xF63C S 2400 2400 0.0% 20000 11 0xD8F0 Y S 1200 1200 0.0% 40000 11 0xB1E0 241 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 24.2. Data Format UART1 has a number of available options for data formatting. Data transfers begin with a start bit (logic low), followed by the data bits (sent LSB-first), a parity or extra bit (if selected), and end with one or two stop bits (logic high). The data length is variable between 5 and 8 bits. A parity bit can be appended to the data, and automatically generated and detected by hardware for even, odd, mark, or space parity. The stop bit length is selectable between short (1 bit time) and long (1.5 or 2 bit times), and a multi-processor com- munication mode is available for implementing networked UART buses. All of the data formatting options can be configured using the SMOD1 register, shown in SFR Definition . Figure 24.2 shows the timing for a UART1 transaction without parity or an extra bit enabled. Figure 24.3 shows the timing for a UART1 trans- action with parity enabled (PE1 = 1). Figure 24.4 is an example of a UART1 transaction when the extra bit is enabled (XBE1 = 1). Note that the extra bit feature is not available when parity is enabled, and the sec- ond stop bit is only an option for data lengths of 6, 7, or 8 bits. Figure 24.2. UART1 T iming Without Parity or Extra Bit Figure 24.3. UART1 Timing With Parity Figure 24.4. UART1 Timing With Extra Bit Rev. 1.4 242

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 24.3. Configuration and Operation UART1 provides standard asynchronous, full duplex communication. It can operate in a point-to-point serial communications application, or as a node on a multi-processor serial interface. To operate in a point- to-point application, where there are only two devices on the serial bus, the MCE1 bit in SMOD1 should be cleared to 0. For operation as part of a multi-processor communications bus, the MCE1 and XBE1 bits should both be set to 1. In both types of applications, data is transmitted from the microcontroller on the TX1 pin, and received on the RX1 pin. The TX1 and RX1 pins are configured using the crossbar and the Port I/O registers, as detailed in Section “20. Port Input/Output” on page 153. In typical UART communications, The transmit (TX) output of one device is connected to the receive (RX) input of the other device, either directly or through a bus transceiver, as shown in Figure 24.5. Figure 24.5. Typical UART Interconnect Diagram 24.3.1. Data Transmission Data transmission is double-buffered, and begins when software writes a data byte to the SBUF1 register. Writing to SBUF1 places data in the Transmit Holding Register, and the Transmit Holding Register Empty flag (THRE1) will be cleared to 0. If the UARTs shift register is empty (i.e. no transmission is in progress) the data will be placed in the shift register, and the THRE1 bit will be set to 1. If a transmission is in prog- ress, the data will remain in the Transmit Holding Register until the current transmission is complete. The TI1 Transmit Interrupt Flag (SCON1.1) will be set at the end of any transmission (the beginning of the stop- bit time). If enabled, an interrupt will occur when TI1 is set. If the extra bit function is enabled (XBE1 = 1) and the parity function is disabled (PE1 = 0), the value of the TBX1 (SCON1.3) bit will be sent in the extra bit position. When the parity function is enabled (PE1 = 1), hardware will generate the parity bit according to the selected parity type (selected with S1PT[1:0]), and append it to the data field. Note: when parity is enabled, the extra bit function is not available. 24.3.2. Data Reception Data reception can begin any time after the REN1 Receive Enable bit (SCON1.4) is set to logic 1. After the stop bit is received, the data byte will be stored in the receive FIFO if the following conditions are met: the receive FIFO (3 bytes deep) must not be full, and the stop bit(s) must be logic 1. In the event that the receive FIFO is full, the incoming byte will be lost, and a Receive FIFO Overrun Error will be generated (OVR1 in register SCON1 will be set to logic 1). If the stop bit(s) were logic 0, the incoming data will not be stored in the receive FIFO. If the reception conditions are met, the data is stored in the receive FIFO, and the RI1 flag will be set. Note: when MCE1 = 1, RI1 will only be set if the extra bit was equal to 1. Data can be read from the receive FIFO by reading the SBUF1 register. The SBUF1 register represents the oldest byte in the FIFO. After SBUF1 is read, the next byte in the FIFO is immediately loaded into SBUF1, and space is made available in the FIFO for another incoming byte. If enabled, an interrupt will occur when RI1 is set. RI1 can only be cleared to '0' by software when there is no more information in the FIFO. The rec- ommended procedure to empty the FIFO contents is: 243 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 1. Clear RI1 to 0 2. Read SBUF1 3. Check RI1, and repeat at Step 1 if RI1 is set to 1. If the extra bit function is enabled (XBE1 = 1) and the parity function is disabled (PE1 = 0), the extra bit for the oldest byte in the FIFO can be read from the RBX1 bit (SCON1.2). If the extra bit function is not enabled, the value of the stop bit for the oldest FIFO byte will be presented in RBX1. When the parity func- tion is enabled (PE1 = 1), hardware will check the received parity bit against the selected parity type (selected with S1PT[1:0]) when receiving data. If a byte with parity error is received, the PERR1 flag will be set to 1. This flag must be cleared by software. Note: when parity is enabled, the extra bit function is not available. 24.3.3. Multiprocessor Communications UART1 supports multiprocessor communication between a master processor and one or more slave pro- cessors by special use of the extra data bit. When a master processor wants to transmit to one or more slaves, it first sends an address byte to select the target(s). An address byte differs from a data byte in that its extra bit is logic 1; in a data byte, the extra bit is always set to logic 0. Setting the MCE1 bit (SMOD1.7) of a slave processor configures its UART such that when a stop bit is received, the UART will generate an interrupt only if the extra bit is logic 1 (RBX1 = 1) signifying an address byte has been received. In the UART interrupt handler, software will compare the received address with the slave's own assigned address. If the addresses match, the slave will clear its MCE1 bit to enable interrupts on the reception of the follo wing data byte(s). Slaves that weren't addressed leave their MCE1 bits set and do not generate interrupts on the reception of the following data bytes, thereby ignoring the data. Once the entire message is received, the addressed slave resets its MCE1 bit to ignore all trans- missions until it receives the next address byte. Multiple addresses can be assigned to a single slave and/or a single address can be assigned to multiple slaves, thereby enabling "broadcast" transmissions to more than one slave simultaneously. The master processor can be configured to receive all transmissions or a protocol can be implemented such that the master/slave role is temporarily reversed to enable half-duplex transmission between the original master and slave(s). Figure 24.6. UART Multi-Processor Mode Interconnect Diagram Rev. 1.4 244

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 24.1. SCON1: UART1 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name OVR1 PERR1 THRE1 REN1 TBX1 RBX1 TI1 RI1 Type R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xD2; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 OVR1 Receive FIFO Overrun Flag. This bit indicates a receive FIFO overrun condition, where an incoming character is discarded due to a full FIFO. This bit must be cleared to 0 by software. 0: Receive FIFO Overrun has not occurred. 1: Receive FIFO Overrun has occurred. 6 PERR1 Parity Error Flag. When parity is enabled, this bit indicates that a parity error has occurred. It is set to 1 when the parity of the oldest byte in the FIFO does not match the selected Parity Type. This bit must be cleared to 0 by software. 0: Parity Error has not occurre d. 1: Parity Error has occurred. 5 THRE1 Transmit Holding Register Empty Flag. 0: Transmit Holding Register not Empty - do not write to SBUF1. 1: Transmit Holding Register Empty - it is safe to write to SBUF1. 4 REN1 Receive Enable. This bit enables/disables the UART receiver. When disabled, bytes can still be read from the receive FIFO. 0: UART1 reception disabled. 1: UART1 reception enabled. 3 TBX1 Extra Transmission Bit. The logic level of this bit will be assigned to the extra transmission bit when XBE1 = 1. This bit is not used when Parity is enabled. 2 RBX1 Extra Receive Bit. RBX1 is assigned the value of the extra bit when XBE1 = 1. If XBE1 is cleared to 0, RBX1 is assigned the logic level of the first stop bit. This bit is not valid when Parity is enabled. 1 TI1 Transmit Interrupt Flag. Set to a 1 by hardware after data has been transmitted at the beginning of the STOP bit. When the UART1 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the UART1 interrupt service routine. This bit must be cleared manually by software. 0 RI1 Receive Interrupt Flag. Set to 1 by hardware when a byte of data has been received by UART1 (set at the STOP bit sam- pling time). When the UART1 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit to 1 causes the CPU to vector to the UART1 interrupt service routine. This bit must be cleared manually by software. Note that RI1 will remain set to '1' as long as there is still data in the UART FIFO. After the last byte has been shifted from the FIFO to SBUF1, RI1 can be cleared. 245 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 24.2. SMOD1: UART1 Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name MCE1 S1PT[1:0] PE1 S1DL[1:0] XBE1 SBL1 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 SFR Address = 0xE5; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 MCE1 Multiprocessor Communication Enable. 0: RI will be activated if stop bit(s) are 1. 1: RI will be activated if stop bit(s) and extra bit are 1 (extra bit must be enabled using XBE1). Note: This function is not available when hardware parity is enabled. 6:5 S1PT[1:0] Parity Type Bits. 00: Odd 01: Even 10: Mark 11: Space 4 PE1 Parity Enable. This bit activates hardware parity generation and checking. The parity type is selected by bits S1PT1-0 when parity is enabled. 0: Hardware parity is disabled. 1: Hardware parity is enabled. 3:2 S1DL[1:0] Data Length. 00: 5-bit data 01: 6-bit data 10: 7-bit data 11: 8-bit data 1 XBE1 Extra Bit Enable. When enabled, the value of TBX1 will be appended to the data field. 0: Extra Bit Disabled. 1: Extra Bit Enabled. 0 SBL1 Stop Bit Length. 0: Short—Stop bit is active for one bit time. 1: Long—Stop bit is active for two bit times (data length = 6, 7, or 8 bits), or 1.5 bit times (data length = 5 bits). Rev. 1.4 246

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 24.3. SBUF1: UART1 Data Buffer Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SBUF1[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xD3; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Description Write Read 7:0 SBUF1[7:0] Serial Data Buffer Bits. Writing a byte to SBUF1 Reading SBUF1 retrieves This SFR is used to both send initiates the transmission. data from the receive data from the UART and to When data is written to FIFO. When read, the old- read received data from the SBUF1, it first goes to the est byte in the receive UART1 receive FIFO. Transmit Holding Register, FIFO is returned, and where it is held for serial removed from the FIFO. transmission. When the Up to three bytes may be transmit shift register is held in the FIFO. If there available, data is trans- are additional bytes avail- ferred into the shift regis- able in the FIFO, the RI1 ter, and SBUF1 may be bit will remain at logic 1, written again. even after being cleared by software. 247 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 24.4. SBCON1: UART1 Baud Rate Generator Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SB1RUN SB1PS[1:0] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xAC; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 Reserved Read = 0b. Must Write 0b. 6 SB1RUN Baud Rate Generator Enable. 0: Baud Rate Generator is disabled. UART1 will not function. 1: Baud Rate Generator is enabled. 5:2 Reserved Read = 0000b. Must Write 0000b. 1:0 SB1PS[1:0] Baud Rate Prescaler Select. 00: Prescaler = 12 01: Prescaler = 4 10: Prescaler = 48 11: Prescaler = 1 SFR Definition 24.5. SBRLH1: UART1 Baud Rate Generator High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SBRLH1[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xB5; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 SBRLH1[7:0] UART1 Baud Rate Reload High Bits. High Byte of reload value for UART1 Baud Rate Generator. Rev. 1.4 248

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 24.6. SBRLL1: UART1 Baud Rate Generator Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SBRLL1[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xB4; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 SBRLL1[7:0] UART1 Baud Rate Reload Low Bits. Low Byte of reload value for UART1 Baud Rate Generator. 249 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 25. Enhanced Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) The Enhanced Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI0) provides access to a flexible, full-duplex synchronous serial bus. SPI0 can operate as a master or slave device in both 3-wire or 4-wire modes, and supports mul- tiple masters and slaves on a single SPI bus. The slave-select (NSS) signal can be configured as an input to select SPI0 in slave mode, or to disable Master Mode operation in a multi-master environment, avoiding contention on the SPI bus when more than one master attempts simultaneous data transfers. NSS can also be configured as a chip-select output in master mode, or disabled for 3-wire operation. Additional gen- eral purpose port I/O pins can be used to select multiple slave devices in master mode. Figure 25.1. SPI Block Diagram Rev. 1.4 250

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 25.1. Signal Descriptions The four signals used by SPI0 (MOSI, MISO, SCK, NSS) are described below. 25.1.1. Master Out, Slave In (MOSI) The master-out, slave-in (MOSI) signal is an output from a master device and an input to slave devices. It is used to serially transfer data from the master to the slave. This signal is an output when SPI0 is operat- ing as a master and an input when SPI0 is operating as a slave. Data is transferred most-significant bit first. When configured as a master, MOSI is driven by the MSB of the shift register in both 3- and 4-wire mode. 25.1.2. Master In, Slave Out (MISO) The master-in, slave-out (MISO) signal is an output from a slave device and an input to the master device. It is used to serially transfer data from the slave to the master. This signal is an input when SPI0 is operat- ing as a master and an output when SPI0 is operating as a slave. Data is transferred most-significant bit first. The MISO pin is placed in a high-impedance state when the SPI module is disabled and when the SPI operates in 4-wire mode as a slave that is not selected. When acting as a slave in 3-wire mode, MISO is always driven by the MSB of the shift register. 25.1.3. Serial Clock (SCK) The serial clock (SCK) signal is an output from the master device and an input to slave devices. It is used to synchronize the transfer of data between the master and slave on the MOSI and MISO lines. SPI0 gen- erates this signal when operating as a master. The SCK signal is ignored by a SPI slave when the slave is not selected (NSS = 1) in 4-wire slave mode. 25.1.4. Slave Select (NSS) The function of the slave-select (NSS) signal is dependent on the setting of the NSSMD1 and NSSMD0 bits in the SPI0CN register. There are three possible modes that can be selected with these bits: 1. NSSMD[1:0] = 00: 3-Wire Master or 3-Wire Slave Mode: SPI0 operates in 3-wire mode, and NSS is disabled. When operating as a slave device, SPI0 is always selected in 3-wire mode. Since no select signal is present, SPI0 must be the only slave on the bus in 3-wire mode. This is intended for point-to- point communication between a master and one slave. 2. NSSMD[1:0] = 01: 4-Wire Slave or Multi-Master Mode: SPI0 operates in 4-wire mode, and NSS is enabled as an input. When operating as a slave, NSS selects the SPI0 device. When operating as a master, a 1-to-0 transition of the NSS signal disables the master function of SPI0 so that multiple master devices can be used on the same SPI bus. 3. NSSMD[1:0] = 1x: 4-Wire Master Mode: SPI0 operates in 4-wire mode, and NSS is enabled as an output. The setting of NSSMD0 determines what logic level the NSS pin will output. This configuration should only be used when operating SPI0 as a master device. See Figure 25.2, Figure 25.3, and Figure 25.4 for typical connection diagrams of the various operational modes. Note that the setting of NSSMD bits affects the pinout of the device. When in 3-wire master or 3-wire slave mode, the NSS pin will not be mapped by the crossbar. In all other modes, the NSS signal will be mapped to a pin on the device. See Section “20. Port Input/Output” on page 153 for general purpose port I/O and crossbar information. 25.2. SPI0 Master Mode Operation A SPI master device initiates all data transfers on a SPI bus. SPI0 is placed in master mode by setting the Master Enable flag (MSTEN, SPI0CN.6). Writing a byte of data to the SPI0 data register (SPI0DAT) when in master mode writes to the transmit buffer. If the SPI shift register is empty, the byte in the transmit buffer is moved to the shift register, and a data transfer begins. The SPI0 master immediately shifts out the data serially on the MOSI line while providing the serial clock on SCK. The SPIF (SPI0CN.7) flag is set to logic 251 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 1 at the end of the transfer. If interrupts are enabled, an interrupt request is generated when the SPIF flag is set. While the SPI0 master transfers data to a slave on the MOSI line, the addressed SPI slave device simultaneously transfers the contents of its shift register to the SPI master on the MISO line in a full-duplex operation. Therefore, the SPIF flag serves as both a transmit-complete and receive-data-ready flag. The data byte received from the slave is transferred MSB-first into the master's shift register. When a byte is fully shifted into the register, it is moved to the receive buffer where it can be read by the processor by reading SPI0DAT. When configured as a master, SPI0 can operate in one of three different modes: multi-master mode, 3-wire single-master mode, and 4-wire single-master mode. The default, multi-master mode is active when NSS- MD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 1. In this mode, NSS is an input to the device, and is used to disable the master SPI0 when another master is accessing the bus. When NSS is pulled low in this mode, MSTEN (SPI0CN.6) and SPIEN (SPI0CN.0) are set to 0 to disable the SPI master device, and a Mode Fault is generated (MODF, SPI0CN.5 = 1). Mode Fault will generate an interrupt if enabled. SPI0 must be manually re-enabled in software under these circumstances. In multi-master systems, devices will typically default to being slave devices while they are not acting as the system master device. In multi-mas- ter mode, slave devices can be addressed individually (if needed) using general-purpose I/O pins. Figure 25.2 shows a connection diagram between two master devices in multiple-master mode. 3-wire single-master mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 0. In this mode, NSS is not used, and is not mapped to an external port pin through the crossbar. Any slave devices that must be addressed in this mode should be selected using general-purpose I/O pins. Figure 25.3 shows a connection diagram between a master device in 3-wire master mode and a slave device. 4-wire single-master mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 1. In this mode, NSS is configured as an output pin, and can be used as a slave-select signal for a single SPI device. In this mode, the output value of NSS is controlled (in software) with the bit NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2). Additional slave devices can be addressed using general-purpose I/O pins. Figure 25.4 shows a connection diagram for a master device in 4-wire master mode and two slave devices. Figure 25.2. Multiple-Master Mode Connection Diagram Figure 25.3. 3-Wire Single Master and 3-Wire Single Slave Mode Connection Diagram Rev. 1.4 252

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 25.4. 4-Wire Single Master Mode and 4-Wire Slave Mode Connection Diagram 25.3. SPI0 Slave Mode Operation When SPI0 is enabled and not configured as a master, it will operate as a SPI slave. As a slave, bytes are shifted in through the MOSI pin and out through the MISO pin by a master device controlling the SCK sig- nal. A bit counter in the SPI0 logic counts SCK edges. When 8 bits have been shifted through the shift reg- ister, the SPIF flag is set to logic 1, and the byte is copied into the receive buffer. Data is read from the receive buffer by reading SPI0DAT. A slave device cannot initiate transfers. Data to be transferred to the master device is pre-loaded into the shift register by writing to SPI0DAT. Writes to SPI0DAT are double- buffered, and are placed in the transmit buffer first. If the shift register is empty, the contents of the transmit buffer will immediately be transferred into the shift register. When the shift register already contains data, the SPI will load the shift register with the transmit buffer’s contents after the last SCK edge of the next (or current) SPI transfer. When configured as a slave, SPI0 can be configured for 4-wire or 3-wire operation. The default, 4-wire slave mode, is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 1. In 4-wire mode, the NSS signal is routed to a port pin and configured as a digital input. SPI0 is enabled when NSS is logic 0, and disabled when NSS is logic 1. The bit counter is reset on a falling edge of NSS. Note that the NSS sig- nal must be driven low at least 2 system clocks before the first active edge of SCK for each byte transfer. Figure 25.4 shows a connection diagram between two slave devices in 4-wire slave mode and a master device. 3-wire slave mode is active when NSSMD1 (SPI0CN.3) = 0 and NSSMD0 (SPI0CN.2) = 0. NSS is not used in this mode, and is not mapped to an external port pin through the crossbar. Since there is no way of uniquely addressing the device in 3-wire slave mode, SPI0 must be the only slave device present on the bus. It is important to note that in 3-wire slave mode there is no external means of resetting the bit counter that determines when a full byte has been received. The bit counter can only be reset by disabling and re- enabling SPI0 with the SPIEN bit. Figure 25.3 shows a connection diagram between a slave device in 3- wire slave mode and a master device. 253 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 25.4. SPI0 Interrupt Sources When SPI0 interrupts are enabled, the following four flags will generate an interrupt when they are set to logic 1: All of the following bits must be cleared by software.  The SPI Interrupt Flag, SPIF (SPI0CN.7) is set to logic 1 at the end of each byte transfer. This flag can occur in all SPI0 modes.  The Write Collision Flag, WCOL (SPI0CN.6) is set to logic 1 if a write to SPI0DAT is attempted when the transmit buffer has not been emptied to the SPI shift register. When this occurs, the write to SPI0DAT will be ignored, and the transmit buffer will not be written.This flag can occur in all SPI0 modes.  The Mode Fault Flag MODF (SPI0CN.5) is set to logic 1 when SPI0 is configured as a master, and for multi-master mode and the NSS pin is pulled low. When a Mode Fault occurs, the MSTEN and SPIEN bits in SPI0CN are set to logic 0 to disable SPI0 and allow another master device to access the bus.  The Receive Overrun Flag RXOVRN (SPI0CN.4) is set to logic 1 when configured as a slave, and a transfer is completed and the receive buffer still holds an unread byte from a previous transfer. The new byte is not transferred to the receive buffer, allowing the previously received data byte to be read. The data byte which caused the overrun is lost. 25.5. Serial Clock Phase and Polarity Four combinations of serial clock phase and polarity can be selected using the clock control bits in the SPI0 Configuration Register (SPI0CFG). The CKPHA bit (SPI0CFG.5) selects one of two clock phases (edge used to latch the data). The CKPOL bi t (SPI0CFG.4) selects between an active-high or active-low clock. Both master and slave devices must be configured to use the same clock phase and polarity. SPI0 should be disabled (by clearing the SPIEN bit, SPI0CN.0) when changing the clock phase or polarity. The clock and data line relationships for master mode are shown in Figure 25.5. For slave mode, the clock and data relationships are shown in Figure 25.6 and Figure 25.7. Note that CKPHA should be set to 0 on both the master and slave SPI when communicating between two Silicon Labs C8051 devices. The SPI0 Clock Rate Register (SPI0CKR) as shown in SFR Definition 25.3 controls the master mode serial clock frequency. This register is ignored when operating in slave mode. When the SPI is configured as a master, the maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) is one-half the system clock frequency or 12.5 MHz, whichever is slower. When the SPI is configured as a slave, the maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) for full-duplex operation is 1/10 the system clock frequency, provided that the master issues SCK, NSS (in 4- wire slave mode), and the serial input data synchronously with the slave’s system clock. If the master issues SCK, NSS, and the serial input data asynchronously, the maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) must be less than 1/10 the system clock frequency. In the special case where the master only wants to transmit data to the slave and does not need to receive data from the slave (i.e. half-duplex operation), the SPI slave can receive data at a maximum data transfer rate (bits/sec) of 1/4 the system clock frequency. This is provided that the master issues SCK, NSS, and the serial input data synchronously with the slave’s system clock. Rev. 1.4 254

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 25.5. Master Mode Data/Clock Timing Figure 25.6. Slave Mode Data/Clock Timing (CKPHA = 0) 255 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 25.7. Slave Mode Data/Clock Timing (CKPHA = 1) 25.6. SPI Special Function Registers SPI0 is accessed and controlled through four special function registers in the system controller: SPI0CN Control Register, SPI0DAT Data Register, S PI0CFG Configuration Register, and SPI0CKR Clock Rate Register. The four special function registers related to the operation of the SPI0 Bus are described in the following figures. Rev. 1.4 256

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 25.1. SPI0CFG: SPI0 Configuration Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SPIBSY MSTEN CKPHA CKPOL SLVSEL NSSIN SRMT RXBMT Type R R/W R/W R/W R R R R Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 SFR Address = 0xA1; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 SPIBSY SPI Busy. This bit is set to logic 1 when a SPI transfer is in progress (master or slave mode). 6 MSTEN Master Mode Enable. 0: Disable master mode. Operate in slave mode. 1: Enable master mode. Operate as a master. 5 CKPHA SPI0 Clock Phase. 0: Data centered on first edge of SCK period.* 1: Data centered on second edge of SCK period.* 4 CKPOL SPI0 Clock Polarity. 0: SCK line low in idle state. 1: SCK line high in idle state. 3 SLVSEL Slave Selected Flag. This bit is set to logic 1 whenever the NSS pin is low indicating SPI0 is the selected slave. It is cleared to logic 0 when NSS is high (slave not selected). This bit does not indicate the instantaneous value at the NSS pin, but rather a de-glitched ver- sion of the pin input. 2 NSSIN NSS Instantaneous Pin Input. This bit mimics the instantaneous value that is present on the NSS port pin at the time that the register is read. This input is not de-glitched. 1 SRMT Shift Register Empty (valid in slave mode only). This bit will be set to logic 1 when all data has been transferred in/out of the shift register, and there is no new information available to read from the transmit buffer or write to the receive buffer. It returns to logic 0 when a data byte is transferred to the shift register from the transmit buffer or by a transition on SCK. SRMT = 1 when in Master Mode. 0 RXBMT Receive Buffer Empty (valid in slave mode only). This bit will be set to logic 1 when the receive buffer has been read and contains no new information. If there is new information available in the receive buffer that has not been read, this bit will return to logic 0. RXBMT = 1 when in Master Mode. Note: In slave mode, data on MOSI is sampled in the center of each data bit. In master mode, data on MISO is sampled one SYSCLK before the end of each data bit, to provide maximum settling time for the slave device. See Table 25.1 for timing parameters. 257 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 25.2. SPI0CN: SPI0 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SPIF WCOL MODF RXOVRN NSSMD[1:0] TXBMT SPIEN Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 SFR Address = 0xF8; SFR Page = All Pages; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Function 7 SPIF SPI0 Interrupt Flag. This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware at the end of a data transfer. If SPI interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware, and must be cleared by software. 6 WCOL Write Collision Flag. This bit is set to logic 1 if a write to SPI0DAT is attempted when TXBMT is 0. When this occurs, the write to SPI0DAT will be ignored, and the transmit buffer will not be written. If SPI interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware, and must be cleared by software. 5 MODF Mode Fault Flag. This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware when a master mode collision is detected (NSS is low, MSTEN = 1, and NSSMD[1:0] = 01). If SPI interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware, and must be cleared by software. 4 RXOVRN Receive Overrun Flag (valid in slave mode only). This bit is set to logic 1 by hardware when the receive buffer still holds unread data from a previous transfer and the last bit of the current transfer is shifted into the SPI0 shift register. If SPI interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware, and must be cleared by software. 3:2 NSSMD[1:0] Slave Select Mode. Selects between the following NSS operation modes: (See Section 25.2 and Section 25.3). 00: 3-Wire Slave or 3-Wire Master Mode. NSS signal is not routed to a port pin. 01: 4-Wire Slave or Multi-Master Mode (Default). NSS is an input to the device. 1x: 4-Wire Single-Master Mode. NSS signal is mapped as an output from the device and will assume the value of NSSMD0. 1 TXBMT Transmit Buffer Empty. This bit will be set to logic 0 when new data has been written to the transmit buffer. When data in the transmit buffer is transferred to the SPI shift register, this bit will be set to logic 1, indicating that it is safe to write a new byte to the transmit buffer. 0 SPIEN SPI0 Enable. 0: SPI disabled. 1: SPI enabled. Rev. 1.4 258

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 25.3. SPI0CKR: SPI0 Clock Rate Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SCR[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xA2; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 SCR[7:0] SPI0 Clock Rate. These bits determine the frequency of the SCK output when the SPI0 module is configured for master mode operation. The SCK clock frequency is a divided ver- sion of the system clock, and is given in the following equation, where SYSCLK is the system clock frequency and SPI0CKR is the 8-bit value held in the SPI0CKR register. SYSCLK f = ------------------------------------------------------------- SCK 2SPI0CKR[7:0]+1 for 0  SPI0CKR  255 Example: If SYSCLK = 2 MHz and SPI0CKR = 0x04, 2000000 f = --------------------------- SCK 24+1 f = 200kHz SCK SFR Definition 25.4. SPI0DAT: SPI0 Data Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name SPI0DAT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xA3; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 SPI0DAT[7:0] SPI0 Transmit and Receive Data. The SPI0DAT register is used to transmit and receive SPI0 data. Writing data to SPI0DAT places the data into the transmit buffer and initiates a transfer when in Master Mode. A read of SPI0DAT returns the contents of the receive buffer. 259 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 25.8. SPI Master Timing (CKPHA = 0) Figure 25.9. SPI Master Timing (CKPHA = 1) Rev. 1.4 260

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 25.10. SPI Slave Timing (CKPHA = 0) Figure 25.11. SPI Slave Timing (CKPHA = 1) 261 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 25.1. SPI Slave Timing Parameters Parameter Description Min Max Units Master Mode Timing (See Figure 25.8 and Figure 25.9) T SCK High Time 1 x T — ns MCKH SYSCLK T SCK Low Time 1 x T — ns MCKL SYSCLK T MISO Valid to SCK Shift Edge 1 x T + 20 — ns MIS SYSCLK T SCK Shift Edge to MISO Change 0 — ns MIH Slave Mode Timing (See Figure 25.10 and Figure 25.11) T NSS Falling to First SCK Edge 2 x T — ns SE SYSCLK T Last SCK Edge to NSS Rising 2 x T — ns SD SYSCLK T NSS Falling to MISO Valid — 4 x T ns SEZ SYSCLK T NSS Rising to MISO High-Z — 4 x T ns SDZ SYSCLK T SCK High Time 5 x T — ns CKH SYSCLK T SCK Low Time 5 x T — ns CKL SYSCLK T MOSI Valid to SCK Sample Edge 2 x T — ns SIS SYSCLK T SCK Sample Edge to MOSI Change 2 x T — ns SIH SYSCLK T SCK Shift Edge to MISO Change — 4 x T ns SOH SYSCLK T Last SCK Edge to MISO Change 6 x T 8 x T ns SLH SYSCLK SYSCLK (CKPHA = 1 ONLY) Note: T is equal to one period of the device system clock (SYSCLK). SYSCLK Rev. 1.4 262

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 26. Timers Each MCU includes six counter/timers: two are 16-bit counter/timers compatible with those found in the standard 8051, and four are 16-bit auto-reload timer for use with the SMBus or for general purpose use. These timers can be used to measure time intervals, count external events and generate periodic interrupt requests. Timer 0 and Timer 1 are nearly identical and have four primary modes of operation. Timer 2, 3, 4, and 5 offer 16-bit and split 8-bit timer functionality with auto-reload. Timer 0 and Timer 1 Modes: Timer 2, 3, 4, and 5 Modes: 13-bit counter/timer 16-bit timer with auto-reload 16-bit counter/timer 8-bit counter/timer with auto-reload Two 8-bit timers with auto-reload Two 8-bit counter/timers (Timer 0 only) Timers 0 and 1 may be clocked by one of five sources, determined by the Timer Mode Select bits (T1M– T0M) and the Clock Scale bits (SCA1–SCA0). The Clock Scale bits define a pre-scaled clock from which Timer 0 and/or Timer 1 may be clocked (See SFR Definition 26.1 for pre-scaled clock selection). Timer 0/1 may then be configured to use this pre-scaled clock signal or the system clock. Timer 2, 3, 4, and 5 may be clocked by the system clock, the system clock divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8. Timer 0 and Timer 1 may also be operated as counters. When functioning as a counter, a counter/timer register is incremented on each high-to-low transition at the selected input pin (T0 or T1). Events with a fre- quency of up to one-fourth the system clock frequency can be counted. The input signal need not be peri- odic, but it should be held at a given level for at least two full system clock cycles to ensure the level is properly sampled. Rev. 1.4 263

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.1. CKCON: Clock Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name T3MH T3ML T2MH T2ML T1M T0M SCA[1:0] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x8E; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 T3MH Timer 3 High Byte Clock Select. Selects the clock supplied to the Timer 3 high byte (split 8-bit timer mode only). 0: Timer 3 high byte uses the clock defined by the T3XCLK bit in TMR3CN. 1: Timer 3 high byte uses the system clock. 6 T3ML Timer 3 Low Byte Clock Select. Selects the clock supplied to Timer 3. Selects the clock supplied to the lower 8-bit timer in split 8-bit timer mode. 0: Timer 3 low byte uses the clock defined by the T3XCLK bit in TMR3CN. 1: Timer 3 low byte uses the system clock. 5 T2MH Timer 2 High Byte Clock Select. Selects the clock supplied to the Timer 2 high byte (split 8-bit timer mode only). 0: Timer 2 high byte uses the clock defined by the T2XCLK bit in TMR2CN. 1: Timer 2 high byte uses the system clock. 4 T2ML Timer 2 Low Byte Clock Select. Selects the clock supplied to Timer 2. If Timer 2 is configured in split 8-bit timer mode, this bit selects the clock supplied to the lower 8-bit timer. 0: Timer 2 low byte uses the clock defined by the T2XCLK bit in TMR2CN. 1: Timer 2 low byte uses the system clock. 3 T1 Timer 1 Clock Select. Selects the clock source supplied to Timer 1. Ignored when C/T1 is set to 1. 0: Timer 1 uses the clock defined by the prescale bits SCA[1:0]. 1: Timer 1 uses the system clock. 2 T0 Timer 0 Clock Select. Selects the clock source supplied to Timer 0. Ignored when C/T0 is set to 1. 0: Counter/Timer 0 uses the clock defined by the prescale bits SCA[1:0]. 1: Counter/Timer 0 uses the system clock. 1:0 SCA[1:0] Timer 0/1 Prescale Bits. These bits control the Timer 0/1 Clock Prescaler: 00: System clock divided by 12 01: System clock divided by 4 10: System clock divided by 48 11: External clock divided by 8 (synchronized with the system clock) 264 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.2. CKCON1: Clock Control 1 Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name T5MH T5ML T4MH T4ML Type R R R R R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xE4; SFR Page = F Bit Name Function 7:4 Unused Read = 0000b; Write = don’t care 3 T5MH Timer 5 High Byte Clock Select. Selects the clock supplied to the Timer 5 high byte (split 8-bit timer mode only). 0: Timer 5 high byte uses the clock defined by the T5XCLK bit in TMR5CN. 1: Timer 5 high byte uses the system clock. 2 T5ML Timer 5 Low Byte Clock Select. Selects the clock supplied to Timer 5. Selects the clock supplied to the lower 8-bit timer in split 8-bit timer mode. 0: Timer 5 low byte uses the clock defined by the T5XCLK bit in TMR5CN. 1: Timer 5 low byte uses the system clock. 1 T4MH Timer 4 High Byte Clock Select. Selects the clock supplied to the Timer 4 high byte (split 8-bit timer mode only). 0: Timer 4 high byte uses the clock defined by the T4XCLK bit in TMR4CN. 1: Timer 4 high byte uses the system clock. 0 T4ML Timer 4 Low Byte Clock Select. Selects the clock supplied to Timer 4. If Timer 4 is configured in split 8-bit timer mode, this bit selects the clock supplied to the lower 8-bit timer. 0: Timer 4 low byte uses the clock defined by the T4XCLK bit in TMR4CN. 1: Timer 4 low byte uses the system clock. Rev. 1.4 265

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 266 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 26.1. Timer 0 and Timer 1 Each timer is implemented as a 16-bit register accessed as two separate bytes: a low byte (TL0 or TL1) and a high byte (TH0 or TH1). The Counter/Timer Control register (TCON) is used to enable Timer 0 and Timer 1 as well as indicate status. Timer 0 interrupts can be enabled by setting the ET0 bit in the IE regis- ter; Timer 1 interrupts can be enabled by setting the ET1 bit in the IE register. Both counter/timers operate in one of four primary modes selected by setting the Mode Select bits T1M1–T0M0 in the Counter/Timer Mode register (TMOD). Each timer can be configured independently. Each operating mode is described below. 26.1.1. Mode 0: 13-bit Counter/Timer Timer 0 and Timer 1 operate as 13-bit counter/timers in Mode 0. The following describes the configuration and operation of Timer 0. However, both timers operate identically, and Timer 1 is configured in the same manner as described for Timer 0. The TH0 register holds the eight MSBs of the 13-bit counter/timer. TL0 holds the five LSBs in bit positions TL0.4–TL0.0. The three upper bits of TL0 (TL0.7–TL0.5) are indeterminate and should be masked out or ignored when reading. As the 13-bit timer register increments and overflows from 0x1FFF (all ones) to 0x0000, the timer overflow flag TF0 in TCON is set and an interrupt will occur if Timer 0 interrupts are enabled. The C/T0 bit in the TMOD register selects the counter/timer's clock source. When C/T0 is set to logic 1, high-to-low transitions at the selected Timer 0 input pin (T0) increment the timer register (Refer to Section “20.1. Priority Crossbar Decoder” on page 154 for information on selecting and configuring external I/O pins). Clearing C/T selects the clock defined by the T0M bit in register CKCON. When T0M is set, Timer 0 is clocked by the system clock. When T0M is cleared, Timer 0 is clocked by the source selected by the Clock Scale bits in CKCON (see SFR Definition 26.1). Setting the TR0 bit (TCON.4) enables the timer when either GATE0 in the TMOD register is logic 0 or the input signal INT0 is active as defined by bit IN0PL in register IT01CF. Setting GATE0 to 1 allows the timer to be controlled by the external input signal INT0, facilitating pulse width measurements TR0 GATE0 INT0 Counter/Timer 0 X X Disabled 1 0 X Enabled 1 1 0 Disabled 1 1 1 Enabled Note: X = Don't Care Setting TR0 does not force the timer to reset. The timer registers should be loaded with the desired initial value before the timer is enabled. TL1 and TH1 form the 13-bit register for Timer 1 in the same manner as described above for TL0 and TH0. Timer 1 is configured and controlled using the relevant TCON and TMOD bits just as with Timer 0. The input signal INT1 is used with Timer 1; the INT1 polarity is defined by bit IN1PL in register IT01CF. Rev. 1.4 266

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 26.1. T0 Mode 0 Block Diagram 26.1.2. Mode 1: 16-bit Counter/Timer Mode 1 operation is the same as Mode 0, except that the counter/timer registers use all 16 bits. The counter/timers are enabled and configured in Mode 1 in the same manner as for Mode 0. 26.1.3. Mode 2: 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload Mode 2 configures Timer 0 and Timer 1 to operate as 8-bit counter/timers with automatic reload of the start value. TL0 holds the count and TH0 holds the reload value. When the counter in TL0 overflows from all ones to 0x00, the timer overflow flag TF0 in the TCON register is set and the counter in TL0 is reloaded from TH0. If Timer 0 interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will occur when the TF0 flag is set. The reload value in TH0 is not changed. TL0 must be initialized to the desired value before enabling the timer for the first count to be correct. When in Mode 2, Timer 1 operates identically to Timer 0. Both counter/timers are enabled and configured in Mode 2 in the same manner as Mode 0. Setting the TR0 bit (TCON.4) enables the timer when either GATE0 in the TMOD register is logic 0 or when the input signal INT0 is active as defined by bit IN0PL in register IT01CF (see SFR Definition 16.7 for details on the external input signals INT0 and INT1). 267 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 26.2. T0 Mode 2 Block Diagram 26.1.4. Mode 3: Two 8-bit Counter/Timers (Timer 0 Only) In Mode 3, Timer 0 is configured as two separate 8-bit counter/timers held in TL0 and TH0. The counter/timer in TL0 is controlled using the Timer 0 control/status bits in TCON and TMOD: TR0, C/T0, GATE0 and TF0. TL0 can use either the system clock or an external input signal as its timebase. The TH0 register is restricted to a timer function sourced by the system clock or prescaled clock. TH0 is enabled using the Timer 1 run control bit TR1. TH0 sets the Timer 1 overflow flag TF1 on overflow and thus controls the Timer 1 interrupt. Timer 1 is inactive in Mode 3. When Timer 0 is operating in Mode 3, Timer 1 can be operated in Modes 0, 1 or 2, but cannot be clocked by external signals nor set the TF1 flag and generate an interrupt. However, the Timer 1 overflow can be used to generate baud rates or overflow conditions for other peripherals. While Timer 0 is operating in Mode 3, Timer 1 run control is handled through its mode settings. To run Timer 1 while Timer 0 is in Mode 3, set the Timer 1 Mode as 0, 1, or 2. To disable Timer 1, configure it for Mode 3. Rev. 1.4 268

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 26.3. T0 Mode 3 Block Diagram 269 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.3. TCON: Timer Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TF1 TR1 TF0 TR0 IE1 IT1 IE0 IT0 Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x88; SFR Page = All Pages; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Function 7 TF1 Timer 1 Overflow Flag. Set to 1 by hardware when Timer 1 overflows. This flag can be cleared by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the Timer 1 interrupt service routine. 6 TR1 Timer 1 Run Control. Timer 1 is enabled by setting this bit to 1. 5 TF0 Timer 0 Overflow Flag. Set to 1 by hardware when Timer 0 overflows. This flag can be cleared by software but is automatically clear ed when the CPU vectors to the Timer 0 interrupt service routine. 4 TR0 Timer 0 Run Control. Timer 0 is enabled by setting this bit to 1. 3 IE1 External Interrupt 1. This flag is set by hardware when an edge/level of type defined by IT1 is detected. It can be cleared by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the External Interrupt 1 service routine in edge-triggered mode. 2 IT1 Interrupt 1 Type Select. This bit selects whether the configured INT1 interrupt will be edge or level sensitive. INT1 is configured active low or high by the IN1PL bit in the IT01CF register (see SFR Definition 16.7). 0: INT1 is level triggered. 1: INT1 is edge triggered. 1 IE0 External Interrupt 0. This flag is set by hardware when an edge/level of type defined by IT1 is detected. It can be cleared by software but is automatically cleared when the CPU vectors to the External Interrupt 0 service routine in edge-triggered mode. 0 IT0 Interrupt 0 Type Select. This bit selects whether the configured INT0 interrupt will be edge or level sensitive. INT0 is configured active low or high by the IN0PL bit in register IT01CF (see SFR Definition 16.7). 0: INT0 is level triggered. 1: INT0 is edge triggered. Rev. 1.4 270

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.4. TMOD: Timer Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name GATE1 C/T1 T1M[1:0] GATE0 C/T0 T0M[1:0] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x89; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 GATE1 Timer 1 Gate Control. 0: Timer 1 enabled when TR1 = 1 irrespective of INT1 logic level. 1: Timer 1 enabled only when TR1 = 1 AND INT1 is active as defined by bit IN1PL in register IT01CF (see SFR Definition 16.7). 6 C/T1 Counter/Timer 1 Select. 0: Timer: Timer 1 incremented by clock defined by T1M bit in register CKCON. 1: Counter: Timer 1 incremented by high-to-low transitions on external pin (T1). 5:4 T1M[1:0] Timer 1 Mode Select. These bits select the Tim er 1 operation mode. 00: Mode 0, 13-bit Counter/Timer 01: Mode 1, 16-bit Counter/Timer 10: Mode 2, 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload 11: Mode 3, Timer 1 Inactive 3 GATE0 Timer 0 Gate Control. 0: Timer 0 enabled when TR0 = 1 irrespective of INT0 logic level. 1: Timer 0 enabled only when TR0 = 1 AND INT0 is active as defined by bit IN0PL in register IT01CF (see SFR Definition 16.7). 2 C/T0 Counter/Timer 0 Select. 0: Timer: Timer 0 incremented by clock defined by T0M bit in register CKCON. 1: Counter: Timer 0 incremented by high-to-low transitions on external pin (T0). 1:0 T0M[1:0] Timer 0 Mode Select. These bits select the Timer 0 operation mode. 00: Mode 0, 13-bit Counter/Timer 01: Mode 1, 16-bit Counter/Timer 10: Mode 2, 8-bit Counter/Timer with Auto-Reload 11: Mode 3, Two 8-bit Counter/Timers 271 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.5. TL0: Timer 0 Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TL0[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x8A; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 TL0[7:0] Timer 0 Low Byte. The TL0 register is the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 0. SFR Definition 26.6. TL1: Timer 1 Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TL1[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x8B; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 TL1[7:0] Timer 1 Low Byte. The TL1 register is the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 1. Rev. 1.4 272

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.7. TH0: Timer 0 High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TH0[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x8C; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 TH0[7:0] Timer 0 High Byte. The TH0 register is the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 0. SFR Definition 26.8. TH1: Timer 1 High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TH1[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x8D; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 TH1[7:0] Timer 1 High Byte. The TH1 register is the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 1. 273 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 26.2. Timer 2 Timer 2 is a 16-bit timer formed by two 8-bit SFRs: TMR2L (low byte) and TMR2H (high byte). Timer 2 may operate in 16-bit auto-reload mode, (split) 8-bit auto-reload mode, USB Start-of-Frame (SOF) capture mode, or Low-Frequency Oscillator (LFO) Falling Edge capture mode. The Timer 2 operation mode is defined by the T2SPLIT (TMR2CN.3), T2CE (TMR2CN.4) bits, and T2CSS (TMR2CN.1) bits. Timer 2 may be clocked by the system clock, the system clock divided by 12, or the external oscillator source divided by 8. The external clock mode is ideal for real-time clock (RTC) functionality, where the internal oscillator drives the system clock while Timer 2 (and/or the PCA) is clocked by an external preci- sion oscillator. Note that the external oscillator source divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock. 26.2.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload When T2SPLIT (TMR2CN.3) is zero, Timer 2 operates as a 16-bit timer with auto-reload. Timer 2 can be clocked by SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8. As the 16-bit timer register increments and overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the 16-bit value in the Timer 2 reload registers (TMR2RLH and TMR2RLL) is loaded into the Timer 2 register as shown in Figure 26.4, and the Timer 2 High Byte Overflow Flag (TMR2CN.7) is set. If Timer 2 interrupts are enabled (if IE.5 is set), an interrupt will be generated on each Timer 2 overflow. Additionally, if Timer 2 interrupts are enabled and the TF2LEN bit is set (TMR2CN.5), an interrupt will be generated each time the lower 8 bits (TMR2L) overflow from 0xFF to 0x00. Figure 26.4. Timer 2 16-Bit Mode Block Diagram Rev. 1.4 274

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 26.2.2. 8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload When T2SPLIT is set, Timer 2 operates as two 8-bit timers (TMR2H and TMR2L). Both 8-bit timers oper- ate in auto-reload mode as shown in Figure 26.5. TMR2RLL holds the reload value for TMR2L; TMR2RLH holds the reload value for TMR2H. The TR2 bit in TMR2CN handles the run control for TMR2H. TMR2L is always running when configured for 8-bit Mode. Each 8-bit timer may be configured to use SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8. The Timer 2 Clock Select bits (T2MH and T2ML in CKCON) select either SYSCLK or the clock defined by the Timer 2 External Clock Select bit (T2XCLK in TMR2CN), as follows: T2MH T2XCLK TMR2H Clock Source T2ML T2XCLK TMR2L Clock Source 0 0 SYSCLK / 12 0 0 SYSCLK / 12 0 1 External Clock / 8 0 1 External Clock / 8 1 X SYSCLK 1 X SYSCLK The TF2H bit is set when TMR2H overflows from 0xFF to 0x00; the TF2L bit is set when TMR2L overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. When Timer 2 interrupts are enabled (IE.5), an interrupt is generated each time TMR2H overflows. If Timer 2 interrupts are enabled and TF2LEN (TMR2CN.5) is set, an interrupt is gener- ated each time either TMR2L or TMR2H overflows. When TF2LEN is enabled, software must check the TF2H and TF2L flags to determine the source of the Timer 2 interrupt. The TF2H and TF2L interrupt flags are not cleared by hardware and must be manually cleared by software. Figure 26.5. Timer 2 8-Bit Mode Block Diagram 26.2.3. Timer 2 Capture Modes: USB Start-of-Frame or LFO Falling Edge When T2CE = 1, Timer 2 will operate in one of two special capture modes. The capture event can be selected between a USB Start-of-Frame (SOF) capture, and a Low-Frequency Oscillator (LFO) Falling Edge capture, using the T2CSS bit. The USB SOF capture mode can be used to calibrate the system clock or external oscillator against the known USB host SOF clock. The LFO falling-edge capture mode can be used to calibrate the internal Low-Frequency Oscillator against the internal High-Frequency Oscillator or an external clock source. When T2SPLIT = 0, Timer 2 counts up and overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. 275 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Each time a capture event is received, the contents of the Timer 2 registers (TMR2H:TMR2L) are latched into the Timer 2 Reload registers (TMR2RLH:TMR2RLL). A Timer 2 interrupt is generated if enabled. Figure 26.6. Timer 2 Capture Mode (T2SPLIT = 0) When T2SPLIT = 1, the Timer 2 registers (TMR2H and TMR2L) act as two 8-bit counters. Each counter counts up independently and overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. Each time a capture event is received, the con- tents of the Timer 2 registers are latched into the Timer 2 Reload registers (TMR2RLH and TMR2RLL). A Timer 2 interrupt is generated if enabled. Rev. 1.4 276

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 26.7. Timer 2 Capture Mode (T2SPLIT = 0) 277 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.9. TMR2CN: Timer 2 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TF2H TF2L TF2LEN TF2CEN T2SPLIT TR2 T2CSS T2XCLK Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xC8; SFR Page = 0; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Function 7 TF2H Timer 2 High Byte Overflow Flag. Set by hardware when the Timer 2 high byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. In 16 bit mode, this will occur when Timer 2 overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. When the Timer 2 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the Timer 2 interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware. 6 TF2L Timer 2 Low Byte Overflow Flag. Set by hardware when the Timer 2 low byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. TF2L will be set when the low byte overflows regardless of the Timer 2 mode. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware. 5 TF2LEN Timer 2 Low Byte Interrupt Enable. When set to 1, this bit enables Timer 2 Low Byte interrupts. If Timer 2 interrupts are also enabled, an interrupt will be generated when the low byte of Timer 2 overflows. 4 TF2CEN Timer 2 Low-Frequency Oscillator Capture Enable. When set to 1, this bit enables Timer 2 Low-Frequency Oscillator Capture Mode. If TF2CEN is set and Timer 2 interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated on a falling edge of the low-frequency oscillator output, and the current 16-bit timer value in TMR2H:TMR2L will be copied to TMR2RLH:TMR2RLL. 3 T2SPLIT Timer 2 Split Mode Enable. When this bit is set, Timer 2 operates as two 8-bit timers with auto-reload. 2 TR2 Timer 2 Run Control. Timer 2 is enabled by setting this bit to 1. In 8-bit mode, this bit enables/disables TMR2H only; TMR2L is always enabled in split mode. 1 T2CSS Timer 2 Capture Source Select. This bit selects the source of a capture event when bit T2CE is set to 1. 0: Capture source is USB SOF event. 1: Capture source is falling edge of Low-Frequency Oscillator. 0 T2XCLK Timer 2 External Clock Select. This bit selects the external clock source for Timer 2. However, the Timer 2 Clock Select bits (T2MH and T2ML in register CKCON) may still be used to select between the external clock and the system clock for either timer. 0: Timer 2 clock is the system clock divided by 12. 1: Timer 2 clock is the external clock divided by 8 (synchronized with SYSCLK). Rev. 1.4 278

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.10. TMR2RLL: Timer 2 Reload Register Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR2RLL[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xCA; SFR Page = 0 Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR2RLL[7:0] Timer 2 Reload Register Low Byte. TMR2RLL holds the low byte of the reload value for Timer 2. SFR Definition 26.11. TMR2RLH: Timer 2 Reload Register High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR2RLH[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xCB; SFR Page = 0 Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR2RLH[7:0] Timer 2 Reload Register High Byte. TMR2RLH holds the high byte of the reload value for Timer 2. SFR Definition 26.12. TMR2L: Timer 2 Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR2L[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xCC; SFR Page = 0 Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR2L[7:0] Timer 2 Low Byte. In 16-bit mode, the TMR2L register contains the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 2. In 8- bit mode, TMR2L contains the 8-bit low byte timer value. 279 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.13. TMR2H Timer 2 High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR2H[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xCD; SFR Page = 0 Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR2H[7:0] Timer 2 Low Byte. In 16-bit mode, the TMR2H register contains the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 2. In 8- bit mode, TMR2H contains the 8-bit high byte timer value. Rev. 1.4 280

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 281 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 26.3. Timer 3 Timer 3 is a 16-bit timer formed by two 8-bit SFRs: TMR3L (low byte) and TMR3H (high byte). Timer 3 may operate in 16-bit auto-reload mode, (split) 8-bit auto-reload mode, USB Start-of-Frame (SOF) capture mode, or Low-Frequency Oscillator (LFO) Rising Edge capture mode. The Timer 3 operation mode is defined by the T3SPLIT (TMR3CN.3), T3CE (TMR3CN.4) bits, and T3CSS (TMR3CN.1) bits. Timer 3 may be clocked by the system clock, the system clock divided by 12, or the external oscillator source divided by 8. The external clock mode is ideal for real-time clock (RTC) functionality, where the internal oscillator drives the system clock while Timer 3 (and/or the PCA) is clocked by an external preci- sion oscillator. Note that the external oscillator source divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock. 26.3.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload When T3SPLIT (TMR3CN.3) is zero, Timer 3 operates as a 16-bit timer with auto-reload. Timer 3 can be clocked by SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8. As the 16-bit timer register increments and overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the 16-bit value in the Timer 3 reload registers (TMR3RLH and TMR3RLL) is loaded into the Timer 3 register as shown in Figure 26.8, and the Timer 3 High Byte Overflow Flag (TMR3CN.7) is set. If Timer 3 interrupts are enabled (if EIE1.7 is set), an interrupt will be generated on each Timer 3 overflow. Additionally, if Timer 3 interrupts are enabled and the TF3LEN bit is set (TMR3CN.5), an interrupt will be generated each time the lower 8 bits (TMR3L) overflow from 0xFF to 0x00. Figure 26.8. Timer 3 16-Bit Mode Block Diagram Rev. 1.4 281

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 26.3.2. 8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload When T3SPLIT is 1 and T3CE = 0, Timer 3 operates as two 8-bit timers (TMR3H and TMR3L). Both 8-bit timers operate in auto-reload mode as shown in Figure 26.9. TMR3RLL holds the reload value for TMR3L; TMR3RLH holds the reload value for TMR3H. The TR3 bit in TMR3CN handles the run control for TMR3H. TMR3L is always running when configured for 8-bit Mode. Each 8-bit timer may be configured to use SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8. The Timer 3 Clock Select bits (T3MH and T3ML in CKCON) select either SYSCLK or the clock defined by the Timer 3 External Clock Select bit (T3XCLK in TMR3CN), as follows: T3MH T3XCLK TMR3H Clock Source T3ML T3XCLK TMR3L Clock Source 0 0 SYSCLK / 12 0 0 SYSCLK / 12 0 1 External Clock / 8 0 1 External Clock / 8 1 X SYSCLK 1 X SYSCLK The TF3H bit is set when TMR3H overflows from 0xFF to 0x00; the TF3L bit is set when TMR3L overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. When Timer 3 interrupts are enabled, an interrupt is generated each time TMR3H over- flows. If Timer 3 interrupts are enabled and TF3LEN (TMR3CN.5) is set, an interrupt is generated each time either TMR3L or TMR3H overflows. When TF3LEN is enabled, software must check the TF3H and TF3L flags to determine the source of the Timer 3 interrupt. The TF3H and TF3L interrupt flags are not cleared by hardware and must be manually cleared by software. Figure 26.9. Timer 3 8-Bit Mode Block Diagram 26.3.3. Timer 3 Capture Modes: USB Start-of-Frame or LFO Falling Edge When T3CE = 1, Timer 3 will operate in one of two special capture modes. The capture event can be selected between a USB Start-of-Frame (SOF) capture, and a Low-Frequency Oscillator (LFO) Falling Edge capture, using the T3CSS bit. The USB SOF capture mode can be used to calibrate the system clock or external oscillator against the known USB host SOF clock. The LFO falling-edge capture mode can be used to calibrate the internal Low-Frequency Oscillator against the internal High-Frequency Oscillator or an external clock source. When T3SPLIT = 0, Timer 3 counts up and overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. Each time a capture event is received, the contents of the Timer 3 registers (TMR3H:TMR3L) are latched into the Timer 3 Reload registers (TMR3RLH:TMR3RLL). A Timer 3 interrupt is generated if enabled. 282 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 26.10. Timer 3 Capture Mode (T3SPLIT = 0) When T3SPLIT = 1, the Timer 3 registers (TMR3H and TMR3L) act as two 8-bit counters. Each counter counts up independently and overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. Each time a capture event is received, the con- tents of the Timer 3 registers are latched into the Timer 3 Reload registers (TMR3RLH and TMR3RLL). A Timer 3 interrupt is generated if enabled. Rev. 1.4 283

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Figure 26.11. Timer 3 Capture Mode (T3SPLIT = 0) 284 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.14. TMR3CN: Timer 3 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TF3H TF3L TF3LEN TF3CEN T3SPLIT TR3 T3CSS T3XCLK Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x91; SFR Page = 0 Bit Name Function 7 TF3H Timer 3 High Byte Overflow Flag. Set by hardware when the Timer 3 high byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. In 16 bit mode, this will occur when Timer 3 overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. When the Timer 3 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the Timer 3 interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware. 6 TF3L Timer 3 Low Byte Overflow Flag. Set by hardware when the Timer 3 low byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. TF3L will be set when the low byte overflows regardless of the Timer 3 mode. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware. 5 TF3LEN Timer 3 Low Byte Interrupt Enable. When set to 1, this bit enables Timer 3 Low Byte interrupts. If Timer 3 interrupts are also enabled, an interrupt will be generated when the low byte of Timer 3 overflows. 4 TF3CEN Timer 3 Low-Frequency Oscillator Capture Enable. When set to 1, this bit enables Timer 3 Low-Frequency Oscillator Capture Mode. If TF3CEN is set and Timer 3 interrupts are enabled, an interrupt will be generated on a falling edge of the low-frequency oscillator output, and the current 16-bit timer value in TMR3H:TMR3L will be copied to TMR3RLH:TMR3RLL. 3 T3SPLIT Timer 3 Split Mode Enable. When this bit is set, Timer 3 operates as two 8-bit timers with auto-reload. 2 TR3 Timer 3 Run Control. Timer 3 is enabled by setting this bit to 1. In 8-bit mode, this bit enables/disables TMR3H only; TMR3L is always enabled in split mode. 1 T3CSS Timer 3 Capture Source Select. This bit selects the source of a capture event when bit T2CE is set to 1. 0: Capture source is USB SOF event. 1: Capture source is falling edge of Low-Frequency Oscillator. 0 T3XCLK Timer 3 External Clock Select. This bit selects the external clock source for Timer 3. However, the Timer 3 Clock Select bits (T3MH and T3ML in register CKCON) may still be used to select between the external clock and the system clock for either timer. 0: Timer 3 clock is the system clock divided by 12. 1: Timer 3 clock is the external clock divided by 8 (synchronized with SYSCLK). Rev. 1.4 285

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.15. TMR3RLL: Timer 3 Reload Register Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR3RLL[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x92; SFR Page = 0 Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR3RLL[7:0] Timer 3 Reload Register Low Byte. TMR3RLL holds the low byte of the reload value for Timer 3. SFR Definition 26.16. TMR3RLH: Timer 3 Reload Register High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR3RLH[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x93; SFR Page = 0 Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR3RLH[7:0] Timer 3 Reload Register High Byte. TMR3RLH holds the high byte of the reload value for Timer 3. SFR Definition 26.17. TMR3L: Timer 3 Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR3L[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x94; SFR Page = 0 Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR3L[7:0] Timer 3 Low Byte. In 16-bit mode, the TMR3L register contains the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 3. In 8-bit mode, TMR3L contains the 8-bit low byte timer value. 286 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.18. TMR3H Timer 3 High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR3H[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x95; SFR Page = 0 Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR3H[7:0] Timer 3 High Byte. In 16-bit mode, the TMR3H register contains the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 3. In 8-bit mode, TMR3H contains the 8-bit high byte timer value. Rev. 1.4 287

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 288 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 26.4. Timer 4 Timer 4 is a 16-bit timer formed by two 8-bit SFRs: TMR4L (low byte) and TMR4H (high byte). Timer 4 may operate in 16-bit auto-reload mode or (split) 8-bit auto-reload mode. The T4SPLIT bit (TMR4CN.3) defines Timer 4 may be clocked by the system clock, the system clock divided by 12, or the external oscillator source divided by 8. Note that the external oscillator source divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock. 26.4.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload When T4SPLIT (TMR4CN.3) is zero, Timer 4 operates as a 16-bit timer with auto-reload. Timer 4 can be clocked by SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8. As the 16-bit timer register increments and overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the 16-bit value in the Timer 4 reload registers (TMR4RLH and TMR4RLL) is loaded into the Timer 4 register as shown in Figure 26.12, and the Timer 4 High Byte Overflow Flag (TMR4CN.7) is set. If Timer 4 interrupts are enabled (if EIE1.7 is set), an interrupt will be generated on each Timer 4 overflow. Additionally, if Timer 4 interrupts are enabled and the TF4LEN bit is set (TMR4CN.5), an interrupt will be generated each time the lower 8 bits (TMR4L) overflow from 0xFF to 0x00. Figure 26.12. Timer 4 16-Bit Mode Block Diagram Rev. 1.4 288

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 26.4.2. 8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload When T4SPLIT is 1 and T4CE = 0, Timer 4 operates as two 8-bit timers (TMR4H and TMR4L). Both 8-bit timers operate in auto-reload mode as shown in Figure 26.13. TMR4RLL holds the reload value for TMR4L; TMR4RLH holds the reload value for TMR4H. The TR4 bit in TMR4CN handles the run control for TMR4H. TMR4L is always running when configured for 8-bit Mode. Each 8-bit timer may be configured to use SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8. The Timer 4 Clock Select bits (T4MH and T4ML in CKCON1) select either SYSCLK or the clock defined by the Timer 4 External Clock Select bit (T4XCLK in TMR4CN), as follows: T4MH T4XCLK TMR4H Clock Source T4ML T4XCLK TMR4L Clock Source 0 0 SYSCLK/12 0 0 SYSCLK/12 0 1 External Clock/8 0 1 External Clock/8 1 X SYSCLK 1 X SYSCLK The TF4H bit is set when TMR4H overflows from 0xFF to 0x00; the TF4L bit is set when TMR4L overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. When Timer 4 interrupts are enabled, an interrupt is generated each time TMR4H over- flows. If Timer 4 interrupts are enabled and TF4LEN (TMR4CN.5) is set, an interrupt is generated each time either TMR4L or TMR4H overflows. When TF4LEN is enabled, software must check the TF4H and TF4L flags to determine the source of the Timer 4 interrupt. The TF4H and TF4L interrupt flags are not cleared by hardware and must be manually cleared by software. Figure 26.13. Timer 4 8-Bit Mode Block Diagram 289 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.19. TMR4CN: Timer 4 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TF4H TF4L TF4LEN T4SPLIT TR4 T4XCLK Type R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x91; SFR Page = F Bit Name Function 7 TF4H Timer 4 High Byte Overflow Flag. Set by hardware when the Timer 4 high byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. In 16 bit mode, this will occur when Timer 4 overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. When the Timer 4 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the Timer 4 interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware. 6 TF4L Timer 4 Low Byte Overflow Flag. Set by hardware when the Timer 4 low byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. TF4L will be set when the low byte overflows regardless of the Timer 4 mode. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware. 5 TF4LEN Timer 4 Low Byte Interrupt Enable. When set to 1, this bit enables Timer 4 Low Byte interrupts. If Timer 4 interrupts are also enabled, an interrupt will be generated when the low byte of Timer 4 overflows. 4 Unused Read = 0b; Write = don’t care. 3 T4SPLIT Timer 4 Split Mode Enable. When this bit is set, Timer 4 operates as two 8-bit timers with auto-reload. 0: Timer 4 operates in 16-bit auto-reload mode. 1: Timer 4 operates as two 8-bit auto-reload timers. 2 TR4 Timer 4 Run Control. Timer 4 is enabled by setting this bit to 1. In 8-bit mode, this bit enables/disables TMR4H only; TMR4L is always enabled in split mode. 1 Unused Read = 0b; Write = don’t care. 0 T4XCLK Timer 4 External Clock Select. This bit selects the external clock source for Timer 4. However, the Timer 4 Clock Select bits (T4MH and T4ML in register CKCON1) may still be used to select between the external clock and the system clock for either timer. 0: Timer 4 clock is the system clock divided by 12. 1: Timer 4 clock is the external clock divided by 8 (synchronized with SYSCLK). Rev. 1.4 290

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.20. TMR4RLL: Timer 4 Reload Register Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR4RLL[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x92; SFR Page = F Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR4RLL[7:0] Timer 4 Reload Register Low Byte. TMR4RLL holds the low byte of the reload value for Timer 4. SFR Definition 26.21. TMR4RLH: Timer 4 Reload Register High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR4RLH[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x93; SFR Page = F Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR4RLH[7:0] Timer 4 Reload Register High Byte. TMR4RLH holds the high byte of the reload value for Timer 4. SFR Definition 26.22. TMR4L: Timer 4 Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR4L[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x94; SFR Page = F Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR4L[7:0] Timer 4 Low Byte. In 16-bit mode, the TMR4L register contains the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 4. In 8-bit mode, TMR4L contains the 8-bit low byte timer value. 291 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.23. TMR4H Timer 4 High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR4H[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0x95; SFR Page = F Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR4H[7:0] Timer 4 High Byte. In 16-bit mode, the TMR4H register contains the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 4. In 8-bit mode, TMR4H contains the 8-bit high byte timer value. Rev. 1.4 292

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 293 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 26.5. Timer 5 Timer 5 is a 16-bit timer formed by two 8-bit SFRs: TMR5L (low byte) and TMR5H (high byte). Timer 5 may operate in 16-bit auto-reload mode or (split) 8-bit auto-reload mode. The T5SPLIT bit (TMR5CN.3) defines Timer 5 may be clocked by the system clock, the system clock divided by 12, or the external oscillator source divided by 8. Note that the external oscillator source divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock. 26.5.1. 16-bit Timer with Auto-Reload When T5SPLIT (TMR5CN.3) is zero, Timer 5 operates as a 16-bit timer with auto-reload. Timer 5 can be clocked by SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8. As the 16-bit timer register increments and overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the 16-bit value in the Timer 5 reload registers (TMR5RLH and TMR5RLL) is loaded into the Timer 5 register as shown in Figure 26.14, and the Timer 5 High Byte Overflow Flag (TMR5CN.7) is set. If Timer 5 interrupts are enabled (if EIE1.7 is set), an interrupt will be generated on each Timer 5 overflow. Additionally, if Timer 5 interrupts are enabled and the TF5LEN bit is set (TMR5CN.5), an interrupt will be generated each time the lower 8 bits (TMR5L) overflow from 0xFF to 0x00. Figure 26.14. Timer 5 16-Bit Mode Block Diagram Rev. 1.4 293

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 26.5.2. 8-bit Timers with Auto-Reload When T5SPLIT is 1 and T5CE = 0, Timer 5 operates as two 8-bit timers (TMR5H and TMR5L). Both 8-bit timers operate in auto-reload mode as shown in Figure 26.15. TMR5RLL holds the reload value for TMR5L; TMR5RLH holds the reload value for TMR5H. The TR5 bit in TMR5CN handles the run control for TMR5H. TMR5L is always running when configured for 8-bit Mode. Each 8-bit timer may be configured to use SYSCLK, SYSCLK divided by 12, or the external oscillator clock source divided by 8. The Timer 5 Clock Select bits (T5MH and T5ML in CKCON1) select either SYSCLK or the clock defined by the Timer 5 External Clock Select bit (T5XCLK in TMR5CN), as follows: T5MH T5XCLK TMR5H Clock Source T5ML T5XCLK TMR5L Clock Source 0 0 SYSCLK/12 0 0 SYSCLK/12 0 1 External Clock/8 0 1 External Clock/8 1 X SYSCLK 1 X SYSCLK The TF5H bit is set when TMR5H overflows from 0xFF to 0x00; the TF5L bit is set when TMR5L overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. When Timer 5 interrupts are enabled, an interrupt is generated each time TMR5H over- flows. If Timer 5 interrupts are enabled and TF5LEN (TMR5CN.5) is set, an interrupt is generated each time either TMR5L or TMR5H overflows. When TF5LEN is enabled, software must check the TF5H and TF5L flags to determine the source of the Timer 5 interrupt. The TF5H and TF5L interrupt flags are not cleared by hardware and must be manually cleared by software. Figure 26.15. Timer 5 8-Bit Mode Block Diagram 294 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.24. TMR5CN: Timer 5 Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TF5H TF5L TF5LEN T5SPLIT TR5 T5XCLK Type R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W R R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xC8; SFR Page = F; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Function 7 TF5H Timer 5 High Byte Overflow Flag. Set by hardware when the Timer 5 high byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. In 16 bit mode, this will occur when Timer 5 overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. When the Timer 5 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the Timer 5 interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware. 6 TF5L Timer 5 Low Byte Overflow Flag. Set by hardware when the Timer 5 low byte overflows from 0xFF to 0x00. TF5L will be set when the low byte overflows regardless of the Timer 5 mode. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware. 5 TF5LEN Timer 5 Low Byte Interrupt Enable. When set to 1, this bit enables Timer 5 Low Byte interrupts. If Timer 5 interrupts are also enabled, an interrupt will be generated when the low byte of Timer 5 overflows. 4 Unused Read = 0b; Write = don’t care. 3 T5SPLIT Timer 5 Split Mode Enable. When this bit is set, Timer 5 operates as two 8-bit timers with auto-reload. 0: Timer 5 operates in 16-bit auto-reload mode. 1: Timer 5 operates as two 8-bit auto-reload timers. 2 TR5 Timer 5 Run Control. Timer 5 is enabled by setting this bit to 1. In 8-bit mode, this bit enables/disables TMR5H only; TMR5L is always enabled in split mode. 1 Unused Read = 0b; Write = don’t care. 0 T5XCLK Timer 5 External Clock Select. This bit selects the external clock source for Timer 5. However, the Timer 5 Clock Select bits (T5MH and T5ML in register CKCON1) may still be used to select between the external clock and the system clock for either timer. 0: Timer 5 clock is the system clock divided by 12. 1: Timer 5 clock is the external clock divided by 8 (synchronized with SYSCLK). Rev. 1.4 295

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.25. TMR5RLL: Timer 5 Reload Register Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR5RLL[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xCA; SFR Page = F Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR5RLL[7:0] Timer 5 Reload Register Low Byte. TMR5RLL holds the low byte of the reload value for Timer 5. SFR Definition 26.26. TMR5RLH: Timer 5 Reload Register High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR5RLH[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xCB; SFR Page = F Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR5RLH[7:0] Timer 5 Reload Register High Byte. TMR5RLH holds the high byte of the reload value for Timer 5. SFR Definition 26.27. TMR5L: Timer 5 Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR5L[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xCC; SFR Page = F Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR5L[7:0] Timer 5 Low Byte. In 16-bit mode, the TMR5L register contains the low byte of the 16-bit Timer 5. In 8-bit mode, TMR5L contains the 8-bit low byte timer value. 296 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 26.28. TMR5H Timer 5 High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name TMR5H[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xCD; SFR Page = F Bit Name Function 7:0 TMR5H[7:0] Timer 5 High Byte. In 16-bit mode, the TMR5H register contains the high byte of the 16-bit Timer 5. In 8-bit mode, TMR5H contains the 8-bit high byte timer value. Rev. 1.4 297

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 27. Programmable Counter Array The Programmable Counter Array (PCA0) provides enhanced timer functionality while requiring less CPU intervention than the standard 8051 counter/timers. The PCA consists of a dedicated 16-bit counter/timer and five 16-bit capture/compare modules. Each capture/compare module has its own associated I/O line (CEXn) which is routed through the Crossbar to Port I/O when enabled. The counter/timer is driven by a programmable timebase that can select between six sources: system clock, system clock divided by four, system clock divided by twelve, the external oscillator clock source divided by 8, Timer 0 overflows, or an external clock signal on the ECI input pin. Each capture/compare module may be configured to operate independently in one of six modes: Edge-Triggered Capture, Software Timer, High-Speed Output, Fre- quency Output, 8-Bit PWM, or 16-Bit PWM (each mode is described in Section “27.3. Capture/Compare Modules” on page 301). The external oscillator clock option is ideal for real-time clock (RTC) functionality, allowing the PCA to be clocked by a precision external oscillator while the internal oscillator drives the sys- tem clock. The PCA is configured and controlled through the system controller's Special Function Regis- ters. The PCA block diagram is shown in Figure 27.1 Important Note: The PCA Module 4 may be used as a watchdog timer (WDT), and is enabled in this mode following a system reset. Access to certain PCA registers is restricted while WDT mode is enabled. See Section 27.4 for details. Figure 27.1. PCA Block Diagram Rev. 1.4 298

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 27.1. PCA Counter/Timer The 16-bit PCA counter/timer consists of two 8-bit SFRs: PCA0L and PCA0H. PCA0H is the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit counter/timer and PCA0L is the low byte (LSB). Reading PCA0L automatically latches the value of PCA0H into a “snapshot” register; the following PCA0H read accesses this “snapshot” register. Reading the PCA0L register first guarantees an accurate reading of the entire 16-bit PCA0 counter. Reading PCA0H or PCA0L does not disturb the counter operation. The CPS2–CPS0 bits in the PCA0MD register select the timebase for the counter/timer as shown in Table 27.1. When the counter/timer overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000, the Counter Overflow Flag (CF) in PCA0MD is set to logic 1 and an interrupt request is generated if CF interrupts are enabled. Setting the ECF bit in PCA0MD to logic 1 enables the CF flag to generate an interrupt request. The CF bit is not automatically cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine, and must be cleared by soft- ware. Clearing the CIDL bit in the PCA0MD register allows the PCA to continue normal operation while the CPU is in Idle mode. Table 27.1. PCA Timebase Input Options CPS2 CPS1 CPS0 Timebase 0 0 0 System clock divided by 12 0 0 1 System clock divided by 4 0 1 0 Timer 0 overflow High-to-low transitions on ECI (max rate = system clock divided 0 1 1 by 4) 1 0 0 System c lock 1 0 1 External oscillator source divided by 8* 1 1 x Reserved Note: External oscillator source divided by 8 is synchronized with the system clock. Figure 27.2. PCA Counter/Timer Block Diagram 299 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 27.2. PCA0 Interrupt Sources Figure 27.3 shows a diagram of the PCA interrupt tree. There are six independent event flags that can be used to generate a PCA0 interrupt. They are: the main PCA counter overflow flag (CF), which is set upon a 16-bit overflow of the PCA0 counter and the individual flags for each PCA channel (CCF0, CCF1, CCF2, CCF3, and CCF4), which are set according to the operation mode of that module. These event flags are always set when the trigger condition occurs. Each of these flags can be individually selected to generate a PCA0 interrupt, using the corresponding interrupt enable flag (ECF for CF, and ECCFn for each CCFn). PCA0 interrupts must be globally enabled before any individual interrupt sources are recognized by the processor. PCA0 interrupts are globally enabled by setting the EA bit and the EPCA0 bit to logic 1. Figure 27.3. PCA Interrupt Block Diagram Rev. 1.4 300

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 27.3. Capture/Compare Modules Each module can be configured to operate independently in one of six operation modes: edge-triggered capture, software timer, high-speed output, frequency output, 8-bit pulse width modulator, or 16-bit pulse width modulator. Each module has Special Function Registers (SFRs) associated with it in the CIP-51 sys- tem controller. These registers are used to exchange data with a module and configure the module's mode of operation. Table 27.2 summarizes the bit settings in the PCA0CPMn register used to select the PCA capture/compare module’s operating mode. Setting the ECCFn bit in a PCA0CPMn register enables the module's CCFn interrupt. Table 27.2. PCA0CPM Bit Settings for PCA Capture/Compare Modules Operational Mode PCA0CPMn Bit Number 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Capture triggered by positive edge on CEXn X X 1 0 0 0 0 A Capture triggered by negative edge on CEXn X X 0 1 0 0 0 A Capture triggered by any transition on CEXn X X 1 1 0 0 0 A Software Timer X B 0 0 1 0 0 A High Speed Output X B 0 0 1 1 0 A Frequency Output X B 0 0 0 1 1 A 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator 0 B 0 0 C 0 1 A 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator 1 B 0 0 C 0 1 A Notes: 1. X = Don’t Care (no functional difference for individual module if 1 or 0). 2. A = Enable interrupts for this module (PCA interrupt triggered on CCFn set to 1). 3. B = When set to 0, the digital comparator is off. For high speed and frequency output modes, the associated pin will not toggle. In any of the PWM modes, this generates a 0% duty cycle (output = 0). 4. C = When set, a match event will cause the CCFn flag for the associated channel to be set. 301 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 27.3.1. Edge-triggered Capture Mode In this mode, a valid transition on the CEXn pin causes the PCA to capture the value of the PCA counter/timer and load it into the corresponding module's 16-bit capture/compare register (PCA0CPLn and PCA0CPHn). The CAPPn and CAPNn bits in the PCA0CPMn register are used to select the type of transi- tion that triggers the capture: low-to-high transition (positive edge), high-to-low transition (negative edge), or either transition (positive or negative edge). When a capture occurs, the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn) in PCA0CN is set to logic 1. An interrupt request is generated if the CCFn interrupt for that module is enabled. The CCFn bit is not automatically cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt ser- vice routine, and must be cleared by software. If both CAPPn and CAPNn bits are set to logic 1, then the state of the Port pin associated with CEXn can be read directly to determine whether a rising-edge or fall- ing-edge caused the capture. Figure 27.4. PCA Capture Mode Diagram Note: The CEXn input signal must remain high or low for at least 2 system clock cycles to be recognized by the hardware. Rev. 1.4 302

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 27.3.2. Software Timer (Compare) Mode In Software Timer mode, the PCA counter/timer value is compared to the module's 16-bit capture/compare register (PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn). When a match occurs, the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn) in PCA0CN is set to logic 1. An interrupt request is generated if the CCFn interrupt for that module is enabled. The CCFn bit is not automatically cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt ser- vice routine, and must be cleared by software. Setting the ECOMn and MATn bits in the PCA0CPMn regis- ter enables Software Timer mode. Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Cap- ture/Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit to 0; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to 1. Figure 27.5. PCA Software Timer Mode Diagram 303 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 27.3.3. High-Speed Output Mode In High-Speed Output mode, a module’s associated CEXn pin is toggled each time a match occurs between the PCA Counter and the module's 16-bit capture/compare register (PCA0CPHn and PCA0CPLn). When a match occurs, the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn) in PCA0CN is set to logic 1. An interrupt request is generated if the CCFn interrupt for that module is enabled. The CCFn bit is not auto- matically cleared by hardware when the CPU vectors to the interrupt service routine, and must be cleared by software. Setting the TOGn, MATn, and ECOMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register enables the High- Speed Output mode. If ECOMn is cleared, the associated pin will retain its state, and not toggle on the next match event. Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Cap- ture/Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit to 0; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to 1. Figure 27.6. PCA High-Speed Output Mode Diagram Rev. 1.4 304

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 27.3.4. Frequency Output Mode Frequency Output Mode produces a programmable-frequency square wave on the module’s associated CEXn pin. The capture/compare module high byte holds the number of PCA clocks to count before the out- put is toggled. The frequency of the square wave is then defined by Equation 27.1. F PCA F = ------------------------------------------- CEXn 2PCA0CPHn Note: A value of 0x00 in the PCA0CPHn register is equal to 256 for this equation. Equation 27.1. Square Wave Frequency Output Where F is the frequency of the clock selected by the CPS2–0 bits in the PCA mode register, PCA PCA0MD. The lower byte of the capture/compare module is compared to the PCA counter low byte; on a match, CEXn is toggled and the offset held in the high byte is added to the matched value in PCA0CPLn. Frequency Output Mode is enabled by setting the ECOMn, TOGn, and PWMn bits in the PCA0CPMn reg- ister. Note that the MATn bit should normally be set to 0 in this mode. If the MATn bit is set to 1, the CCFn flag for the channel will be set when the 16-bit PCA0 counter and the 16-bit capture/compare register for the channel are equal. Figure 27.7. PCA Frequency Output Mode 305 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 27.3.5. 8-bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode The duty cycle of the PWM output signal in 8-bit PWM mode is varied using the module's PCA0CPLn cap- ture/compare register. When the value in the low byte of the PCA counter/timer (PCA0L) is equal to the value in PCA0CPLn, the output on the CEXn pin will be set. When the count value in PCA0L overflows, the CEXn output will be reset (see Figure 27.8). Also, when the counter/timer low byte (PCA0L) overflows from 0xFF to 0x00, PCA0CPLn is reloaded automatically with the value stored in the module’s capture/compare high byte (PCA0CPHn) without software intervention. Setting the ECOMn and PWMn bits in the PCA0CPMn register enables 8-Bit Pulse Width Modulator mode. If the MATn bit is set to 1, the CCFn flag for the module will be set each time an 8-bit comparator match (rising edge) occurs. The duty cycle for 8- Bit PWM Mode is given in Equation 27.2. Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Cap- ture/Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit to 0; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to 1. 256–PCA0CPHn Duty Cycle = ------------------------------------------------------- 256 Equation 27.2. 8-Bit PWM Duty Cycle Using Equation 27.2, the largest duty cycle is 100% (PCA0CPHn = 0), and the smallest duty cycle is 0.39% (PCA0CPHn = 0xFF). A 0% duty cycle may be generated by clearing the ECOMn bit to 0. Figure 27.8. PCA 8-Bit PWM Mode Diagram Rev. 1.4 306

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 27.3.6. 16-Bit Pulse Width Modulator Mode A PCA module may also be operated in 16-Bit PWM mode. In this mode, the 16-bit capture/compare mod- ule defines the number of PCA clocks for the low time of the PWM signal. When the PCA counter matches the module contents, the output on CEXn is asserted high; when the 16-bit counter overflows, CEXn is asserted low. To output a varying duty cycle, new value writes should be synchronized with PCA CCFn match interrupts. 16-Bit PWM Mode is enabled by setting the ECOMn, PWMn, and PWM16n bits in the PCA0CPMn register. For a varying duty cycle, match interrupts should be enabled (ECCFn = 1 AND MATn = 1) to help synchronize the capture/compare register writes. If the MATn bit is set to 1, the CCFn flag for the module will be set each time a 16-bit comparator match (rising edge) occurs. The CF flag in PCA0CN can be used to detect the overflow (falling edge). The duty cycle for 16-Bit PWM Mode is given by Equation 27.3. Important Note About Capture/Compare Registers: When writing a 16-bit value to the PCA0 Cap- ture/Compare registers, the low byte should always be written first. Writing to PCA0CPLn clears the ECOMn bit to 0; writing to PCA0CPHn sets ECOMn to 1. 65536–PCA0CPn Duty Cycle = --------------------------------------------------------- 65536 Equation 27.3. 16-Bit PWM Duty Cycle Using Equation 27.3, the largest duty cycle is 100% (PCA0CPn = 0), and the smallest duty cycle is 0.0015% (PCA0CPn = 0xFFFF). A 0% duty cycle may be generated by clearing the ECOMn bit to 0. Figure 27.9. PCA 16-Bit PWM Mode 307 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 27.4. Watchdog Timer Mode A programmable watchdog timer (WDT) function is available through the PCA Module 4. The WDT is used to generate a reset if the time between writes to the WDT update register (PCA0CPH4) exceed a specified limit. The WDT can be configured and enabled/disabled as needed by software. With the WDTE bit set in the PCA0MD register, Module 4 operates as a watchdog timer (WDT). The Mod- ule 4 high byte is compared to the PCA counter high byte; the Module 4 low byte holds the offset to be used when WDT updates are performed. The Watchdog Timer is enabled on reset. Writes to some PCA registers are restricted while the Watchdog Timer is enabled. The WDT will generate a reset shortly after code begins execution. To avoid this reset, the WDT should be explicitly disabled (and option- ally re-configured and re-enabled if it is used in the system). 27.4.1. Watchdog Timer Operation While the WDT is enabled:  PCA counter is forced on.  Writes to PCA0L and PCA0H are not allowed.  PCA clock source bits (CPS2–CPS0) are frozen.  PCA Idle control bit (CIDL) is frozen.  Module 4 is forced into software timer mode.  Writes to the Module 4 mode register (PCA0CPM4) are disabled. While the WDT is enabled, writes to the CR bit will not change the PCA counter state; the counter will run until the WDT is disabled. The PCA counter r un control bit (CR) will read zero if the WDT is enabled but user software has not enabled the PCA counter. If a match occurs between PCA0CPH4 and PCA0H while the WDT is enabled, a reset will be generated. To prevent a WDT reset, the WDT may be updated with a write of any value to PCA0CPH4. Upon a PCA0CPH4 write, PCA0H plus the offset held in PCA0CPL4 is loaded into PCA0CPH4 (See Figure 27.10). Figure 27.10. PCA Module 4 with Watchdog Timer Enabled Rev. 1.4 308

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C The 8-bit offset held in PCA0CPH4 is compared to the upper byte of the 16-bit PCA counter. This offset value is the number of PCA0L overflows before a reset. Up to 256 PCA clocks may pass before the first PCA0L overflow occurs, depending on the value of the PCA0L when the update is performed. The total off- set is then given (in PCA clocks) by Equation 27.4, where PCA0L is the value of the PCA0L register at the time of the update. Offset = 256PCA0CPL4+256–PCA0L Equation 27.4. Watchdog Timer Offset in PCA Clocks The WDT reset is generated when PCA0L overflows while there is a match between PCA0CPH4 and PCA0H. Software may force a WDT reset by writing a 1 to the CCF4 flag (PCA0CN.4) while the WDT is enabled. 27.4.2. Watchdog Timer Usage To configure the WDT, perform the following tasks: 1. Disable the WDT by writing a 0 to the WDTE bit. 2. Select the desired PCA clock source (with the CPS2–CPS0 bits). 3. Load PCA0CPL4 with the desired WDT update offset value. 4. Configure the PCA Idle mode (set CIDL if the WDT should be suspended while the CPU is in Idle mode). 5. Enable the WDT by setting the WDTE bit to 1. 6. Reset the WDT timer by writing to PCA0CPH4. The PCA clock source and Idle mode select cannot be changed while the WDT is enabled. The watchdog timer is enabled by setting the WDTE or WDLCK bits in the PCA0MD register. When WDLCK is set, the WDT cannot be disabled until the next system reset. If WDLCK is not set, the WDT is disabled by clearing the WDTE bit. The WDT is enabled following any reset. The PCA0 counter clock defaults to the system clock divided by 12, PCA0L defaults to 0x00, and PCA0CPL4 defaults to 0x00. Using Equation 27.4, this results in a WDT timeout interval of 256 PCA clock cycles, or 3072 system clock cycles. Table 27.3 lists some example tim- eout intervals for typical system clocks. 309 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C Table 27.3. Watchdog Timer Timeout Intervals1 System Clock (Hz) PCA0CPL4 Timeout Interval (ms) 48,000,000 255 16.4 48,000,000 128 8.3 48,000,000 32 2.1 12,000,000 255 65.5 12,000,000 128 33.0 12,000,000 32 8.4 1,500,0002 255 524.3 1,500,0002 128 264.2 1,500,0002 32 67.6 32,768 255 24,000 32,768 128 12,094 32,768 32 3,094 Notes: 1. Assumes SYSCLK/12 as the PCA clock so urce, and a PCA0L value of 0x00 at the update time. 2. Internal SYSCLK reset frequency = Internal Oscillator divided by 8. Rev. 1.4 310

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 27.5. Register Descriptions for PCA0 Following are detailed descriptions of the special function registers related to the operation of the PCA. SFR Definition 27.1. PCA0CN: PCA Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CF CR CCF4 CCF3 CCF2 CCF1 CCF0 Type R/W R/W R R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xD8; SFR Page = All Pages; Bit-Addressable Bit Name Function 7 CF PCA Counter/Timer Overflow Flag. Set by hardware when the PCA Counter/Timer overflows from 0xFFFF to 0x0000. When the Counter/Timer Overflow (CF) interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service routine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software. 6 CR PCA Counter/Timer Run Control. This bit enables/disables the PCA Counter/Timer. 0: PCA Counter/Timer disabled. 1: PCA Counter/Timer enabled. 5 Unused Read = 0b, Write = Don't care. 2 CCF4 PCA Module 4 Capture/Compare Flag. This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF4 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service rou- tine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software. 1 CCF3 PCA Module 3 Capture/Compare Flag. This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF3 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service rou- tine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software. 2 CCF2 PCA Module 2 Capture/Compare Flag. This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF2 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service rou- tine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software. 1 CCF1 PCA Module 1 Capture/Compare Flag. This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF1 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service rou- tine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software. 0 CCF0 PCA Module 0 Capture/Compare Flag. This bit is set by hardware when a match or capture occurs. When the CCF0 interrupt is enabled, setting this bit causes the CPU to vector to the PCA interrupt service rou- tine. This bit is not automatically cleared by hardware and must be cleared by software. 311 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 27.2. PCA0MD: PCA Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name CIDL WDTE WDLCK CPS[2:0] ECF Type R/W R/W R/W R R/W R/W Reset 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xD9; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7 CIDL PCA Counter/Timer Idle Control. Specifies PCA behavior when CPU is in Idle Mode. 0: PCA continues to function normally while the system controller is in Idle Mode. 1: PCA operation is suspended while the system controller is in Idle Mode. 6 WDTE Watchdog Timer Enable. If this bit is set, PCA Module 4 is used as the watchdog timer. 0: Watchdog Timer disabled. 1: PCA Module 4 enabled as Watchdog Timer. 5 WDLCK Watchdog Timer Lock. This bit locks/unlocks the Watchdog Timer Enable. When WDLCK is set, the Watchdog Timer may not be disabled until the next system reset. 0: Watchdog Timer Enable unlocked. 1: Watchdog Timer Enable locked. 4 Unused Read = 0b, Write = Don't care. 3:1 CPS[2:0] PCA Counter/Timer Pulse Select. These bits select the timebase source for the PCA counter 000: System clock divided by 12 001: System clock divided by 4 010: Timer 0 overflow 011: High-to-low transitions on ECI (max rate = system clock divided by 4) 100: System clock 101: External clock divided by 8 (synchronized with the system clock) 11x: Reserved 0 ECF PCA Counter/Timer Overflow Interrupt Enable. This bit sets the masking of the PCA Counter/Timer Overflow (CF) interrupt. 0: Disable the CF interrupt. 1: Enable a PCA Counter/Timer Overflow interrupt request when CF (PCA0CN.7) is set. Note: When the WDTE bit is set to 1, the other bits in the PCA0MD register cannot be modified. To change the contents of the PCA0MD register, the Watchdog Timer must first be disabled. Rev. 1.4 312

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 27.3. PCA0CPMn: PCA Capture/Compare Mode Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PWM16n ECOMn CAPPn CAPNn MATn TOGn PWMn ECCFn Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Addresses: 0xDA (n = 0), 0xDB (n = 1), 0xDC (n = 2), 0xDD (n = 3), 0xDE (n = 4) SFR Pages: All Pages (n = 0), All Pages (n = 1), All Pages (n = 2), All Pages (n = 3), All Pages (n = 4) Bit Name Function 7 PWM16n 16-bit Pulse Width Modulation Enable. This bit enables 16-bit mode when Pulse Width Modulation mode is enabled. 0: 8-bit PWM selected. 1: 16-bit PWM selected. 6 ECOMn Comparator Function Enable. This bit enables the comparator function for PCA module n when set to 1. 5 CAPPn Capture Positive Function Enable. This bit enables the positive edge capture for PCA module n when set to 1. 4 CAPNn Capture Negative Function Enable. This bit enables the negative edge capture for PCA module n when set to 1. 3 MATn Match Function Enable. This bit enables the match function for PCA module n when set to 1. When enabled, matches of the PCA counter with a module's capture/compare register cause the CCFn bit in PCA0MD register to be set to logic 1. 2 TOGn Toggle Function Enable. This bit enables the toggle function for PCA module n when set to 1. When enabled, matches of the PCA counter with a module's capture/compare register cause the logic level on the CEXn pin to toggle. If the PWMn bit is also set to logic 1, the module oper- ates in Frequency Output Mode. 1 PWMn Pulse Width Modulation Mode Enable. This bit enables the PWM function for PCA module n when set to 1. When enabled, a pulse width modulated signal is output on the CEXn pin. 8-bit PWM is used if PWM16n is cleared; 16-bit mode is used if PWM16n is set to logic 1. If the TOGn bit is also set, the module operates in Frequency Output Mode. 0 ECCFn Capture/Compare Flag Interrupt Enable. This bit sets the masking of the Capture/Compare Flag (CCFn) interrupt. 0: Disable CCFn interrupts. 1: Enable a Capture/Compare Flag interrupt request when CCFn is set. Note: When the WDTE bit is set to 1, the PCA0CPM4 register cannot be modified, and module 4 acts as the watchdog timer. To change the contents of the PCA0CPM4 register or the function of module 4, the Watchdog Timer must be disabled. 313 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 27.4. PCA0L: PCA Counter/Timer Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PCA0[7:0] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xF9; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 PCA0[7:0] PCA Counter/Timer Low Byte. The PCA0L register holds the low byte (LSB) of the 16-bit PCA Counter/Timer. Note: When the WDTE bit is set to 1, the PCA0L register cannot be modified by software. To change the contents of the PCA0L register, the Watchdog Timer must first be disabled. SFR Definition 27.5. PCA0H: PCA Counter/Timer High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PCA0[15:8] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Address = 0xFA; SFR Page = All Pages Bit Name Function 7:0 PCA0[15:8] PCA Counter/Timer High Byte. The PCA0H register holds the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit PCA Counter/Timer. Reads of this register will read the contents of a “snapshot” register, whose contents are updated only when the contents of PCA0L are read (see Section 27.1). Note: When the WDTE bit is set to 1, the PCA0H register cannot be modified by software. To change the contents of the PCA0H register, the Watchdog Timer must first be disabled. Rev. 1.4 314

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C SFR Definition 27.6. PCA0CPLn: PCA Capture Module Low Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PCA0CPn[7:0] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Addresses: 0xFB (n = 0), 0xE9 (n = 1), 0xEB (n = 2), 0xED (n = 3), 0xFD (n = 4) SFR Pages: All Pages (n = 0), All Pages (n = 1), All Pages (n = 2), All Pages (n = 3), All Pages (n = 4) Bit Name Function 7:0 PCA0CPn[7:0] PCA Capture Module Low Byte. The PCA0CPLn register holds the low byte (LSB) of the 16-bit capture module n. Note: A write to this register will clear the module’s ECOMn bit to a 0. SFR Definition 27.7. PCA0CPHn: PCA Capture Module High Byte Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name PCA0CPn[15:8] Type R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 SFR Addresses: 0xFC (n = 0), 0xEA (n = 1), 0xEC (n = 2), 0xEE (n = 3), 0xFE (n = 4) SFR Pages: All Pages (n = 0), All Pages (n = 1), All Pages (n = 2), All Pages (n = 3), All Pages (n = 4) Bit Name Function 7:0 PCA0CPn[15:8] PCA Capture Module High Byte. The PCA0CPHn register holds the high byte (MSB) of the 16-bit capture module n. Note: A write to this register will set the module’s ECOMn bit to a 1. 315 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 28. C2 Interface C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C devices include an on-chip Silicon Labs 2-Wire (C2) debug interface to allow Flash programming and in-system debugging with the production part installed in the end application. The C2 interface uses a clock signal (C2CK) and a bi-directional C2 data signal (C2D) to transfer information between the device and a host system. See the C2 Interface Specification for details on the C2 protocol. 28.1. C2 Interface Registers The following describes the C2 registers necessary to perform Flash programming through the C2 inter- face. All C2 registers are accessed through the C2 interface as described in the C2 Interface Specification. C2 Register Definition 28.1. C2ADD: C2 Address Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name C2ADD[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Bit Name Function 7:0 C2ADD[7:0] C2 Address. The C2ADD register is accessed via the C2 interface to select the target Data register for C2 Data Read and Data Write commands. Address Description 0x00 Selects the Device ID register for Data Read instructions 0x01 Selects the Revision ID register for Data Read instructions 0x02 Selects the C2 Flash Programming Control register for Data Read/Write instructions 0xAD Selects the C2 Flash Programming Data register for Data Read/Write instructions Rev. 1.4 316

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C C2 Register Definition 28.2. DEVICEID: C2 Device ID Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name DEVICEID[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 C2 Address: 0x00 Bit Name Function 7:0 DEVICEID[7:0] Device ID. This read-only register returns the 8-bit device ID: 0x28 (C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C). C2 Register Definition 28.3. REVID: C2 Revision ID Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name REVID[7:0] Type R/W Reset Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies Varies C2 Address: 0x01 Bit Name Function 7:0 REVID[7:0] Revision ID. This read-only register returns the 8-bit revision ID. For example: 0x00 = Revision A. 317 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C C2 Register Definition 28.4. FPCTL: C2 Flash Programming Control Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name FPCTL[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C2 Address: 0x02 Bit Name Function 7:0 FPCTL[7:0] Flash Programming Control Register. This register is used to enable Flash programming via the C2 interface. To enable C2 Flash programming, the following codes must be written in order: 0x02, 0x01. Note that once C2 Flash programming is enabled, a system reset must be issued to resume normal operation. C2 Register Definition 28.5. FPDAT: C2 Flash Programming Data Bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Name FPDAT[7:0] Type R/W Reset 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 C2 Address: 0xAD Bit Name Function 7:0 FPDAT[7:0] C2 Flash Programming Data Register. This register is used to pass Flash commands, addresses, and data during C2 Flash accesses. Valid commands are listed below. Code Command 0x06 Flash Block Read 0x07 Flash Block Write 0x08 Flash Page Erase 0x03 Device Erase Rev. 1.4 318

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C 28.2. C2 Pin Sharing The C2 protocol allows the C2 pins to be shared with user functions so that in-system debugging and Flash programming may be performed. This is possible because C2 communication is typically performed when the device is in the halt state, where all on-chip peripherals and user software are stalled. In this halted state, the C2 interface can safely ‘borrow’ the C2CK (RST) and C2D pins. In most applications, external resistors are required to isolate C2 interface traffic from the user application. A typical isolation configuration is shown in Figure 28.1. Figure 28.1. Typical C2 Pin Sharing The configuration in Figure 28.1 assumes the following: 1. The user input (b) cannot change state while the target device is halted. 2. The RST pin on the target device is used as an input only. Additional resistors may be necessary depending on the specific application. 319 Rev. 1.4

C8051F380/1/2/3/4/5/6/7/C DOCUMENT CHANGE LIST Revision 0.2 to Revision 1.0  Updated Electrical Characteristics tables with latest data: Table 4.2, Table 4.4, Table 4.5, Table 4.7, Table 4.8, Table 4.10, Table 4.11 and Table 4.12.  Changed bit REG01CN.5 to Reserved in SFR Definition 8.1 and updated corresponding descriptions in sections 16.9 and 18.3.1.  Updated Figure 18.1. Oscillator Options.  Changed SFR Page in SFR Definition 21.2.  Updated descriptions of XOSCMD for Capacitor and RC modes in SFR Definition 18.6. Revision 1.0 to Revision 1.1  Updated front-page diagram to reflect the correct number of Timers, 6 instead of 4.  Updated Table 3.2, “TQFP-48 Package Dimensions,” on page 26 with the following: Fixed right-most column name from Min to Max Added max values for dimensions A, A1, A2, b, c, L, and q  Updated Figure 3.8 and Table 3.6 with correct QFN-32 package drawing and dimensions.  Updated Table 5.10, “ADC0 Electrical Characteristics,” on page 42 with new maximum value for ADC0 Power Supply Current. This addresses an item from the May 18th, 2012 Errata.  Added Section 6.2 regarding the Temperature Sensor.  Removed references to programmable gai n in “6. 10-Bit ADC (ADC0, C8051F380/1/2/3/C only)” .  Updated Table 15.1, “Special Function Register (SFR) Memory Map,” on page 112 to fill in the missing row information for the 0xC8 row.  Updated Table 16.1, “Interrupt Summary,” on page 120. The TMR4CN register is not bit-addressable.  Updated definition for the 000b value of the CLKSL bits in SFR Definition 19.1 (CLKSEL) to include the /4 factor. Revision 1.1 to Revision 1.2  Updated Comparator Input Offset Voltage specification in Table 5.13 on page 44. Revision 1.2 to Revision 1.3  Added VBUS to Table 5.1, “Absolute Maximum Ratings,” on page 37.  Added the “4. Typical Connection Diagrams” chapter.  Removed Figure 8.1, Figure 8.2, Figure 8.3, and Figure 8.4. These figures were replaced with a reference to the “4. Typical Connection Diagrams” chapter. Revision 1.3 to Revision 1.4  Added new device C8051F38C.  Updated Flash Endurance minimum specification, Flash Erase Cycle Time maximum specification, and added a note to Table 5.6 on page 40.  Updated Figure 22.1 to show proper clock sources for SMBus0 and SMBus1. Rev. 1.4 320

Simplicity Studio One-click access to MCU and wireless tools, documentation, software, source code libraries & more. Available for Windows, Mac and Linux! IoT Portfolio SW/HW Quality Support and Community www.silabs.com/IoT www.silabs.com/simplicity www.silabs.com/quality community.silabs.com Disclaimer Silicon Laboratories intends to provide customers with the latest, accurate, and in-depth documentation of all peripherals and modules available for system and software implementers using or intending to use the Silicon Laboratories products. Characterization data, available modules and peripherals, memory sizes and memory addresses refer to each specific device, and "Typical" parameters provided can and do vary in different applications. Application examples described herein are for illustrative purposes only. Silicon Laboratories reserves the right to make changes without further notice and limitation to product information, specifications, and descriptions herein, and does not give warranties as to the accuracy or completeness of the included information. Silicon Laboratories shall have no liability for the consequences of use of the information supplied herein. This document does not imply or express copyright licenses granted hereunder to design or fabricate any integrated circuits. The products must not be used within any Life Support System without the specific written consent of Silicon Laboratories. A "Life Support System" is any product or system intended to support or sustain life and/or health, which, if it fails, can be reasonably expected to result in significant personal injury or death. Silicon Laboratories products are generally not intended for military applications. Silicon Laboratories products shall under no circumstances be used in weapons of mass destruction including (but not limited to) nuclear, biological or chemical weapons, or missiles capable of delivering such weapons. Trademark Information Silicon Laboratories Inc., Silicon Laboratories, Silicon Labs, SiLabs and the Silicon Labs logo, CMEMS®, EFM, EFM32, EFR, Energy Micro, Energy Micro logo and combinations thereof, "the world’s most energy friendly microcontrollers", Ember®, EZLink®, EZMac®, EZRadio®, EZRadioPRO®, DSPLL®, ISOmodem ®, Precision32®, ProSLIC®, SiPHY®, USBXpress® and others are trademarks or registered trademarks of Silicon Laboratories Inc. ARM, CORTEX, Cortex-M3 and THUMB are trademarks or registered trademarks of ARM Holdings. Keil is a registered trademark of ARM Limited. All other products or brand names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective holders. Silicon Laboratories Inc. 400 West Cesar Chavez Austin, TX 78701 USA http://www.silabs.com